70 MC series 72 MC3-03X macro 74 MCSM1-01X 76 MCZR series 78 MZMT12X series 81 MCZM series. 82 MZMT5X series

Transcription

1

2 INDEX Optics 5 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS 8 TC series 10 TC CORE series 14 TCUV series 16 TCSM series 18 TCLWD series 20 TCCX series 22 TCCXQ series 24 TCZR series 26 TCBENCH series 27 TCBENCH CORE series 28 TCKIT case 29 TCEDGEVIS 30 TCHM series 30 TCVLWD series 31 TCCXHM series 31 TCCXLM series UP TO 4/3 SENSORS 32 TC2MHR-TC4MHR series 34 TC2MHR-TC4MHR CORE series 38 TCDP PLUS series 42 TCCX2M series VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS 44 TC16M series 46 TC4K series 48 TC12K series 52 PC series 56 PCCD series 58 PCHI series 60 PCBP series 62 PCPW series 64 PCMP series 66 TCCAGE series 360 VIEW OPTICS MACRO LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS 70 MC series 72 MC3-03X macro 74 MCSM1-01X 76 MCZR series 78 MZMT12X series 81 MCZM series UP TO 4/3 SENSORS 82 MZMT5X series VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS 84 MC4K series 86 MC12K series 88 MC16K series FIXED FOCAL LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS 90 ENMT series 92 ENMP series 92 ENHR series 93 ENVF series UP TO 4/3 SENSORS 93 EN2M series 94 ENUV2M series 94 EN43 series VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS 94 EN4K series INFRARED OPTICS SHORT WAVE INFRARED 96 SWIR series 97 ENSWIRMP Series MEDIUM WAVE INFRARED 98 MWIR series LONG WAVE INFRARED 99 LWIR series 102 ADKIT case ADAPTIVE OPTICS PRODUCTS In order to meet all of our customers needs, we have carefully selected a collection of machine vision components from experienced and qualified suppliers to complement our product range. These products are highlighted throughout the catalog with the RT symbol and have been identified by our product managers as the best available within their category : they range from general purpose fixed focal length lenses to LED illuminators and from high magnification telecentric lenses to resolution targets. These products will be delivered to you with the same level of competence, quality and technical support that you have come to know and expect from Opto Engineering. Our goal is to turn our knowledge, experience and passion for machine vision into a broad and comprehensive service for our customers.

3 Lighting 105 Software 187 LED ILLUMINATORS TELECENTRIC LIGHTS 108 LTCLHP series 110 LTCLHP CORE series 114 LTCL4K series DOME LIGHTS 116 LTDM series 118 LTDMC series RINGLIGHTS 120 LTLA series 122 LTRNST series 124 LTRNOB series 126 LTLAIC series 127 LTLADC series 128 LTRNDC series COMBINED LIGHTS 130 LTDMLA series 132 View-through system BACKLIGHTS 134 LTBP series 138 LTBC series 140 LTBFC series BAR LIGHTS 141 LTBRDC series LINE LIGHTS 142 LTLNC series TUNNEL LIGHTS 144 LTTNC series COAXIAL LIGHTS 145 LTCXC series LED PATTERN PROJECTORS 148 LTPRHP3W series 152 LTPRSMHP3W series 156 LTPRXP series 160 LTPRUP series 164 LTPKIT case Cameras 170 CLOE-CORE series 174 CLOE-360 OUT series 176 CLOE-360 IN series 178 ymir SMART CAMERAS AREA SCAN CAMERAS 181 mvbluefox3-2 series 183 mvbluecougar series CMHO series 202 CMPT series 202 CMPH series 203 CMHOCR series 203 CMPTCR series 204 CMBS series 206 CMMR series 210 WI series 212 Optical filters 215 PCCDLFAT 215 CPDPH EXT series 217 PTTC series 218 PTPR series 220 RC series MOUNTING MECHANICS ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES PATTERNS CONTROLLERS & POWER SUPPLIES 222 LTDV series 224 MTDV 226 PS series CABLES & ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 228 CB series 229 LTSCHP series 229 LDSC series COMPETENCE 188 Machine vision software competence 192 Vision system designer 197 CVTOOLS SOFTWARE LIBRARY Accessories Vision systems ALBERT 232 Self-learning vision system

4 Basics 240 Optics Lighting Cameras Vision systems Application notes Robotic application note Selection charts Sensor size chart telecentric 306 Sensor size chart entrocentric 308 Selection chart illuminators 310 Filter thread compatibility table

5 Optics

6 TELECENTRIC LENSES 360 VIEW OPTICS MACRO LENSES FIXED FOCAL LENSES INFRARED OPTICS ADAPTIVE OPTICS Demanding vision tasks such as precision measurement require zero distortion telecentric lenses. Opto Engineering provides the best components from the machine vision world covering almost every possible need in precision telecentric optics: wide range of high to low magnifications, classic and extremely compact designs like the TC4K FLAT and TC CORE series, standard or long working distances, fixed or variable magnifications like the TCZR and TCDP PLUS series, lenses with Scheimpflug adjustment for 3D applications as well as telecentric lenses with integrated coaxial illumination. 360 view optics are uniquely designed lenses allowing you to reduce the number of components in a vision system. They offer a smart approach to solving machine vision tasks and have become a standard in many industries. Correctly choosing optics is paramount to achieve high quality images, which are the basis of good image processing and essential to correctly qualify the object under inspection. Though the final result also depends on the camera resolution and pixel size, a lens is in many cases the stepping stone to build a machine vision system, therefore our motto at Opto Engineering is OPTICS FIRST. 5

7 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS UP TO 4/3 SENSORS VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS Outstanding optical performance. Unmatched customer service. Opto Engineering telecentric lenses are our core business: these products benefit from a decade-long effort in continuous research & development, resulting in an extensive range of part numbers for a diverse and ever-growing number of applications. These products deliver the highest optical performance available on the market: extra-telecentricity for thick object imaging very low distortion for accurate measurements excellent resolution for small pixel cameras wide field depth for large object displacements pre-adjusted back focal length and working distance compact and robust design, tailored for industrial environments TC lenses for matrix detectors also feature: bi-telecentric design detailed test report for each lens REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels. 6

8 7

9 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TC series Bi-telecentric lenses for matrix detectors up to 2/3 TC series bi-telecentric lenses represent the key component of any measurement system powered by machine vision: these lenses can truly take advantage of high-resolution detectors such as 5 Mpix - 2/3, acquiring images with exceptional fidelity and precision. The Opto Engineering bi-telecentric design makes these optics truly telecentric: no magnification change occurs when an object is moved closer to or away from the lens, making TC series ideal for measurement applications of mechanical parts ranging from extruded aluminium profiles to tiny clock gears. No other lenses can offer the same optical performance in terms of telecentricity and distortion: additionally you can further enhance depth of field and optical accuracy by pairing our TC lenses with LTCLHP telecentric illuminators. All of our TC lenses are rigorously tested and supplied with a detailed Test Report: We guarantee that 100% of our TC lenses meet or exceed our written specifications. KEY ADVANTAGES High telecentricity for thick object imaging. Nearly zero distortion for accurate measurements. Excellent resolution for high resolution cameras. Simple and robust design for industrial environments. Easy filter insertion. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. Opto Engineering TC series offers the best performance to price ratio available today and is the ideal choice when no compromise can be accepted in terms of reliability and ease of use. Additionally we supply useful accessories including CMHO clamping mechanics and CMPT mounting plates: mechanical support systems for easy integration in industrial environments, where a solid and secure assembly is mandatory. FOR HIGHER MAGNIFICATION LENSES SEE ALSO TCHM series p. 30 NEW Camera phase adjustment available on selected models for easy and hassle-free integration. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS LTCLHP CORE series p. 110 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Mounting mechanics CMHO and CMPT p

10 Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Phase Length Diam. number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 typical (max) typical (max) adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) 8 TC x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.08) 0.23 > 30 C TC x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.03 (0.08) 0.5 > 30 C TC x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.08) 0.9 > 25 C TC x x x x x < 0.04 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 2.1 > 25 C TC x 12.4 Ø = 14.8 Ø = 16.6 Ø = 18.5 n.a < 0.04 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.08) 8 > 40 C TC x x x x 14.0 Ø = < 0.04 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.08) 5 > 40 C TC x x x x x < 0.06 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.07) 2 > 30 C TC x 18.7 Ø = 22.3 Ø = 25 Ø = 28 n.a < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.08) 19 > 45 C TC x x x x 21.1 Ø = < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.08) 10 > 45 C TC x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 5 > 45 C TC x 27.0 Ø = 32.0 Ø = 36.0 Ø = 40.2 n.a < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.08) 38 > 50 C TC x x x x 30.3 Ø = < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 21 > 40 C TC x x x x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 11 > 40 C TC x 36.6 Ø = 43.5 Ø = 48.8 Ø = 54.6 n.a < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.06 (0.10) 65 > 40 C TC x x x x 40.1 Ø = < 0.07 (0.10) < 0.06 (0.10) 37 > 40 C TC x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) 20 > 40 C TC x 42.8 Ø = 50.9 Ø = 57.1 Ø = 63.9 n.a < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 93 > 50 C TC x x x x 46.9 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 51 > 50 C TC x x x x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.08) 27 > 45 C TC x 48.9 Ø = 58.1 Ø = 65.2 Ø = 72.9 n.a < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.07) 124 > 40 C TC x x x x 53.6 Ø = < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.07) 67 > 50 C TC x x x x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.07) 35 > 50 C TC x x x x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.07) 45 > 40 C Yes TC x 60.9 Ø = 72.4 Ø = 81.2 Ø = 90.9 n.a < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.08) 192 > 40 C TC x x x x 66.8 Ø = < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 104 > 50 C TC x x x x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.02 (0.10) 55 > 50 C TC x x x x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.02 (0.08) 62 > 45 C Yes TC x 72.0 Ø = 85.5 Ø = 96.0 Ø = n.a < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 268 > 50 C TC x x x x 78.9 Ø = < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.08) 145 > 45 C TC x x x x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 77 > 40 C TC x x x x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.07) 106 > 40 C Yes TC x 93.9 Ø = Ø = Ø = 140 n.a < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 450 > 45 C Yes TC x x x x Ø = < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 247 > 45 C Yes TC x x x x x < 0.07 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 131 > 35 C Yes TC x x x x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 146 > 40 C Yes TC x Ø = Ø = Ø = n.a < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 606 > 45 C Yes TC x x x x Ø = < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.08) 339 > 35 C Yes TC x x x x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 180 > 40 C Yes TC x x x x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 260 > 40 C Yes TC x Ø = Ø = Ø = n.a < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 1050 > 45 C Yes TC x x x x Ø = < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 603 > 45 C Yes TC x x x x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.08) 320 > 35 C Yes TC x x x x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 352 > 40 C Yes TC x x x x x < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 498 > 45 C Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5.5 μm. 6 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 7 With 1/1.8 (9 mm diagonal) detectors, the FOV of TC 12 yyy lenses may show some vignetting at the image corners, as these lenses are optimized for 1/2 detectors (8 mm diagonal). 8 For the fields with the indication Ø =, the image of a circular object of such diameter is fully inscribed into the detector. 9 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. If missing, it can be supplied upon request (except for TC23004, TC23007, TC23009, TC23012). Ordering information It s easy to select the right lens for your application: our part numbers are coded as TC xx yyy, where xx defines the camera sensor size (13 = 1/3, 12 = 1/2, 23 = 2/3 ) and yyy refers to the width dimension of the object field of view (FOV), in millimeters. For instance, a TC features a field of view of 64 (x 48) mm with a 1/2 camera sensor. 9

11 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TC CORE series Ultra compact bi-telecentric lenses up to 2/3 KEY ADVANTAGES Excellent optical performance TC CORE bi-telecentric lenses deliver excellent optical performance as other comparable Opto Engineering bi-telecentric lenses. Extremely compact TC CORE lenses are up to 70% smaller than other telecentric lenses on the market. Designed for flexibility and smart integration TC CORE lenses integrate a camera phase adjustment and can be mounted on multiple sides with or without clamps, allowing you to cut costs. Save you money Systems integrating TC CORE lenses take much less space, resulting in lower manufacturing, shipping and storage costs. Boost your sales A smaller vision system or measurement machine is the solution preferred by the industry. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. TC CORE bi-telecentric lenses for sensors up to 2/3 feature a truly revolutionary ultra compact opto-mechanical design. These lenses deliver high-end optical performance and at the same time are up to 70% smaller than other double-sided telecentric lenses on the market, thus allowing you to significantly downsize a vision system. The unique shape has been expressly developed for maximum mounting flexibility. TC CORE lenses can be mounted in different directions using any of the 4 sides even without clamps, allowing you to cut the system s cost, and can be easily fitted or retrofitted even into very compact machines. TC CORE bi-telecentric lenses can also be coupled with the new ultra compact LTCLHP CORE series telecentric illuminators to build super small yet extremely accurate measurement systems. SEE ALSO TCBENCH CORE series p. 27 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS LTCLHP CORE series p. 110 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Mounting mechanics CMHOCR and CMPTCR series p. 203 Comparison of a classic telecentric lens present on the market and a TC CORE bi-telecentric lens: TC CORE lens delivers best optical performance and is extremely compact. 10

12 Multiple lens surfaces can be used for direct mounting without clamps, thanks to the M6 threaded holes located on 4 sides.this also allows you to cut costs. Front CMHOCR clamp available for added mounting flexibility. Built-in phase adjustment makes it easy to align the camera sensor. Off-line precision measurement systems: ADVANTAGES Save more Lower manufacturing cost due to less material employed Less space required for storage and use Lower shipment expenses due to smaller size Lower transportation risks Integrates a classic telecentric lens and a classic telecentric illuminator present on the market. Integrates a TC CORE bi-telecentric lens and LTCLHP CORE telecentric illuminator. Sell more A smaller vision system or measurement machine is preferred by the industry 11

13 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TC CORE series Ultra compact bi-telecentric lenses up to 2/3 Application examples File Edit Zoom Select Electronic board inspection: TC CORE with top ringlight. File Edit Zoom Select Smartphone glass inspection: TC CORE mounted directly on a plate and a flat backlight. File Edit Zoom Select Screw measurement on a rotary glass table: TC CORE lens and LTCLHP CORE illuminator. 12

14 TC CORE lens dimensions (A, B, C) and correct position of the sensor in relation to the lens: A A B C B C sensor position n 1 sensor position n 2 The long side of sensor has to be aligned along axis B (position n 1) or axis A (pisition n 2). Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs Part Mag. Image 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 MP WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF number circle w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h typical typical Mount Phase Dimensions Ø 4.8 x x x x x 7.07 (max) (max) lp/mm adj. (x) (mm) (mm mm) (mm mm) (mm mm) (mm mm) (mm mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) 6 A B C TCCR x x x x 40.1 Ø = < 0.07 (0.10) < 0.06 (0.10) 37 > 40 C Yes TCCR x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) 20 > 40 C Yes TCCR x x x x 46.9 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 51 > 50 C Yes TCCR x x x x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.10) 27 > 45 C Yes TCCR x x x x 53.6 Ø = < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 67 > 50 C Yes TCCR x x x x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.10) 35 > 50 C Yes TCCR x x x x 66.8 Ø = < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 104 > 50 C Yes TCCR x x x x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.02 (0.10) 55 > 50 C Yes TCCR x x x x 78.9 Ø = < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.10) 145 > 45 C Yes TCCR x x x x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 77 > 40 C Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5.5 μm. 6 For the fields with the indication Ø =, the image of a circular object of such diameter is fully inscribed into the detector. 7 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 8 Due to the special shape of TCCR120xx it might be necessary to check the mechanical compatibility with your camera. 13

15 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCUV series UV bi-telecentric lenses TCUV series bi-telecentric lenses are specifically designed to ensure the highest image resolution today available in the machine vision world. No other lenses in the market can efficiently operate with pixels as small as 2 microns. For this reason TCUV bi-telecentric lenses are a MUST for all those using high resolution cameras and seeking for the highest system accuracy. Common lenses and traditional telecentric lenses operate in the visible light (VIS) range. The maximum resolution of a lens is given by the cut-off frequency, that is the spatial frequency at which the lens is no longer able to yield sufficient image contrast. KEY ADVANTAGES Extremely high resolution for cameras with very small pixels. High telecentricity for thick object imaging. Nearly zero distortion for accurate measurements. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. Since the cut-off frequency is inversely proportional to the light wavelength, common optics are useless with very small pixel sizes (such as 1.75 microns) which are becoming increasingly popular among industrial cameras. Application examples FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CMHO series p. 200 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Image captured with a lens operating in the visible range. Image taken with a TCUV bi-telecentric lens. Area scan cameras p

16 100% VIS lens UV lens 100% TC UV MTF diffr. limit TC UV CTF Contrast 80% 60% 40% cut-off frequency, VIS cut-off frequency, UV Contrast 80% 60% 40% 20% 20% 0% 0% Spacial frequency (line pairs/mm) Spacial frequency (line pairs/mm) The graph shows the limit performance (diffraction limit) of two lenses operating at working F/# 8. The standard lens operates at 587 nm (green light) while the UV lens operates at 365 nm. The CTF function, which expresses the contrast ratio at a given spatial frequency is much higher with TCUV lenses. The vertical bars show the cut-off frequencies of each lens: TCUV lenses still yield some contrast up to 340 lp/ mm. Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3 Part Mag. w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Length Diam. number 4.80 x x x x x 6.60 typical (max) typical (max) (x) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) 9 TCUV x x x x 30.6 Ø = < 0.1 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x x < 0.1 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x 40.2 Ø = < 0.08 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x x < 0.08 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x 47.0 Ø = < 0.1 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x x < 0.1 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x 53.7 Ø = < 0.08 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x x < 0.08 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x 66.9 Ø = < 0.08 < > 60 C TCUV x x x x x < 0.08 < > 60 C Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a very sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. 6 Nominal value. 7 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 8 With 1/1.8 (9 mm diagonal) detectors, the FOV of TCUV 12 XX lenses may show some vignetting at the image corners, as these lenses are optimized for 1/2 detectors (8 mm diagonal). 9 For the fields with the indication Ø =, the image of a circular object of such diameter is fully inscribed into the detector. 15

17 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCSM series 3D bi-telecentric lenses with Scheimpflug adjustment KEY ADVANTAGES Unique Scheimpflug adjustment No other lens can perform oblique measurements. The image is radially undistorted Linear extension can be perfectly calibrated. Compatible with any C-mount camera C-mount standard compliant. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. TCSM series is a unique family of bi-telecentric lenses for extremely accurate 3D dimensional measurement systems. All TCSM lenses are equipped with a high-precision Scheimpflug adjustment mechanism that fits any type of C-mount camera. Besides achieving very good focus at wide tilt angles, bi-telecentricity also yields incredibly low distortion. Images are linearly compressed only in one direction, thus making 3D-reconstruction very easy and exceptionally accurate. The available magnifications ranges from 0.5x to 0.1x while the angle of view reaches to meet the measurement needs of triangulation-based techniques. The Scheimpflug mount tilts around the horizontal axis of the detector plane to ensure excellent pointing stability and ease of focus. Examples of high-end 3D measurements TCSM imaging and measuring sloped objects. Without tilt adjustment, the object is not homogeneously focused. At the Scheimpflug angle, the image becomes sharp. Scheimpflug telecentric optics for both projection and imaging at 90. Without tilt adjustment, the object is not homogeneously focused. At the Scheimpflug angle, the image becomes sharp. 16

18 SEE ALSO MCSM1-01X p. 74 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS FOR 3D APPLICATIONS LED pattern projectors p. 146 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CMHO series p. 200 TCSM series lens for straight telecentric pattern projection. Without tilt adjustment, the object is not homogeneously focused. At the Scheimpflug angle, the image becomes sharp. Long detector side horizontal Long detector side vertical 1/3 1/2 2/3 1/3 1/2 2/3 Part Object Mount WD Horizontal Vertical Mount Phase w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h number tilt tilt mag mag adj x x x x x x 8.80 (deg) (deg) (mm) (x) (x) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) 1 2 Field of view - w x h (mm x mm) Field of view - w x h (mm x mm) w h w h TCSM 016 TCSM 024 TCSM 036 TCSM 048 TCSM 056 TCSM 064 TCSM 080 TCSM x x x x x x x x x x x x C Yes x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x C Yes x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x C Yes x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x C Yes x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x C Yes x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x C Yes x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x C Yes x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x C Yes x x x x x x x x x x x x Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 17

19 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCLWD series Long working distance telecentric lenses for 2/3 detectors TCLWD is a range of telecentric lenses specifically designed for electronic and semiconductor Automated Optical Inspection (AOI) and tool pre-setting machines. All these lenses feature a working distance of 135 mm and offer excellent optical resolution, high telecentricity and low distortion, thus matching and even exceeding the industrial requirements for the target applications. The long working distance allows for extra space, which is essential if you need to install illumination, pick-up tools or provide the necessary separation from hazardous production processes. In addition to the long working distance, TCLWD optics have a numerical aperture large enough to take advantage of high resolution / small pixel size cameras, making these lenses a perfect match for general-purpose 2D measurement systems. KEY ADVANTAGES Long working distance Perfect for electronic components inspection and tool pre-setting machines. High numerical aperture For small pixel size / high resolution detectors. Easy rotational phase adjustment Robust and precise tuning of the lens-camera phase. Full range of compatible products Fits LTCLHP telecentric illuminators, CMHO clamping supports and LTRN ring illuminators. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. Application examples A TCLWD050 lens assembled with a CMHO016 clamping mechanics and back-illuminated by a LTCLHP016-G telecentric illuminator forming an inspection system for measurement of mechanical components such as milling tools and screws. 18

20 FOR OTHER LONG WORKING DISTANCE TELECENTRIC LENSES, SEE ALSO TCVLWD series p. 30 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p COMPATIBLE CLAMPING MECHANICS Mounting clamp CMHO016 p. 200 A TCLWD lens in combination with LTRN016 ring illuminator inspecting an electronic board. A TCLWD lens measuring a clock gear with backlight illumination. Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Phase Length Diam. number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 typical (max) typical (max) adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) TCLWD x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 4 > 60 C Yes TCLWD x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 2.3 > 58 C Yes TCLWD x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 1.8 > 55 C Yes TCLWD x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 1 > 60 C Yes TCLWD x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.6 > 50 C Yes TCLWD x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.3 > 40 C Yes TCLWD x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.2 > 30 C Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5.5 μm. 6 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 7 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. Ordering information It s easy to select the right lens for your application: our part numbers are coded as TCLWD xxx, where xxx defines the magnification (050 = 0.50, 066 = 0.66, 075 = 0.75, ). For instance, a TCLWD 050 features a 0.50 magnification. 19

21 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCCX series Telecentric lenses with built-in coaxial illumination KEY ADVANTAGES Large numerical aperture For small pixel size camera resolution. Long working distance Tailored for electronic components inspection. Compact built-in illumination Ideal for high-end applications in the semiconductor industry. Easy rotational phase adjustment Robust and precise tuning of the camera phase. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. TCCX series is a range of lenses designed for measurement and defect detection on flat surfaces. They feature the same magnifications and working distance of TCLWD series while adding integrated coaxial light. Such lighting configuration is required to homogeneously illuminate uneven surfaces and detect small surface defects such as scratches or grooves, finding application in many industries, from the electronics and semiconductor industries to the glass and metal fabrication industries. All these lenses operate at a working distance of 135 mm while their large numerical aperture enables the superior resolution needed for small pixel cameras, matching and even exceeding the industrial requirements of on- and off-line applications. The built-in LED source, equipped with advanced electronics, provides excellent illumination stability and homogeneity, key factors for the reliability of any machine vision system. The unique optical design minimizes the internal reflection issues of conventional coaxial illumination systems: this makes TCCX lenses the perfect choice especially when inspecting highly reflective flat surfaces (approx. > 30% reflectance). Typical application include recognition of silicon wafers pattern and inspection of LCD displays, polished metal surfaces, plastic and glass panels, and many other. FOR OTHER MAGNIFICATIONS COAXIAL TELECENTRIC LENSES SEE ALSO TCCXHM, TCCXLM series p. 31 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Mounting mechanics CMHO016 p. 200 Application examples TCCX lens inspects objects using coaxial illumination. Image of an LCD display taken with a TCCX250 lens. Details of an electronic board imaged with a TCCX lens with green illumination. Scratches on a stainless steel surface emphasized by coaxial illumination. 20

22 Precise light intensity tuning Easily and precisely tune the light intensity level thanks to the leadscrew multi-turn trimmer positioned in the back. Direct LED control The built-in electronics can be bypassed in order to drive the LED directly for use in continuous or pulsed mode. When bypassed, the built-in electronics behaves as an open circuit allowing for direct control of the LED source. Electrical specifications Light Device power ratings LED power ratings Part number Light color, wavelength peak DC voltage Power consumption Max LED fwd current Forward voltage Max pulse current min max typ. max (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) TCCX xxx-g green, 520 nm < TCCX xxx-w white < n.a Tolerance ± 10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 4 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info online). Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Phase Length Diam. number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 typical (max) typical (max) adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) TCCX 050-G x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 4 > 60 C Yes TCCX 050-W x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 4 > 60 C Yes TCCX 066-G x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 2.3 > 58 C Yes TCCX 066-W x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 2.3 > 58 C Yes TCCX 075-G x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 1.8 > 55 C Yes TCCX 075-W x x x x x (0.06) 0.1 (0.20) 1.8 > 55 C Yes TCCX 100-G x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 1 > 60 C Yes TCCX 100-W x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 1 > 60 C Yes TCCX 150-G x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.6 > 50 C Yes TCCX 150-W x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.6 > 50 C Yes TCCX 250-G x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.3 > 40 C Yes TCCX 250-W x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.3 > 40 C Yes TCCX 350-G x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.2 > 30 C Yes TCCX 350-W x x x x x (0.06) 0.05 (0.10) 0.2 > 30 C Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5.5 μm. 6 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 7 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. Ordering information It s easy to select the right lens for your application: our part numbers are coded as TCCX xxx-y, where xxx defines the magnification (050 = 0.50, 066 = 0.66, 075 = 0.75, ) and y defines the source color ( -G stands for green light, W stands for white light ). For instance, a TCCX 050-G features a 0.50 magnification with a green light source. 21

23 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCCXQ series High resolution telecentric assemblies with coaxial illumination TCCXQ optical assemblies combine the high optical performance of TC telecentric lenses and the LTCLHP series ability to provide accurate and reliable illumination. Pairing these two Opto Engineering flagship products results in a system completely free from straylight and back-reflections, while marking superior optical performance (in terms of resolution, telecentricity and distortion) even at the highest magnifications. This optical layout also minimizes the overall height of the system, also allowing the user to easily adjust the camera orientation and back focal distance of the lens. TCCXQ assemblies can be successfully employed in high accuracy measurement applications as well as Automated Optical Inspection (AOI) setups. KEY ADVANTAGES Completely free from stray-light Compatible with both reflective and diffusive surface objects. High resolution For sharp edge imaging and small imperfections detection. Bi-telecentric design Same degree of measurement accuracy as standard bi-telecentric lenses. Optimal light collimation For precise direct light measurement applications. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. FOR OTHER COAXIAL SOLUTIONS SEE ALSO TCCX series p. 20 LTCXC series p. 145 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS TCCXQ 066-G, formed by TCLWD 066, CMBS 016, LTCLHP 016-G. Area scan cameras p

24 Electrical specifications Light Device power ratings LED power ratings Part number Light color, wavelength peak DC voltage Power consumption Max LED fwd current Forward voltage Max pulse current min max typ. max (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) TCCXQ xxx-g green, 520 nm < TCCXQ xxx-w white < n.a Tolerance ± 10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 4 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info online). d TCCXQ 011-x Available colours Detector type 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part Mag. Image G W w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h Object distance Mount Phase Length Height Width number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 d adj. (*) (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) 1 TCCXQ 150-x x x 3.20 x x x x x C TCCXQ 100-x x x 4.80 x x x x x C TCCXQ 075-x x x 6.40 x x x x x C TCCXQ 066-x x x 7.27 x x x x x C TCCXQ 050-x x x 9.60 x x x x x C TCCXQ 024-x x x 19.8 x x x x x C TCCXQ 018-x x x 26.1 x x x x x C TCCXQ 016-x x x 30.6 x x x x x C TCCXQ 014-x x x 34.8 x x x x x C TCCXQ 011-x x x 43.6 x x x x x C Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. If missing, it can be supplied upon request. (*) The last digit of the part number -x defines the source colour. 23

25 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCZR series 8x bi-telecentric zoom lenses with motorized control TCZR series is a leading edge optical solution for imaging and measurement applications requiring both the flexibility of zoom lenses and the accuracy of fixed optics. By means of a very accurate mechanism, these lenses ensure unequaled magnification, focusing and image center stability when switching from a magnification to another, thus avoiding recalibration at any given time. Four different magnifications, featuring a total zoom range of 8x, can be selected either by means of the onboard control keyboard or via computer through a specific remote control software. Bi-telecentricity, high resolution and low distortion make these zooms able to perform the same measurement tasks as a fixed magnification telecentric lens. KEY ADVANTAGES Perfect magnification constancy No need to re-calibrate after zooming. Perfect parfocality No need to refocus when changing magnification. Bi-telecentricity Very accurate measurement is possible. Excellent image center stability Each magnification maintains its FOV center. FOR OTHER MULTI-MAGNIFICATION OPTICS SEE ALSO MCZR series p. 76 Full motorization control Zoom magnification can be set either manually or via software. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CMHO TCZR p. 200 MANUAL AND SETUP Please refer to our website for the updated TCZR manual and for a complete technical documentation of the setup process. TCZR series can be coupled with LTCLHP and LTRN series illuminators and CMHO TCZR precision clamp. 24

26 Application examples Electronic board images taken with TCZR 036 at four different magnifications. Hard disk arm images taken with TCZR 072 at four different magnifications. Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Phase Length Diam. number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) x x x x x 28.2 < > 40 TCZR 036 TCZR x x x x x 14.1 < > < 0.05 C Yes x x x x x 7.00 < > x x x x x 3.50 < > x x x x x 56.5 < > x x x x x 28.2 < > < 0.05 C Yes x x x x x 14.1 < > x x x x x 7.00 < > 35 1 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 2 Maximum slope of principal rays inside the lens: converted in milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. 3 At the borders of the field depth, the image can be still used for measurement, but to get a perfectly sharp image only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 3.9 μm. 4 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 25

27 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCBENCH series TC optical bench kits for easy measurements KEY ADVANTAGES Pre-assembled setup Just attach your camera, and the bench is ready for measurement. Best optical performance The bench is pre-set to provide unpaired measurement accuracy. Tested system The bench is quality tested as a whole system. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Optical filters p. 212 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p TCBENCH series are complete optical systems designed for hasslefree development of demanding measurement applications. Each kit integrates: 1 TC bi-telecentric lens for 2/3 detectors 1 LTCLHP telecentric illuminator (green) 2 CMHO mechanical clamps 1 CMPT base-plate 1 PTTC chrome-on-glass calibration pattern 1 CMPH pattern holder The benches come ready for use, pre-assembled and pre-aligned to assure the best accuracy that a telecentric measurement system can deliver. The collimated light source is set in order to optimize both illumination homogeneity and relevant optical parameters such as distortion, telecentricity and resolution. Coupling a LTCLHP illuminator with a telecentric lens increases the natural field depth of the lens; this is particularly true for 2/3 detector lenses where the acceptance angle of ray bundles is much larger than the divergence of the collimating source. For this reason these benches feature unmatched image resolution and field depth. Opto Engineering measures the optical performance of each TCBENCH and provides an individual test report. TCBENCH series also benefits from a special price policy, combining high-end performance with cost effectiveness. Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specifications 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD Optical Optical Field CTF Mount Phase Length Width Height Weight number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 Accuracy Accuracy adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (μm) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) Field of view (mm x mm) TCBENCH x x x x x < 5 < 0.06% 1.2 > 35 C TCBENCH x x x x x < 8 < 0.05% 2.9 > 40 C TCBENCH x x x x x < 13 < 0.05% 7.0 > 55 C TCBENCH x x x x x < 22 < 0.06% 14 > 50 C TCBENCH x x x x x < 31 < 0.06% 24 > 50 C TCBENCH x x x x x < 36 < 0.06% 33 > 55 C TCBENCH x x x x x < 40 < 0.06% 43 > 65 C TCBENCH x x x x x < 55 < 0.07% 67 > 55 C TCBENCH x x x x x < 70 < 0.07% 94 > 50 C Working distance: distance between the front end of the lens mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution. 2,3 Maximum measurement error without software calibration; standard image correction libraries yield close to zero measurement error. 4 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. If missing, it can be supplied upon request (except for TCBENCH009) 26

28 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCBENCH CORE series Ultra compact TCCORE optical benches for precision measurements KEY ADVANTAGES Multi-level cost cutting Saves money on manufacturing and transportation costs. Downsized vision system Allows you to reduce the length of your measurement system. Pre-assembled setup Just add a camera and measurement software and you re ready to go. Best optical performance in a super tight space A complete optical system designed for hassle free development of demanding precision measurement applications. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. TCBENCH CORE series are complete and super compact optical systems offering superior performance for highly demanding measurement applications in a super compact assembly. The benches come pre-mounted and pre-aligned, ensuring the best accuracy that a telecentric measurement system can deliver. Each TCBENCH CORE integrates: 1 TC CORE bi-telecentric lens for 2/3 sensors 1 LTCLHP CORE telecentric illuminator (green) 1 CMPTCR base plate TCBENCH CORE systems deliver the same optical performance as our TCBENCH systems in a very reduced space. Non-contact measurement machine example Technical specs Standard components TCBENCH CORE Comparison Camera sensor (mm) 8.45 x x 7.07 FOV (mm) 90.4 x x 75.6 Field depth (mm) CTF 70 lp/mm (%) > 50 > 50 Height (m) Length (m) Width (m) Volume (m3) High-end performance of both systems 54% volume difference Example of off-line measurement systems with classic telecentric lens and illuminator (left) and TCBENCH CORE (right). FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 Detector type Optical specs Mechanical specifications 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD Field CTF Mount Phase Length Width Height Weight number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) Field of view (mm x mm) TCCRBENCH x x x x x > 50 C Yes TCCRBENCH x x x x x > 55 C Yes TCCRBENCH x x x x x > 65 C Yes TCCRBENCH x x x x x > 55 C Yes TCCRBENCH x x x x x > 50 C Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the lens mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5.5 μm. 3 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 27

29 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCKIT case Telecentric optics selection for machine vision labs The Opto Engineering TCKIT case includes a selection of some of the most commonly used telecentric optics in measurement applications. A kit of four C-mount telecentric lenses covers FOVs ranging from 9 mm to 64 mm, offering good coverage of many measurement applications. These lenses are suitable for detectors up to 2/3, so that most cameras can be used in combination with this set of optics. In addition, a LTCLHP 036-G collimated light source (green color) is included in the box; this illuminator can be coupled with the three smaller telecentric lenses in order to demonstrate the several benefits of collimated illumination. The telecentric kit case is a very helpful tool for system integrators and research centers that are frequently dealing with new machine vision applications. The TCKIT case also benefits from our special educational price: you should seriously consider buying this kit for your laboratory and discover the advantages of bi-telecentric optics! Part number Products included Description TCKIT TC TC TC TC LTCLHP 036-G Bi-telecentric lens for 2/3, 64 x 48 mm FOV Bi-telecentric lens for 2/3, 36 x 27 mm FOV Bi-telecentric lens for 2/3, 16 x 12 mm FOV Bi-telecentric lens for 2/3, 8.8 x 6.6 mm FOV Telecentric HP illuminator, beam diameter 45 mm, green FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CMHO series clamping mechanics p. 200 LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p

30 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCEDGEVIS Telecentric system for defect detection on flat transparent materials KEY ADVANTAGES Revolutionary method for inspecting flat transparent surfaces (clear glass, plastic films) and for OCR/OCV applications: Extreme contrast Even the smallest defects can be seen Supplied as a ready-to-use optical bench TCEDGEVIS telecentric optical systems provide a truly revolutionary approach to the inspection of flat transparent materials. The special optical design ensures that only the light rays deflected by an object s edge are imaged on the sensor: edges are automatically extracted without the need of software algorithms. This technique allows the detection of extremely tiny defects, particles and surface discontinuities that would be impossible to see with traditional lens systems. This approach is also suitable for OCR/OCV applications on clear glass, plastic films etc. TCEDGEVIS optical systems include an EDGE telecentric lens, EDGE telecentric illuminator and mounting mechanics and are supplied as fully tested and pre-aligned optical benches. Scattered rays Edge Image Display inspection: EDGEVIS telecentric illuminator EDGEVIS telecentric lens Working principle: when light rays encounter an object they get scattered from its edges. The TCEDGEVIS optical system filters these rays to form an image of the object s profile with much higher contrast than traditional optical methods. Detection of tiny scratches, bubbles and inclusions on smartphone glass screen. Particle analysis: Packaging: Packaging: OCR and OCV: Checking dust deposits on a glass surface. Seal integrity inspection at the highest contrast. Seal quality inspection on transparent plastics and soldering joint. Transparent text on clear plastic surface. Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specifications 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Light color, Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD peak Mount Phase Length Width Height number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 wavelength adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (nm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) 1 2 TCEV G x x x x x green, 520 C No TCEV G x x x x x green, 520 C Yes TCEV G x x x x x green, 520 C Yes TCEV G x x x x x green, 520 C Yes TCEV G x x x x x green, 520 C Yes TCEV G x x x x x green, 520 C Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the lens mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 29

31 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCHM series High magnification telecentric lenses for detectors up to 2/3 Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs Part number Mag. Image Max circle detector size 1/3 w x h 4.80 x /2.5 w x h 5.70 x /2 1/1.8 2/3-5 MP w x h w x h w x h 6.4 x x x 7.07 WD wf/# Distortion Field Nominal Mount Phase Length Diam. depth resolving adj. power (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (µm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 Object field of view (mm x mm) Working distance (WD) 71 mm RT-HR-6M /3 0.8 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-4M /3 1.2 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-2M /3 2.4 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-1M /3 4.8 x x x x x C Yes Working distance (WD) 110 mm RT-HR-6M /3 0.8 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-4M /3 1.2 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-2M /3 2.4 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-1M /3 4.8 x x x x x C Yes Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 2 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS LTRNDC series LED direct ringlights p. 128 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCVLWD series Very long working distance (WD) telecentric lenses for detectors up to 1/1.8 Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs Part number Mag. Image Max 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 WD wf/# Distortion Field Nominal Mount Phase Length Diam. circle detector size w x h 4.80 x 3.60 w x h 5.70 x 4.28 w x h 6.4 x 4.8 w x h 7.13 x 5.37 depth resolving power adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (µm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 Object field of view (mm x mm) RT-TV-1M /2 4.8 x x x C Yes RT-TV-2M /2 2.4 x x x C Yes RT-TV-3M /2 1.6 x x x C Yes RT-TV-1M /2 4.8 x x x C Yes RT-TV-2M /2 2.4 x x x C Yes RT-TV-3M /2 1.6 x x x C Yes RT-TV-1M /2 4.8 x x x C Yes RT-TV-2M /2 2.4 x x x C Yes RT-TV-3M /2 1.6 x x x C Yes RT-TV-05M /2 9.6 x x x C Yes RT-TV-1M / x x x x C Yes RT-TV-2M / x x x x C Yes RT-TV-05M / x x x x C Yes RT-TV-1M / x x x x C Yes Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 2 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 30

32 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCCXHM series High magnification telecentric lenses with built-in coaxial illumination for detectors up to 2/3 Part Mag. Image Max number circle detector size Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 MP WD wf/# Distortion Field Nominal Mount Phase Length Diam. w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h depth resolving adj x x x x x 7.07 power (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (µm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 Object field of view (mm x mm) Working distance (WD) 71 mm RT-HR-6F /3 0.8 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-4F /3 1.2 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-2F /3 2.4 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-1F /3 4.8 x x x x x C Yes Working distance (WD) 110 mm RT-HR-6F /3 0.8 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-4F /3 1.2 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-2F /3 2.4 x x x x x C Yes RT-HR-1F /3 4.8 x x x x x C Yes Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 2 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE LED SOURCES LDSC series p. 229 TELECENTRIC LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS TCCXLM series Telecentric lenses with built-in coaxial illumination for detectors up to 2/3 Part Mag. Image number circle Max detector size 1/3 1/2.5 w x h w x h 4.80 x x 4.28 Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 MP w x h w x h w x h 6.4 x x x 7.07 WD wf/# Distortion Field Nominal Mount Phase Length Diam. depth resolving adj. power (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (µm) 1 (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) RT-TCL0400-F / x x x x x C RT-TCL0300-F / x x x x x C RT-TCL0200-F / x x x x x C Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE LED SOURCES LDSC series p

33 TELECENTRIC LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS TC2MHR-TC4MHR series High-resolution telecentric lenses for large detectors up to 4/3 TC2MHR and TC4MHR series are high resolution telecentric lenses designed for detectors larger than 2/3 : TC2MHR lenses cover up to 1 detectors (16 mm diagonal) while TC4MHR lenses cover up to 21.5 mm detector diagonal (e.g. suitable for 4/3 detectors), making them the perfect choice for advanced metrology applications. The TC2MHR-TC4MHR series delivers unmatched resolution, low distortion and homogeneous image quality while offering the best performance to price ratio. TC2MHR-TC4MHR feature a compact and robust design that allows for easy integration in industrial environments. Additionally, the camera phase can be easily adjusted by simply loosening the set screws positioned in the eyepiece part. KEY ADVANTAGES Wide image circle for detectors larger than 2/3. Excellent resolution and low distortion. Simple and robust design for industrial environments. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. C, F and M42X1 (-E) mount options with easy phase adjustment. In order to help the selection, some of the most commonly used large matrix detectors are listed: select the product that best suits your application by choosing the column where the your detector is listed and scrolling down the table until you find the field of view best matching your needs. Mount C Mount E = M42x1 Mount F 32

34 FOR COAXIAL TELECENTRIC LENSES UP TO 1 DETECTORS SEE ALSO TCCX2M series p. 42 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CMMR series p. 206 Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specifications /3 KAI 2020 KAI KAI-4022/4021 KAI mm diag. 16 mm diag mm diag mm diag. Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Phase Length Diam. number circle x x x x 13.6 typical (max) typical (max) adj (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) TC2MHR lenses Object field of view (mm x mm) 8 C E F C E F TC2MHR 016-x x x 12.5 Ø = 19.8 Ø = < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 2.0 > 30 Yes TC2MHR 024-x x x 18.9 Ø = 29.9 Ø = < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 4.6 > 40 Yes TC2MHR 036-x x x 27.2 Ø = 43.1 Ø = < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 10 > 30 Yes TC2MHR 048-x x x 35.8 Ø = 56.7 Ø = < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 17 > 30 Yes TC2MHR 056-x x x 42.1 Ø = 66.7 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05(0.10) 23 > 40 Yes TC2MHR 064-x x x 48.1 Ø = 76.1 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 30 > 40 Yes TC2MHR 080-x x x 60.0 Ø = 95.0 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 46 > 40 Yes TC2MHR 096-x x x 70.2 Ø = Ø = < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.07 (0.10) 64 > 40 Yes TC2MHR 120-x x x 92.3 Ø = Ø = < 0.07 (0.10) < 0.07 (0.10) 110 > 40 Yes TC2MHR 144-x x x Ø = Ø = < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) 151 > 40 Yes TC2MHR 192-x x x Ø = Ø = < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 268 > 40 Yes TC2MHR 240-x x x Ø = Ø = < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 424 > 40 Yes TC4MHR lenses TC4M 004-x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 0.1 > 30 Yes n.a n.a. 45 TC4M 007-x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.06 (0.10) 0.2 > 30 Yes n.a n.a. 45 TC4M 009-x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) 0.3 > 30 Yes n.a n.a. 45 TC4MHR 016-x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 1.1 > 30 Yes TC4MHR 024-x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 2.4 > 30 Yes TC4MHR 036-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 5.0 > 30 Yes TC4MHR 048-x x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 8.7 > 40 Yes TC4MHR 056-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 12.0 > 40 Yes TC4MHR 064-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 15.7 > 40 Yes TC4MHR 080-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 24.4 > 40 Yes TC4MHR 096-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 34.2 > 35 Yes TC4MHR 120-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 57.8 > 30 Yes TC4MHR 144-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 79.5 > 30 Yes TC4MHR 192-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) > 30 Yes TC4MHR 240-x x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) > 30 Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5 μm. 6 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 7 With KAI (22,6 mm diagonal) detectors, the FOV of TC4MHR yyy lenses may show some vignetting at the image corners. 8 For the fields with the indication Ø =, the image of a circular object of such diameter is fully inscribed into the detector. 9 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. Ordering information It s easy to select the right lens for your application: our part numbers are coded as TC2MHR yyy-x or TC4MHR yyy-x where yyy refers to the width dimension of the object field of view (FOV) in millimeters and -x refers to the mount option: - C for C-mount - F for F-mount - E for M42X1 mount (flange distance FD 16 mm). E.g. TC4MHR064-F for an F-mount TC 4MHR 064 lens. Customized mounts are also available upon request. 33

35 TELECENTRIC LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS TC2MHR-TC4MHR CORE series Ultra compact high-resolution telecentric lenses up to 4/3 KEY ADVANTAGES Excellent optical performance TC2MHR-TC4MHR CORE telecentric lenses deliver excellent optical performance as other comparable Opto Engineering telecentric lenses. Extremely compact TC2MHR-TC4MHR CORE lenses are up to 70% smaller than other telecentric lenses on the market. Designed for flexibility and smart integration TC2MHR-TC4MHR CORE lenses integrate a camera phase adjustment and can be mounted on multiple sides with or without clamps, allowing you to cut costs. Save you money Systems integrating TC2MHR-TC4MHR CORE lenses take much less space, resulting in lower manufacturing, shipping and storage costs. Boost your sales A smaller vision system or measurement machine is the solution preferred by the industry. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. TC2MHR CORE and TC4MHR CORE series are ultra compact telecentric lenses tailored for high-resolution sensors up to 4/3. TC2MHR CORE and TC4MHR CORE lenses deliver excellent optical performance in a super compact shape. Thanks to the unique opto-mechanical design, these lenses offer very high resolution, nearly zero distortion and high field depth while saving up to 70% in length compared to similar FOV lenses on the market. TC2MHR CORE and TC4MHR CORE lenses ensure hassle-free integration in a measurement system. The rear phase adjustment allows the user to easily align the camera sensor to the sample. These lenses can be mounted in several orientations thanks to the M6 threads located on multiple sides, even without clamps. For maximum flexibility, a special front mounting clamp is also available. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS LTCLHP CORE series p. 110 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS CMHOCR series p. 203 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p Comparison of a classic telecentric lens and a TC CORE telecentric lens: TC CORE lens delivers best optical performance and is extremely compact. 34

36 Application example File Edit Zoom Select Standard solution with a 4/3 camera, TC4MHR CORE lens and a LTCLHP CORE illuminator. 35

37 TELECENTRIC LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS TC2MHR-TC4MHR CORE series Ultra compact high-resolution telecentric lenses up to 4/3 TCCR2M080-C with C Mount TCCR4M096-E with E Mount (M42x1) TCCR4M056-F with F Mount Built-in phase adjustment makes it easy to align the camera sensor. 36

38 TC2MHR-TC4MHR CORE lens dimensions (A, B, C) and correct position of the sensor in relation to the lens: A A B B sensor position n 1 sensor position n 2 C C The long side of sensor has to be aligned along axis B (position n 1) or axis A (pisition n 2). Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specifications /3 KAI 2020 KAI KAI-4022/4021 KAI mm diag. 16 mm diag mm diag mm diag. Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Phase Dimensions number circle x x x x 13.6 typical (max) typical (max) adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) TCCR2MHR Object field of view (mm x mm) 7 A B C TCCR2M 048-C x x 35.8 Ø = 56.7 Ø = < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 17 > 30 C Yes TCCR2M 048-E x x 35.8 Ø = 56.7 Ø = < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 17 > 30 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR2M 056-C x x 42.1 Ø = 66.7 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05(0.10) 23 > 40 C Yes TCCR2M 056-E x x 42.1 Ø = 66.7 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05(0.10) 23 > 40 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR2M 064-C x x 48.1 Ø = 76.1 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 30 > 40 C Yes TCCR2M 064-E x x 48.1 Ø = 76.1 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 30 > 40 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR2M 080-C x x 60.0 Ø = 95.0 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 46 > 40 C Yes TCCR2M 080-E x x 60.0 Ø = 95.0 Ø = < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 46 > 40 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR2M 096-C x x 70.2 Ø = Ø = < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.07 (0.10) 64 > 40 C Yes TCCR2M 096-E x x 70.2 Ø = Ø = < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.07 (0.10) 64 > 40 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR4MHR TCCR4M 048-C x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 8.7 > 40 C Yes TCCR4M 048-F x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 8.7 > 40 F Yes TCCR4M 048-E x x x x < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 8.7 > 40 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR4M 056-C x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 12.0 > 40 C Yes TCCR4M0 56-F x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 12.0 > 40 F Yes TCCR4M 056-E x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 12.0 > 40 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR4M 064-C x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 15.7 > 40 C Yes TCCR4M 064-F x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 15.7 > 40 F Yes TCCR4M 064-E x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 15.7 > 40 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR4M 080-C x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 24.4 > 40 C Yes TCCR4M 080-F x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 24.4 > 40 F Yes TCCR4M 080-E x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 24.4 > 40 M42x1 FD 16 Yes TCCR4M 096-C x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 34.2 > 35 C Yes TCCR4M 096-F x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 34.2 > 35 F Yes TCCR4M 096-E x x x x < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 34.2 > 35 M42x1 FD 16 Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5 μm. 6 M42x1 mount has a flange distance of 16 mm. 7 For the fields with the indication Ø =, the image of a circular object of such diameter is fully inscribed into the detector. 8 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 37

39 TELECENTRIC LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS TCDP PLUS series Dual magnification telecentric lenses KEY ADVANTAGES Perfect measurement accuracy TCDP PLUS telecentric lenses produce two images at different magnifications to cover an extended range of product sizes with the same accuracy. Revolutionary flexibility 281 possible combinations allow you to personalize and order the TCDP PLUS lens fitting YOUR needs. Smart cost reduction Solving two vision tasks with one lens involves less components and lowers the vision system cost. Off-the-shelf lenses tailored for your needs Get a standard product customized for your application with no increase in price or lead time. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. TCDP PLUS series are dual magnification telecentric lenses supporting two cameras to measure objects with different magnifications. They are the perfect choice for measuring components of different sizes but also for applications where an entire sample and some of its smaller features have to be measured with the same accuracy. The fixed design of these lenses ensures perfect repeatability with no need to recalibrate after each magnification change. TCDP PLUS lenses help cut the cost of your vision system: you only need to integrate one lens, one illuminator and one mount. TCDP PLUS lenses are compatible with CMHO clamping mechanics and LTCLHP collimated illuminators, as well as LTRN ring illuminators designed for the standard TC series. Application examples TCDP23C4MC096 imaging an electronic board with two different cameras. TCDP23C4XC144 imaging a screw with two different cameras. diameter length Full FOV image with lens lower magnification. 2x magnified image of the object central area. Full FOV image with lens lower magnification. 4x magnified image of the object central area. 38

40 TCDP23C4XC096 coupled with LTCLHP 096 telecentric illuminator and LTRN 096 NW ring light. TCDP PLUS revolutionary design can easily meet any of your application needs: 281 possible combinations allow to create the perfect lens for you, also benefiting from the price and lead time of off-the-shelf components. TCDP PLUS lenses come in 5 different sizes and can be configured with 2 different eyepieces out of the 7 available. They are compatible with several different camera sensors from 1/3 to 4/3 and are available with C-, F- or M42x1 (FD 16mm) camera mounts. In the tables below you ll find a wide range of TCDP PLUS lenses. On our website you ll find a simple tool that allows you to create and order your own TCDP PLUS lens based on your camera sensor and desired fields of view. Built-in phase adjustment makes it easy to align the camera sensor. FOR OTHER MULTI-MAGNIFICATION OPTICS SEE ALSO MCZR series p. 76 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS SETUP LTCLHP series collimated illuminators p. 108 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CMHO series p. 200 Please check our website for all 281 possible combinations. 39

41 TELECENTRIC LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS TCDP PLUS series Dual magnification telecentric lenses 1 TCDP Series has been replaced by TCDP PLUS series. Please check our website for the list of replaced products. Detector type 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx KAI /3 KAI KAI-4022/4021 KAI mm diag 16 mm diag 21.5 mm diag 22.6 mm diag Part Mount Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h number circle 4.80 x x x x x x x x x 13.6 (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) 1 Object field of view (mm x mm) TCDP 2MF 4MF 096 TCDP 23C 4XC 096 TCDP 23C 4MC096 TCDP 12C 23C 096 TCDP 2MF 4MF 120 TCDP 23C 4XC 120 TCDP 23C 4MC 120 TCDP 12C 23C 120 TCDP 2MF 4MF 144 TCDP 23C 4XC 144 TCDP 23C 4MC 144 TCDP 12C 23C 144 TCDP 2MF 4MF 192 TCDP 23C 4XC 192 TCDP 23C 4MC 192 TCDP 12C 23C 192 TCDP 2MF 4MF 240 TCDP 23C 4XC 240 TCDP 23C 4MC 240 TCDP 23C 2MC 240 F C C C F C C C F C C C F C C C F C C C x x x x x x x x Ø = x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 75.7 Ø = 95.1 Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x 18.9 Ø = 23.8 Ø = 25.7 n.a. n.a x x x x x 75.7 Ø = 95.1 Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x x x x x x 79.0 Ø = n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a x x x x x 75.7 Ø = 95.1 Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x Ø = x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 98.7 Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x 24.7 Ø = 31.0 Ø = 33.5 n.a. n.a x x x x x 98.7 Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x x x x x x Ø = n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a x x x x x 98.7 Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x Ø = x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x 28.9 Ø = 36.3 Ø = 39.3 n.a. n.a x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x x x x x x Ø = n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x Ø = x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x 38.6 Ø = 48.5 Ø = 52.5 n.a. n.a x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x x x x x x Ø = n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x Ø = x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x 48.1 Ø = 60.4 Ø = 65.3 n.a. n.a x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Ø = Ø = n.a. n.a x x x x x x x x Ø =

42 TCDP PLUS lens dimensions: L = length of the lens from the front end to its straight ocular (low magnification path) Straight ocular (low magnification path) C C Axis 2 H1 = distance from the end of the right angled ocular (high magnification path) to the middle of the lens (axis 1) L Right angled ocular (high magnification path) 0.64 D = lens diameter H1 (refers to axis 1) Axis 1 Ø D Dimensions of a TCDP PLUS lens. Axis 1 Position of axis 1 and axis 2. Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part Mag. WD F/N Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Phase Length Diam. number typical (max) adj. L H1 D (x) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) TCDP 2MF 4MF 096 TCDP 23C 4XC 096 TCDP 23C 4MC 096 TCDP 12C 23C 096 TCDP 2MF 4MF 120 TCDP 23C 4XC 120 TCDP 23C 4MC 120 TCDP 12C 23C 120 TCDP 2MF 4MF 144 TCDP 23C 4XC 144 TCDP 23C 4MC 144 TCDP 12C 23C 144 TCDP 2MF 4MF 192 TCDP 23C 4XC 192 TCDP 23C 4MC 192 TCDP 12C 23C 192 TCDP 2MF 4MF 240 TCDP 23C 4XC 240 TCDP 23C 4MC 240 TCDP 23C 2MC < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.07 (0.10) 64.0 > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 34.2 > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 77.0 > < 0.06 (0.10) < 0.07 (0.10) 7.0 > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 77.0 > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 34.2 > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.03 (0.08) > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) 77.0 > < 0.07 (0.10) < 0.07 (0.10) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 57.8 > < 0.07 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.08) 12.0 > < 0.07 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 57.8 > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.07 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 79.5 > < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) > < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.08) 17.0 > < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) 79.5 > < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.08) > < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.08) > < 0.08 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.08) 30.0 > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.08) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) > < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.08) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) > < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) > < 0.06 (0.10) < 0.08 (0.10) 47.0 > < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) > < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.08) > < 0.05 (0.10) < 0.04 (0.10) > 40 F Yes C Yes C Yes C Yes F Yes C Yes C Yes C Yes F Yes C Yes C Yes C Yes F Yes C Yes C Yes C Yes F Yes C Yes C Yes C Yes TCDP Series has been replaced by TCDP PLUS series. Please check our website for the list of replaced products. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F/# of a lens when used as a macro. 3 Maximum slope of principal rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimiter of object displacement. 4 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a very sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5.5 µm. 5 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 41

43 TELECENTRIC LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS TCCX2M series Telecentric lenses with built-in coaxial illumination for detectors up to 1 Part Mag. Image Max 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 MP number circle detector w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h size 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs KAI mm diag w x h 12.8 x 9.6 WD wf/# Distortion Field Nominal Mount Phase Length Diam. depth resolving adj. power (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (µm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 Object field of view (mm x mm) RT-MP-4F x x x x x x C Yes RT-MP-2F x x x x x x C Yes RT-MP-1.5F x x x x x x C Yes RT-MP-1F x x x x x x C Yes RT-TCL0750-FU x x x x x x C RT-TCL0600-FU x x x x x x C RT-TCL0450-FU x x x x x x C RT-TCL0300-FU x x x x x x C Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 2 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE LED SOURCES LDSC series p. 229 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE POWER SUPPLIES RT-PSP LV-xx power supply p. 227 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p

44 43

45 TELECENTRIC LENSES VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS TC16M series Telecentric lenses for 35 mm and 4 k / 8 k pixel line detectors TC16M series telecentric lenses have been specifically designed to fit 35 mm format (36 x 24 mm) detectors with very high resolution, such as 11, 16 or 29 Mpix. This combination is the typical choice for extremely accurate measurement of large items such as engine parts, glass or metal sheets, PCBs and electronic components, LCDs, etc. TC16M lenses are also perfectly suitable for 4 kpx and 8 kpx linescan cameras and can be successfully used to measure the diameter of cylindrical objects: for example shafts, turned metal parts, machine tools, etc. Besides the standard F and M58x0.75 mount options, any other mechanical interface can be supplied upon request. KEY ADVANTAGES Wide image circle for large detectors up to 43.3 mm. Excellent resolution and low distortion. Simple and robust design for industrial environments. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS LTCLHP CORE series p. 110 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CLAMPING MECHANICS CMHO series p. 200 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CLAMPING MECHANICS CMMR series 45 mirrors p. 206 DO YOU KNOW? Why Opto Engineering telecentric lenses don t integrate an iris? Check the answer to this and other FAQ directly on our web page at: /faqs Mount F Mount Q = M58x

46 Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Line Line Full frame Line Full frame 2 kpx 4 kpx APS-C 8 kpx 35 mm Part Mag. Image 2 k x 10 μm 4 k x 7 μm w x h 8 k x 5 μm w x h WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Phase Length Diam. number circle x x 24.0 typical (max) typical (max) adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm) TC16M x x < 0.03 (0.05) < 0.03 (0.05) 0.15 > 20 F TC16M 009-Q x x < 0.03 (0.05) < 0.03 (0.05) 0.15 > 20 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.03 (0.05) < 0.03 (0.05) 0.2 > 30 F TC16M 012-Q x x < 0.03 (0.05) < 0.03 (0.05) 0.2 > 30 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.03 (0.05) < 0.03 (0.05) 0.3 > 40 F TC16M 018-Q x x < 0.03 (0.05) < 0.03 (0.05) 0.3 > 40 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.03 (0.05) < 0.02 (0.03) 1.0 > 30 F TC16M 036-Q x x < 0.03 (0.05) < 0.02 (0.03) 1.0 > 30 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.06 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) 2.0 > 30 F TC16M 048-Q x x < 0.06 (0.10) < 0.05 (0.10) 2.0 > 30 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 2.5 > 40 F TC16M 056-Q x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.04 (0.10) 2.5 > 40 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.06 (0.15) 4.0 > 30 F TC16M 064-Q x x < 0.04 (0.08) < 0.06 (0.15) 4.0 > 30 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.09 (0.20) 5.0 > 30 F TC16M 080-Q x x < 0.03 (0.08) < 0.09 (0.20) 5.0 > 30 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.07 (0.15) 9.0 > 40 F TC16M 096-Q x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.07 (0.15) 9.0 > 40 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 15.0 > 40 F TC16M 120-Q x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 15.0 > 40 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.08 (0.20) 19.0 > 40 F TC16M 144-Q x x < 0.05 (0.08) < 0.08 (0.20) 19.0 > 40 M58X0.75 FD TC16M x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 33.0 > 40 F Yes TC16M 192-Q x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.05 (0.10) 33.0 > 40 M58X0.75 FD 6.56 Yes TC16M x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.08 (0.15) 52.0 > 40 F Yes TC16M 240-Q x x < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.08 (0.15) 52.0 > 40 M58X0.75 FD 6.56 Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F/#: the real F/# of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a very sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 4.8 μm. 6 FD stands for Flange Distance (in mm), defined as the distance from the mounting flange (the metal ring in rear part of the lens) to the camera detector plane. 7 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 8 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 45

47 TELECENTRIC LENSES VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS TC4K series Flat telecentric lenses for 4 k pixel linescan cameras KEY ADVANTAGES Compact design Flat shape for easy integration. Easy rotational phase and focus adjustment Robust and precise tuning of FOV phase angle and best focus position. Compatible LTCL4K telecentric illuminators with matching flat design. Dedicated CMMR4K mirrors 90 right angle attachment for easy integration in tight spaces. Detailed test report with measured optical parameters. TC4K series telecentric lenses have been designed for measurement applications using linescan cameras with detectors up to 28.7 mm (e.g pixels with pixel size 7 μm). Dimensional constraints are often a major issue when designing line scan systems where the sample or the camera itself must be moved: TC4K series is the Opto Engineering solution for applications and machines with tight dimensional constraints. Compatible LTCL4K illuminators with matching flat design and dedicated accessories allow for optical combinations that fit most geometrical measurement configurations. TC4K series feature standard F or M42 mount to fit common linescan camera interfaces; additional mounts are available upon request. Moreover, the lens-camera interface provides both fine detector phase adjustment and a precise focusing mechanism. Detector phase adjustment allows the user to precisely position the linear FOV at 90 from the object movement direction. Mount F Mount N = M42x1 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS LTCL4K series p. 114 LTBRDC series p. 141 Application examples FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE MIRRORS CMMR4K series p. 208 Engine shaft measurement performed with TC4K lens coupled to LTCL4K telecentric illuminator by means of two CMMR4K deflecting mirrors. 46

48 Cell count in a Petri dish performed with TC4K lens used in combination with CMMR4K deflecting mirror and a back light. Metal sheet measurement performed by TC4K lens and diffused backlight illumination. Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Line - 2 kpx Line - 4 kpx Part Mag. Image 2k x 10 µm 4k x 7 µm WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Phase Flange Length Width Height number width typical (max) typical (max) adj. distance (x) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm) F N F N F N F N TC4K 060-x (0.10) 0.05 (0.08) 7.3 > 30 Yes TC4K 090-x (0.10) 0.05 (0.08) 16.4 > 30 Yes TC4K 120-x (0.12) 0.08 (0.10) 29.2 > 25 Yes TC4K 180-x (0.10) 0.08 (0.10) 65.6 > 30 Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. Typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 7 μm. 6 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 7 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. Ordering information It s easy to select the right lens for your application: our part numbers are coded as TC4K yyy -x where yyy refers to the field of view (FOV) in millimeters and -x refers to the mount option: - F for F-mount - N for M42x1 mount (flange distance FD mm). E.g. TC4K060-N for a TC4K060 with M42x1 mount. 47

49 File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select TELECENTRIC LENSES VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS TC12K series Telecentric lenses for 12 k and 16 k pixel linescan cameras TC12K series telecentric lenses are designed to fit very large line detector cameras. An image circle diameter larger than 62 mm combined with very high resolution makes the TC12K series ideal for 12 k and 16 k resolution cameras. Flat panel display, solar cell and electronic board inspection are among the most common applications of these optics in the electronics industry; at the same time the optical specifications make them perfectly suitable to accurately measure large mechanical parts. In addition to the standard M72x0.75 mount, TC12K lenses can be equipped with other camera mounts at no additional cost ensuring wide compatibility with most common linescan cameras. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS LTBRDC series p. 141 LTCLHP CORE series p. 110 FULL RANGE OF CLAMPING MECHANICS CMHOTC12K series p. 200 Application examples Flat panel inspection Large mechanical parts Electronic board inspection 48

50 Wide image circle TC12K is optimized for line scan sensor sizes up to 62.4 mm. SENSOR SIZE UP TO 62.4 mm 2048 px x 10 µm 2048 px x 14 µm 4096 px x 7 µm 4096 px x 10 µm 7450 px x 4.7 µm 6144 px x 7 µm 8192 px x 7 µm px x 5 µm 20.5 mm 28.6 mm 28.6 mm 35 mm 41 mm 43 mm 57.3 mm 62 mm TC12K Phase adjustment Adjusting the phase of the camera mounted on TC12K telecentric lenses is easy: simply loosen the three set screws and rotate the camera mount until you achieve the desired angular alignment. Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Line - 8 kpx Line - 16 kpx Line - 12 kpx Line - 12 kpx Part Mag. Image 8 k x 7 μm 16 k x 3.5 μm 12 k x 5 μm 12 k x 5.2 μm WD wf/# Telecentricity Distortion Field CTF Mount Phase Length Diam. number circle typical (max) typical (max) adj. (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (deg) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm) TC12K < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.08 (0.10) 1.3 > 35 M72 x FD 6.56 Yes TC12K < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.08 (0.10) 2.5 > 35 M72 x FD 6.56 Yes TC12K < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.06 (0.08) 4.3 > 40 M72 x FD 6.56 Yes TC12K < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.07 (0.10) 6.2 > 40 M72 x FD 6.56 Yes TC12K < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.08 (0.10) 11.7 > 35 M72 x FD 6.56 Yes TC12K < 0.06 (0.08) < 0.08 (0.10) 17.8 > 35 M72 x FD 6.56 Yes Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximum resolution and minimum distortion. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Lenses with smaller apertures can be supplied on request. 3 Maximum slope of chief rays inside the lens: when converted to milliradians, it gives the maximum measurement error for any millimeter of object displacement. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5 μm. 6 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 7 FD stands for Flange Distance (in mm), defined as the distance from the mounting flange (the metal ring in rear part of the lens) to the camera detector plane. 8 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 49

51 360 VIEW OPTICS The perfect solution for your machine vision inspection challenges. One of the most recurring needs in the machine vision industry is to be able to fully inspect an object with as few cameras as possible. This request is becoming more and more common in a variety of markets, like the beverage, pharmaceutical and automotive industries. Opto Engineering designed a line of incredible 360 optics where one image is enough to view the top and side of an object or the inside of a cavity. Most of these special optics are unique designs patented by Opto Engineering, with exceptional build quality and unmatched optical performance. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

52 51 51

53 360 VIEW OPTICS PC series Pericentric lenses for 360 top and lateral view with just one camera KEY ADVANTAGES Just one camera No need for multiple cameras placed around and over the object. Fast image analysis No image matching software is needed as the picture is not segmented. Single point of view No perspective effects typical of multi-image systems. Smooth on-line integration Inspected parts pass unobstructed in the free space below the lens. PC pericentric lenses are unique optics designed to perform complete inspection of objects up to 60 mm in diameter, quickly and reliably. The innovative design allows one camera to see the top and lateral surfaces of an object in perfect focus all in one image. This allows you to greatly simplify the layout of the vision system, with no need for multiple cameras, lenses or mirrors. The term pericentric comes from the specific path of the light rays: the lateral surface of the object appears to be wrapped around the top face, making the PC series ideal for cylindrical objects which are very common in the beverage and pharmaceutical industry. Typical applications include bottleneck thread inspection, and data matrix reading - the code will always be properly imaged regardless of its position. Sample images taken with PC optics FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Area scan cameras p DEDICATED COMPATIBLE OBLIQUE RINGLIGHTS LTRN 210x20 for PC xx030xs LTRN 245x25 for PC xx030hp DEDICATED CLAMPING MECHANICS FOR PCxx030XS p CMHO080 p. 200 SETUP Please refer to our website for setup instructions. 52

54 PC optics are designed to work with 1/3, 1/2 and 2/3 detectors. These detectors ensure the most appropriate optical magnification factor to achieve the field depth required by high resolution 3D pericentric imaging. The image of the top of the object and its sides are inscribed into the short side of the camera detector. WD Diameter diameter Max 24 Height The smaller the object diameter, the larger the object height which can be inspected, while short objects can be inspected over a larger diameter. The tables below show possible combinations of object diameters and heights along with the appropriate working distance and recommended F-number; the r parameter for each configuration is also listed. The r parameter is the ratio between the side view height (the circular crown thickness) and the detector short side. It provides information about side view resolution. The higher the r value, the higher the resolution that can be achieved in the side view. Diameter Detector short side Height Side view height (px) r (%) = Detector short side (px) *100 Unwrapped image. 53

55 360 VIEW OPTICS PC series Pericentric lenses for 360 top and lateral view with just one camera EXTENDED RANGE Compact PC xx030xs lenses for inspection of objects with diameter down to 7.5 mm. Part number PC 13030HP PC 12030HP PC 13030XS PC 12030XS PC 23030XS Detector type 1/3 1/2 1/3 1/2 2/3 Image circle Ø (mm) Field of view (diam x height) Min (mm x mm) 20 x x x 5 10 x 5 15 x 5 Typical (mm x mm) 30 x x x x x 30 Max (mm x mm) 60 x x x x x 12 Optical specifications Wavelength range (nm) Working distance (mm) lp/mm (%) > 30 > 25 > 40 > 30 > 25 F/# Mechanical specifications Diameter (max) (mm) Length (mm) Weight (g) Mount C C C C C 54

56 Field of view selection chart PC 13030HP field of view Diam. Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) PC 12030HP field of view Diam. Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r mm (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) PC 13030XS field of view Diam. Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) PC 12030XS field of view Diam. Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r mm (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) PC 23030XS field of view Diam. Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r Height WD F/# r mm (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (%)

57 360 VIEW OPTICS PCCD series Catadioptric lenses for 360 top and lateral view with just one camera KEY ADVANTAGES 360 imaging of small objects Parts down to 7.5 mm in diameter can be imaged. Extra wide lateral view angle Object sides are viewed at an angle approaching 45. Compactness The lens can be easily integrated in any system. Perfect chromatic correction For RGB camera applications and color inspection. ACCESSORY PCCDLFAT Field of view extender for inspection of objects with diameter > 25 mm. PCCD series are catadioptric lenses exclusively developed and manufactured by Opto Engineering to enable the 360 side view of small objects. Their innovative optical design, based on a catadioptric system, makes it possible to image objects with diameters as small as 7 mm. The sides of the object are imaged through the catadioptric system, while the top surface is directly imaged onto the center of the detector. The compactness and high resolution of these lenses make them ideal to inspect components like pharmaceutical containers, plastic caps, pre-forms, bottlenecks, screws and other threaded objects. PCCD series can work either with 1/2, 1/3 and 2/3 detectors. The sides of the object being inspected are observed over a wide view angle, approaching 45 at its maximum; this feature makes it possible to inspect complex object geometries from a convenient perspective. Part number PCCD 013 PCCD 012 PCCD 023 Detector type 1/3 1/2 2/3 Image circle Ø (mm) Field of view (diam x height) Min (mm x mm) 7.5 x x x 5 Typical (mm x mm) 15 x x x 10 Max (mm x mm) 25 x x x 17 Extended with PCCDLFAT (mm x mm) 35 x x x 25 Sample images taken with PCCD optics Optical specifications Wavelength range (nm) Working distance (mm) Working distance with PCCDLFAT (mm) lp/mm (%) > 35 > 30 > 30 F/# Mechanical specifications Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Weight (g) Mount C C C 56

58 DEDICATED COMPATIBLE RINGLIGHTS LTRN165x45, LTRN245x35 p. 124 DEDICATED CLAMPING MECHANICS CMHO PCCD p. 200 FIELD OF VIEW EXTENDER ACCESSORY Min 18 PCCDLFAT p. 215 WD Diameter Max 35 Height The image of the external walls of the object, captured through the catadioptric system, is inscribed into the short side of the camera detector within a circular crown. On the other hand, the top of the object is directly imaged onto the central part of the detector area: both the lateral and top view of the object are in perfect focus at the same time. Height Diameter Top view diameter (px) c (%) = Detector short side (px) *100 Detector short side The tables show possible combinations of object diameters and heights along with the appropriate working distance and recommended F-number; the c parameter for each configuration is also listed. The c parameter describes the dimension of the top view image: it is calculated as the ratio between the central top view diameter and the short side of the detector. The typical ratio between the object height and its diameter is 2/3 which means that, for a given object diameter (i.e. 15 mm), the recommended inspection height will be around 67% of the diameter (10 mm). However, this parameter can be modified to accommodate for different aspect ratios (up to 100%) by adjusting the lens working distance, focus and F-number. Unwrapped image. Field of view selection chart PCCD accessories PCCD 013 field of view Diameter Height WD F/# c (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) Extended FOV with PCCDLFAT PCCD 012 field of view Diameter Height WD F/# c (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) Extended FOV with PCCDLFAT PCCD 023 field of view Diameter Height WD F/# c (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) Extended FOV with PCCDLFAT PCCDLFAT is an accessory designed to extend the FOV of PCCD optics and inspect objects with even larger diameters (beyond 25 mm). This accessory can be easily mounted on PCCD optics by the user: simply remove the pre-assembled protective window and replace it with PCCDLFAT. PCCD optics are complemented by a full set of accessories, including CMHO PCCD: dedicated clamping mechanics designed to securely hold catadioptric lenses. LTRN series: specific LED ring illuminators. 57

59 360 VIEW OPTICS PCHI series Hole inspection optics for 360 inside view in perfect focus KEY ADVANTAGES Perfect focusing of holed objects Both the walls and the bottom of cavities are imaged in high resolution. Inside inspection from the outside No need to put an optical probe into the hole. Very high field depth Objects featuring different shapes and dimensions can be imaged by the same lens. Wide view angle Sample surfaces are acquired by the lens under a convenient perspective to clearly display their features. PCHI optics have been developed by Opto Engineering to easily inspect holes, cavities and containers. Unlike common optics or so called pinhole lenses which can only image flat fields of view, hole inspection optics are specifically designed to image both the bottom of a hole and its vertical walls. Thanks to the large view angle (>82 ) and innovative optical design, these lenses are compatible with a wide range of object diameters and thicknesses. Hole inspection optics are the perfect solution to inspect a variety of different object shapes such as cylinders, cones, holes, bottles or threaded objects. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS LTLAB2-x p. 120 LTRN 075 W45 p. 124 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLERS LTDV series p. 222 Common lens Hole inspection optics Sample images taken with PCHI optics Perfect focusing is maintained throughout the entire depth of a hole. Conical cavity inspection is possible from both sides. Flat FOV Cavity vertical wall Square, polygonal or irregular cross section objects can be inspected. Cavity bottom 58

60 82 Diameter WD Part number PCHI 013 PCHI 012 PCHI 023 Detector type 1/3 1/2 2/3" Image circle Ø (mm) Field of view 1 (diam x height) Min (mm x mm) 10 x x x 10 Max (mm x mm) 120 x x x 190 Optical specifications Wavelength range (nm) Working distance (mm) lp/mm (%) > 40 > 40 > 30 wf/# Height Mechanical specifications Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Weight (g) Mount C C C Height 1 Cameras with CS- to C-mount adapters, filters or protective windows in front of the sensor or other mechanical constraints in the C-mount can limit the focus range of PCHI0xx lenses. Contact us to check compatibility with your specific camera. 2 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. Diameter Detector short side Side view height (px) r (%) = Detector short side (px) *100 Unwrapped image. Field of view selection chart PCHI 013, PCHI 012 and PCHI 023 field of view High res. imaging Normal res. imaging Hole Cavity r Cavity r WD diameter height height (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) PCHI optics can image cavities whose diameters and thicknesses span over a wide range of values. For a given hole diameter, the table on the left lists the maximum cavity height allowed for both high resolution imaging (small pixel sizes) and normal resolution imaging (>5 micron pixels) applications; the r ratio indicates how much of the detector area gets covered by the image of the hole inner walls. The listed working distance values ensure that the object image is exactly inscribed into the short side of the detector, thus maximizing r ratio and image resolution. 59

61 360 VIEW OPTICS PCBP series Boroscopic probes for panoramic cavity imaging and measurement from inside KEY ADVANTAGES Inspection of cavities from inside Hidden internal features and defects are clearly viewed. High resolution The catadioptric design enables the detection of tiny defects over a very wide view angle. Flaw detection Coarse deformations revealed using direct illumination. Surface defect enhancement Mixing direct and indirect illumination makes it possible to emphasize tiny and scarcely visible defects. PCBP probes are used to inspect holed objects such as engine parts, containers and tubes whose hidden features can only be controlled by introducing a probe into the cavity. The catadioptric (refracting + reflecting) optical design ensures much higher resolution than fiber-based probes and enables the complete 360 inner view of the entire cavity. Boroscopic probes are intended to be handled by a robot arm or S.C.A.R.A. in order to scan even the deepest cavities. Built-in illumination keeps the device very compact and makes it suitable for simple 3D applications by means of panoramic triangulation techniques. Sample images taken with a PCBP optics Inspection of holed parts of an engine. Tube scanning for integrity inspection. Defect and impurities detection inside containers. 60

62 PCBP probes can image cavities whose diameter ranges from 25 mm to 100 mm and over: the table below shows the inspection range allowed. Inspection area Max Height 53 mm ø 21 mm Min Height 9 mm Min ø 25 mm Specular/3D area Diameter Height (mm) (mm) Max ø 100 mm An integrated LED source illuminates the cavity both diffusely and directly (specular illumination). The diagram on the left shows the different illumination areas. Diffused illumination is used for defect detection and component inspection. Direct/specular illumination can be efficiently used to check for surface deformation on metal and highly reflective objects as well as to measure the hole diameter. The image of the cavity covers around 50% of the detector height; the continuous red line indicates the bottom view of the cavity (-22.5 ), the dashed line shows the upper view (+37.5 ) while the dash-dotted line refers to the lateral view (0 ). Unwrapped image. Part number PCBP 013 PCBP 012 Detector type 1/3 1/2 Image circle Ø (mm) Field of view (diam x height) Min (mm x mm) 25 x 9 25 x 9 Max (mm x mm) 100 x x 53 Optical specifications Wavelength range (nm) Viewing angle (deg) lp/mm (%) > 25 > 20 F/# Mechanical specifications Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Weight (g) Mount C C The LED illumination device is integrated into the unit. The optical tip of the probe PCBPTIP can be easily replaced in case of damage. The best focus is achieved by means of a lockable focusing mechanism. Power supply cables exit the device nearby the C-mount. Electrical specifications LED Voltage (V) LED Power (W) < 2.0 <

63 360 VIEW OPTICS PCPW series Polyview optics for multiple side views in one image KEY ADVANTAGES Just one camera No need for multiple cameras placed around and over the object. Wide viewing angles 45 side view makes otherwise hidden features visible. Complete surface inspection Both inner and outer object surfaces can be imaged in one shot. Very high resolution Even the tiniest defects can be detected. DEDICATED COMPATIBLE OBLIQUE RINGLIGHTS LTRN 050 x45 p. 124 LTRN 245 x45 p. 124 PCPW optics provide eight different views of the side and top surfaces of an object. The wide view angle (45 ) enables the inspection of the side features of an object (for example the threads of a screw or a nut) otherwise impossible to acquire with a single camera. Both the external walls of an object and its top can be imaged at the same time, while internal surfaces of holed objects can be completely inspected from the outside. A combined view of the internal and external surfaces is possible and an image displaying both the inner walls and the bottom of a cavity can be obtained. In addition to these unique features, PCPW optics also ensures excellent image resolution and image brightness. Sample images taken with PCPW optics Part number PCPW 013 PCPW 012 PCPW 023 Detector type 1/3 1/2 2/3 Image circle Ø (mm) Max object diameter for SIDE inspection Height 20 mm (mm) Height 5 mm (mm) Max object diameter for SIDE + TOP inspection Height 10 mm (mm) Optical specifications Wavelength range (nm) Working distance (mm) lp/mm (%) > 60 > 50 > 40 F/# Mechanical specifications Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Weight (g) Mount C C C 62

64 Max WD 44 mm Min WD 20 mm 45 Object height 14 mm 22 mm IMAGE ON CAMERA DETECTOR Object height The diagram shows how PCPW optics image a cylindrical object. The object is observed at 45 from eight different points of view. Eight different trapezoidal fields of view are obtained: all the object features included in such a trapezoid will be imaged on the corresponding image portion. The 45 view angle allows both the sides and the top of a cylindrical object to be imaged. If the object is a hollow cylinder (hole or cavity), the inner wall of the cavity will be imaged instead of the top, thus enabling both outer and inner side inspection. 33 mm Object diameter Field of view Object diameter ø 30 mm h = 20 mm h = 5 mm ø 50 mm h = 10 mm ø 30 mm Maximum field of view In order to perform a complete 360 inspection, each of the eight image portions should image at least 1/6 of the cylindrical surface; this condition ensures a good overlapping between two different lateral views, since part of the object features will be shared by two neighboring image portions. When the object height is maximum (20 mm) up to 30 mm diameter objects can be inspected. Up to 50 mm diameter objects can be inspected, provided their thickness doesn t exceed 5 mm. Combined view of both the inner sides and the bottom of a cavity is possible when objects are up to 30 mm diameter and 10 mm height. Part number LTRN 050 W 45 Light color white, 6300 K Dimensions Outer diameter (mm) 54.0 Inner diameter (mm) 15.2 Height (mm) 18.0 Weight (g) 30.0 Mount threaded retaining ring Voltage (V, DC) 24 Power (W) 3 Compatible PC lenses PCPW 0xx, PCHI 0xx Other compatible lenses TC 23 00x, MC3-03X LTRN 050 W 45 is a small LED ring illuminator compatible with different products and suitable for a variety of inspections. This illuminator is also perfectly suitable for illuminating the inner sides of a cavity imaged by a Polyview lens; the illuminator flange is threaded to fit PCPW series inner mounting interface. 63

65 360 VIEW OPTICS PCMP series Micro-polyview optics for 3D measurement and imaging of small parts KEY ADVANTAGES Small parts lateral imaging Inspection of objects whose size ranges from 1 to 10 mm. Measurement capability The top and the lateral views show the same magnification. High field depth The top and the lateral views are imaged without significant defocusing. PCMP optics are 3D, multi-image lenses designed to completely measure and inspect objects whose dimensions range from 1 to 10 mm, such as electronic components, solder paste and micromechanical components. Six different lateral views are provided by an array of mirrors interfaced to a bi-telecentric lens; the top of the object is directly imaged at the center of the field of view. The lateral views feature exactly the same magnification and the images remain in perfect focus even when the object is displaced from its nominal position. All the views can be used to precisely measure the dimension of components from different angles. The PCMP series integrates LED illumination optimized for this specific assembly. CUSTOM FEATURES - different number of views - different view angles - asymmetric or special mirror arrays can be supplied upon request. Part number PCMP 012 PCMP 023 Detector type 1/2 2/3 Image circle Ø (mm) Max object inspection height With diameter 2.5 mm 6 6 With diameter 5 mm With diameter 7.5 mm 3 3 With diameter 10 mm 1 1 Optical specifications Wavelength range (nm) Working distance (mm) lp/mm (%) > 40 > 40 wf/# The suggested working distance ranges from 1.5 to 5 mm. The best focus can be achieved by adjusting the number of spacers in the C-mount interface or by vertically positioning the illuminator+mirror assembly. The image orientation can be adjusted by simply rotating the mirror cage or the whole assembly. The top and side views show exactly the same magnification; however the side views appear to be compressed because of the perspective angle. Thanks to telecentric imaging such compression is purely linear and therefore very easy to calibrate. Mechanical specifications Diameter (mm) Length (mm) Weight (g) Mount C C Electrical specifications Illuminator voltage (V, DC) Illuminator power (W) Camera phase adjustment feature is available upon request. 1 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p

66 18.5 Side view Top view Side view Side view Top view Side view Application examples Mechanical components inspection Thread integrity, pitch and diameter can be verified and measured. Side views Side views Top view Top view Side views IMAGE ON CAMERA DETECTOR 5.0 Side views IMAGE ON CAMERA DETECTOR 5.0 SMD components inspection Integrated circuit position, rotation, pin integrity and bonding can be checked. Side view Top view Side view Side view Top view Side view Side views Side views Electronic connector check Presence/absence, alignment and length of pins can be precisely measured. Top view Top view Side views Side views IMAGE ON CAMERA DETECTOR IMAGE ON CAMERA DETECTOR 65

67 360 VIEW OPTICS TCCAGE series Bi-telecentric system for multiple side imaging and measurement at 90 KEY ADVANTAGES 90 lateral imaging The four orthonormal views allow you to see object features that are hidden from the top. Long and thin object inspection The characteristic aspects ratio of the four image segments perfectly fits long and thin objects. Built-in illumination The device also incorporates two different light sources, for back and direct illumination. Suitable for measurement Telecentric optics makes this module perfect for any multiplemeasurement application. TCCAGE is an integrated optomechanical system designed to fully inspect and measure parts from the side without any need of rotation. Four orthonormal views of an object are provided by a bitelecentric lens through an array of mirrors. Each view is exactly at 90 with respect to the neighboring views; this optical layout ensures complete coverage of the object lateral surface. Furthermore, telecentric imaging makes the system insensitive to off-centered parts and therefore suitable for measurement applications. TCCAGE is the perfect solution for inspecting parts whose features would be hidden when looked at from the top and for all those applications where an object must be inspected or measured from different sides. Two different illumination devices are built into the system to provide either backlight or direct part illumination. NEW Camera phase adjustment feature added for easy and hassle-free integration. Part number TCCAGE TCCAGE TCCAGE TCCAGE Detector type 1/2 2/3 1/2 2/3 Image circle Ø (mm) Max object diameter (mm) Max object height (mm) Optical specifications Wavelength range (mm) lp/mm (%) > 40 > 40 > 40 > 40 wf/# Mechanical specifications Width (mm) Length (mm) Height (mm) Weight (g) Mount C C C C Camera phase regulation 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Electrical specifications Ring illumination voltage (V, DC) Ring illumination power (W) Back illumination voltage (V, DC) Back illumination power (W) Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 2 Indicates the availability of an integrated camera phase adjustment feature. 66

68 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p d Sample images taken with TCCAGE Working principle A bi-telecentric lens observes the object from four different positions through a mirror assembly, ensuring that the optical path is the same for all four view points. The four views are equally spaced by 90 and partially overlapped, obtaining complete coverage of the object lateral surfaces. The system can thus tolerate off-centered components without any significant decay of the image quality thanks to the telecentric optics, which ensures that magnification is maintained in each image segment. The system is designed so as to allow components to pass unobstructed through the mirror cage, for in-line applications. When TCCAGE system is used for in-line inspection, consider the following minimum distance d between two consecutive objects in order to avoid image overlapping TCCAGE xx048 TCCAGE xx096 d (mm) 25 + object/2 d (mm) 50 + object/2 Illumination geometry TCCAGE series integrates both direct and backlight illumination. Direct illumination (yellow cone in the drawing) is provided by a ring illuminator placed on the top of the part that can be used to enhance surface defects. Back lighting (indicated by the yellow arrow) is obtained by means of a diffuse source which illuminates the object through the mirror system; this type of illumination is suggested for measurement purposes or to inspect transparent objects. Additional port TCCAGE is provided with an extra port placed right above the object. This port can be used to inspect the top of the part using an additional lens and camera system (for example a PCHI hole inspection lens, a macro or TC lens). The port can also accomodate other types of illuminators. 67

69 MACRO LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS UP TO 4/3 SENSORS VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS A complete array of products dedicated to close-range inspection. Macro lenses are the Opto Engineering answer to the need for accurate close-up imaging. These lenses can perform close range inspection tasks very effectively with impressive optical performance in terms of resolution and distortion. Like all our products, these optics are built to be deployed in industrial environments: their compact form factor, optical capabilities and excellent value make the Opto Engineering macro lenses the ideal solution for a wide range of machine vision systems. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

70 69 69

71 MACRO LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS MC series Zero distortion macro lenses KEY ADVANTAGES Zero distortion MC series are suitable for any measurement application where telecentricity is not required. High resolution MC series has been specifically designed to work in macro configuration. Compactness Small outer diameter (15 mm), fitting applications with limited space for optical components. MC series macro lenses are designed to capture images of small objects when both very good resolution and nearly zero distortion are needed. Small object fields of view are often observed by means of long focal length lenses equipped with an additional spacer, used to adjust the working distance. Unfortunately, this approach leads to several problems like high image distortion, resolution loss (especially at the corners), poor depth of field and chromatic effects, thus making this method not suitable for good imaging neither compatible with accurate measurement requirements. FOR HIGHER MAGNIFICATION TELECENTRIC LENSES SEE ALSO TCHM series p. 30 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Ringlights LTLA, LTRNST, LTRNOB series p Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p All of these problems can be overcome by using MC series, specifically designed for macro imaging. MC series lenses are compact and cost-effective optics providing very high image resolution. A very low optical distortion makes these lenses perfectly suitable for precise dimensional measurement applications. Application examples 70

72 Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specifications 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD Focal F/# Distortion Field Mount Length Height Diam. number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 length (wf/#) depth (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) MC 300X x x x x x (20) < C MC 200X x x x x x (16) < C MC 150X x x x x x (13) < C MC 100X x x x x x (10) < C MC 075X x x x x x (9) < C MC 050X x x x x x (8) < C MC 033X x x x x x (7) < C F/# = F-number, wf/# = Working F-number, the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 2 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 3 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used fo r measurement but, to get a very sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 3.45 μm. 71

73 MACRO LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS MC3-03X macro Zero distortion multi-configuration macro lens KEY ADVANTAGES Wide range of magnifications MC3-03X is suitable for the inspection of many different object sizes with different detector options. Nearly zero distortion Less than 0.05% distortion, at any magnification, makes this lens the perfect choice for measurement applications. Perfect optical parameters mix Changing the magnification also changes the lens working F-number in such a way that resolution and distortion are always optimized. MC3-03X is a multi-configuration macro lens suitable for the inspection of objects whose size varies from a few millimeters to some centimeters. Magnification and focus can be tuned by adjusting a lockable rotating knob. The lens magnification range can be selected by means of a set of extension tubes, included in the product package; this feature makes this component ideal for prototyping purposes and for machine vision applications requiring flexibility. Since the working F-number increases with magnification, the optimum combination of field depth, image resolution and brightness is maintained in any lens configuration. Moreover, the optical distortion approaches zero at any magnification, making this lens perfectly suitable for measurement applications. Application examples 72

74 FOR HIGHER MAGNIFICATION TELECENTRIC LENSES SEE ALSO TCHM series p. 30 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Ringlights LTLA, LTRNST, LTRNOB series p Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p MC3-03X macro FOV and WD selection chart Detector type Dimensions Number Mag. Image WD F/# (wf/#) Field 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Mount Length Diam. of spacers circle depth w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h x x x x x 7.07 (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 Object field of view (mm x mm) (6) x x x x x (6) x x x x x (7) x x x x x (7) x x x x x (8) x x x x x (9) x x x x x (9) x x x x x (10) x x x x x (10) x x x x x (11) x x x x x (9) x x x x x (10) x x x x x (10) x x x x x (11) x x x x x (11) x x x x x (12) x x x x x (12) x x x x x (13) x x x x x (13) x x x x x (14) x x x x x (13) x x x x x (13) x x x x x (14) x x x x x (14) x x x x x (15) x x x x x (15) x x x x x (16) x x x x x (16) x x x x x (17) x x x x x (18) x x x x x (16) x x x x x (17) x x x x x (18) x x x x x (18) x x x x x (19) x x x x x (19) x x x x x (20) x x x x x (20) x x x x x (21) x x x x x (21) x x x x x F/# = F-number, wf/# = Working F-number, the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 2 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a very sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 3.45 µm. C C C C

75 MACRO LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS MCSM1-01X Variable macro lens with Scheimpflug adjustment KEY ADVANTAGES Precision Scheimpflug mount Image focus is maintained across any tilted plane. Compatible with any C-mount camera The back focal length meets the C-mount standard. Application flexibility Supports a wide range of magnification factors and viewing angles. MCSM1-01X is a variable macro lens expressly designed for 3D measurement and imaging applications where the object plane is not perpendicular to the optical axis. A precise built-in adjustment mechanism allows the lens to accurately meet the Scheimpflug condition and to image tilted planes in perfect focus. This lens offers a wide range of magnifications and view angles. It can be interface with any structured light source to build up extremely accurate 3D imaging systems. Image sharpness is maintained even when the lens is tilted by a wide angle, since the Scheimpflug adjustment tilts around the horizontal axis of the detector plane. The tiltable mount is compatible with any C-mount camera. Examples of 3D imaging configuration MCSM1-01X imaging a sample from an angled point of view. Without tilt adjustment, the object is not homogeneously focused. At the Scheimpflug angle, the image becomes sharp. MCSM1-01X combined with a LTPRSMHP3W-R Scheimplfug pattern projector at 90. Without tilt adjustment, the image of the surface is not homogeneously focused. At the Scheimplflug angle, the image is sharp over the entire surface where the paste has been deposited. 74

76 FOR TELECENTRIC LENSES WITH SCHEIMPFLUG ADJUSTMENT SEE ALSO TCSM series p. 16 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS FOR 3D APPLICATIONS LED pattern projectors p. 146 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p MCSM1-01X combined with LTPRHP3W-R. Without tilt adjustment, the image is out of focus. At the Scheimplflug angle, the entire surface becomes focused. FOV and WD selection chart Long detector side horizontal Long detector side vertical 1/3" 1/2" 2/3" 1/3" 1/2" 2/3" Mag. F/# (wf/#) Object Mount WD w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h tilt tilt 4.80 x x x x x x 8.80 (x) 1 (deg) (deg) (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) Field of view - w (W) x h - (mm x mm) Field of view - w (W) x h - (mm x mm) W h W h w w (12.5) (10.9) (9.4) (8.3) (7.5) (6.9) (4.80) x (6.40) x (8.80) x (3.60) x (4.80) x (6.60) x (4.85) x (6.47) x (8.89) x (3.65) x (4.87) x (6.69) x (4.90) x (6.53) x (8.98) x (3.70) x (4.93) x (6.78) x (4.95) x (6.60) x (9.08) x (3.75) x (5.00) x (6.88) x (6.43) x (8.57) x (11.8) x (4.82) x (6.42) x (8.83) x (6.52) x (8.70) x (12.0) x (4.92) x (6.56) x (9.02) x (6.63) x (8.84) x (12.2) x (5.02) x (6.70) x (9.21) x (6.70) x (8.93) x (12.3) x (1.83) x (2.44) x (3.35) x (9.63) x (12.8) x (17.7) x (7.23) x (9.64) x (13.3) x (9.83) x (13.1) x (18.0) x (7.43) x (9.91) x (13.6) x (10.1) x (13.4) x (18.4) x (7.65) x (10.2) x (14.0) x (10.3) x (13.7) x (18.9) x (7.91) x (10.5) x (14.5) x (14.6) x (19.4) x (26.7) x (10.9) x (14.6) x (20.1) x (14.9) x (19.9) x (27.4) x (11.4) x (15.2) x (20.9) x (15.6) x (20.8) x (28.6) x (12.0) x (16.0) x (22.0) x (16.4) x (21.9) x (30.1) x (12.9) x (17.1) x (23.6) x (24.0) x (32.0) x (44.0) x (18.0) x (24.0) x (33.0) x (24.8) x (33.0) x (45.4) x (18.8) x (25.1) x (34.5) x (25.7) x (34.3) x (47.2) x (19.8) x (26.4) x (36.3) x (27.1) x (36.2) x (49.7) x (21.3) x (28.4) x (39.0) x (47.6) x (63.5) x (87.3) x (35.7) x (47.6) x (65.5) x (49.2) x (65.6) x (90.2) x (37.3) x (49.7) x (68.4) x (51.1) x (68.1) x (93.7) x (39.3) x (52.4) x (72.0) x (53.9) x (71.9) x (98.9) x (42.3) x (56.4) x (77.6) x F/# = F-number, wf/# = Working F-number, the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 75

77 File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select MACRO LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS MCZR series 4x macro revolver with motorized control KEY ADVANTAGES Perfect magnification costancy No need of re-calibration after zooming. Perfect parfocality No need of refocusing when changing magnification. Excellent image center stability Each magnification maintains its FOV center. Full motorized control Zoom magnification can be set either manually or via software. MANUAL AND SETUP Please refer to our website for the updated MCZR manual and for a complete technical documentation of the setup process. MCZR series are multiple-magnification optical systems which combine high resolution imaging with the flexibility of having multiple fields of view available in one lens. Unlike conventional zoom systems, MCZR have been specifically designed to work as macro lenses, while the optical system ensures the same optical performance of very high-resolution fixed focal lenses. The device can be both automatically and manually set to one of the four available magnifications; this optomechanical solution ensures that both magnification and image centering are maintained when returning to a specific configuration. All of these features make these optical products perfect for all those on-line applications requiring frequent changes of format and high quality images all in one lens. Application examples Quality inspection of different sized objects Quality inspection o-ring/gaskets Package inspection 76

78 FOR TELECENTRIC MULTI-MAGNIFICATION OPTICS SEE ALSO TCZR series p. 24 DEDICATED COMPATIBLE RINGLIGHT LTRN 036xx p. 122 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p Envelope barcode identification. Gasket inspection. Detector type Optical specifications Dimensions 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx Part Mag. Image w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h WD F/# (wf/#) Distortion Field CTF Mount Length Width number circle 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 x Height (x) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm x mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) x x x x x (5) < > 40 MCZR MCZR MCZR MCZR x x x x x (5) < > C x x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < > C x x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < 1 55 > x x x x x (5) < > C x x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < > x x x x x (5) < > 60 C x x x x x x (5) < > 60 1 F/# = F-number, wf/# = Working F-number, the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 2 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. 3 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 77

79 MACRO LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS MZMT12X series 12X continuous macro zoom lenses with motorized control KEY ADVANTAGES Independent motorized zoom and focus control. Compact and robust design. High resolution macro imaging. Compatible MTDV controller designed to drive MZMT12X stepper motors via Modbus RTU / USB or manual interface. DEDICATED COMPATIBLE RINGLIGHT LTRN024NW p. 122 COMPATIBLE STEPPER MOTOR CONTROLLER MTDV p. 224 MZMT12X motorized macro zoom lenses for 2/3 cameras deliver superb optical performance in a compact and robust housing. The Opto Engineering motorized design features two bipolar stepper motors that respectively control zoom and focus with fine increments, ensuring extremely accurate and repeatable results throughout the entire 12x zoom range. MZMT12X lenses are available with or without coaxial illumination and are complemented by the MTDV motion controller, available separately. All of these features make MCMT12X lenses perfect for close-up imaging applications requiring high quality images and flexible zoom capabilities. Product combinations * Electrical specifications Coaxial light Optional Iris Fixed 1 Focusing Motorized Zoom Connector Circular standard DIN 12Pos Male Motor Number 2 Type Stepper - bipolar Supply voltage (V, DC ) 3,9 Amps/phase (A) 0,6 Resistance/phase 2 (Ω) 6.5 ± 15% Inductance/phase 3 (mh) 1.7 ± 20% Holding Torque (N m) 0,018 Ratio 1:1 Step angle ( ) 1,8 Step accuracy ± 5% Rotor inertia (Kg/m 2 ) 2.0 x 10-7 Temperature rise ( C) 80 Ambient temperature ( C) Insulation resistance (MΩ) 100 Insulation class B C Dielectric strength 4 (V AC) 500 Ambient humidity max 85% (no condensation) MZMT23A12X-C-x with coaxial illumination. MZMT23A12X-C without coaxial illumination. Compatibility 5 Stepper motors controller Cable 6 MTDV3CH-00A1 CBMT001 (circular standard DIN 12Pos Female to DB15M connector cable, 2 m) LED illuminators LTRN024xx * To be ordered separately. CBMT001 cable + MTDV controller. 1 Fixed value at a specific magnification. F/# changes when magnification is changed. 2 At 25 C. 3 At 1 KHz. 4 For 1 min between the motor coils and the motor case. 5 All compatible products must be ordered separately. 6 Cable is required to connect MZMT12X series to MTDV3CH-00A1 controller and must be ordered separately. 78

80 Application examples MZMTCX23A12X-C-W lens with white coaxial illumination inspecting integrated circuits assemblies. MZMT23A12X-C lens in combination with LTRN024NW ring illuminator inspecting precision gears. MZMT23A12X-C lens in combination with LTRN024N ring illuminator inspecting PCBs. Precise light intensity tuning Easily and precisely tune the light intensity level thanks to the leadscrew multi-turn trimmer positioned in the back. Direct LED control The built-in electronics can be bypassed in order to drive the LED directly for use in continuous or pulsed mode. When bypassed, the built-in electronics behaves as an open circuit allowing direct control of the LED source. Electrical specifications Light Device power ratings LED power ratings Part number Light color, wavelength peak DC voltage Power consumption Max LED fwd current Forward voltage Max pulse current min max typ. max (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) MZMTCX23A12X-C-G green, 520 nm < MZMTCX23A12X-C-W white < n.a Tolerance ± 10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 4 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info online). Detector type Optical specifications Electrical specs Mechanical specs Part Mag. Image 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx WD wf/# Dist. Field CTF Coaxial light Mount Length Width Height number circle w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h depth 4.80 x x x x x 7.07 typ (max) min Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) MZMT 23A12X-C max x x x x x < 0.25 (0.3) 0.02 > mid x x x x x < 0.05 (0.1) 0.44 > no min x x x x x < 0.2 (0.25) 1.30 > C max x x x x x < 0.25 (0.3) 0.02 > MZMTCX 23A12X-C-W mid x x x x x < 0.05 (0.1) 0.44 > white min x x x x x < 0.2 (0.25) 1.30 > C max x x x x x < 0.25 (0.3) 0.02 > MZMTCX 23A12X-C-G mid x x x x x < 0.05 (0.1) 0.44 > green, 520 nm min x x x x x < 0.2 (0.25) 1.30 > C For the fields with the indication Ø =, the image of a circular object of such diameter is fully inscribed into the detector. 2 Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximumresolution and minimum distortion. 3 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. wf/# is fixed at a specific magnification. wf/# changes when magnification is changed. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image. Absolute values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a very sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5.5 μm. 6 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 79

81 80

82 MACRO LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS MCZM series Macro zoom lenses Optical specifications Dimensions Part Focal length Magnification Image circle WD f/# Back focal Distortion Length Diam. Mass number length (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (g) RT-MLM-3XMP RT-MLH-10X-C RT-TEC-M FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p Dome lights LTDM series p. 116 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p

83 MACRO LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS MZMT5X series 5X continuous macro zoom lenses with motorized control KEY ADVANTAGES Motorized zoom, focus and aperture. Compact and robust design. High resolution macro imaging. Compatible MTDV controller designed to drive MZMT5X stepper motors via Modbus RTU / USB or manual interface. Suitable for high speed applications. MZMT10 and MZMT43 motorized macro zoom lenses have been designed for inline and offline applications where items of various sizes must be inspected with high resolution macro imaging. Unlike many zoom lenses, MZMT10/43 working f-number is constant when magnification is changed, thus ensuring high optical throughput even at high magnifications. MZMT10/43 models feature a total continuous magnification range of 5x and fit detectors up 4/3, making them a very flexible solution to be used in many diverse applications. The Opto Engineering motorized design features three bipolar stepper motors that respectively control zoom, focus and iris with fine increments, ensuring extremely accurate and repeatable results throughout the entire 5x zoom range. MZMT5X moving parts are conveniently shielded and integrated within the lens barrel providing a zoom system that is both compact and robust. MZMT5X macro zoom lenses are complemented by dedicated stepper motor controller MTDV to be purchased separately. Product combinations * All of these features make these zoom lenses perfect for all those on-line applications requiring changes of format and high quality images. Electrical specifications Iris Focusing motorized Zoom Connector circular standard DIN 12Pos Male Motor Number 3 Type Stepper - bipolar Supply voltage (V, DC ) 5-24 Amps/phase (A) 0.5 Resistance/phase 1 (Ω) 10 ± 7% Inductance/phase 2 (mh) 2.3 ± 20% Holding Torque (N m) Ratio 1:50 Step angle ( ) 18/50 Step accuracy ± 7% Rotor inertia (Kg/m 2 ) 1,0 x 10-7 Temperature rise ( C) 80 Ambient temperature ( C) 0 50 Insulation resistance (MΩ) 100 Insulation class E C Dielectric strength 3 (V AC) 500 Ambient humidity max 85% (no condensation) Compatibility 4 Stepper motors controller Cable 5 MTDV3CH-00A1 CBMT001 (circular standard DIN 12Pos Female to DB15M connector cable, 2 m) MZMT5X lens + CBMT001 cable + MTDV controller * To be ordered separately 1 At 25 C. 2 At 1 KHz. 3 For 1 min between the motor coils and the motor case. 4 All compatible products must be ordered separately. 5 Cable is required to connect MZMT5X series to MTDV3CH-00A1 controller and must be ordered separately. 82

84 File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select DEDICATED COMPATIBLE RINGLIGHTS LTRN 064 xx p. 122 COMPATIBLE STEPPER MOTOR CONTROLLER MTDV p. 224 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CAMERAS Area scan cameras p Application examples Inspection of different sized metal containers Inspection of different sized caps and closures Inspection of different sized food packaging Detector type Optical specifications Mechanical specs Part Mag. Image 1/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3-5 Mpx /3 WD wf/# Dist. Field CTF Mount Length Diam. number circle w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h w x h 4.80 x x x x x x x x min max min max Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) 1 max x x x x x x 29.4 Ø = 49.0 n.a. < MZMT 10A5X-C x x x x x x 65.5 Ø = n.a < min x x x x x x Ø = n.a. < C max x x x x x x x x 29.4 < MZMT 43A5X-C x x x x x x x x < min x x x x x x x x < C max x x x x x x x x 29.4 < MZMT 43A5X-F x x x x x x x x < min x x x x x x x x < F MZMT 43A5X-J max x x x x x x x x 29.4 < x x x x x x x x < min x x x x x x x x < M42x1 FD For the fields with the indication Ø =, the image of a circular object of such diameter is fully inscribed into the detector. 2 Working distance: distance between the front end of the mechanics and the object. Set this distance within +/- 3% of the nominal value for maximumresolution and minimum distortion. 3 Working F-number (wf/#): the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image. Absolute values are listed. 5 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a very sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 5.5 μm. 6 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 83

85 File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select MACRO LENSES VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS MC4K series Macro lenses for 4 k pixel linescan cameras KEY ADVANTAGES Macro design Achieve unmatched resolution in critical applications: these lenses consistently deliver superior image quality than standard fixed focal length lenses used with extension tubes. Exceptional low distortion Perform measurement tasks with a high degree of accuracy and reliability. Optimized aperture For each magnification, the F/# is optimized to ensure the best field depth and image resolution. Easy front filter insertion Thanks to the front M30.5x0.5 thread. MC4K series is a collection of macro lenses fitting both 4 K linescan cameras and matrix detector cameras over 4/3. These lenses are specifically designed for macro imaging, as opposed to infinite conjugate lenses with added spacers, a common alternative unable to deliver the same optical performance. MC4K lenses feature fixed aperture to ensure optimal field depth, image resolution and brightness for each magnification range, while meeting the typical needs of machine vision applications. The absence of an iris adjustment mechanism leads to more robust build quality, granting extra durability and precision. Mount F Mount N = M42x1 Machine integration is made easy thanks to the precise focusing mechanism and the possibility to choose from an F or M42x1 mount (-N). MC4K series additionally features a front M30.5x0.5 thread for the insertion of an optional filter as well as easy phase adjustment. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Line lights, LTLNC series p. 142 Bar lights LTBRDC series p. 141 Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p Application examples Solar cell inspection Print and web inspection Identification: data-matrix and barcode reading 84

86 Phase adjustment Adjusting the phase of the camera mounted on MC4K macro lenses is easy: simply loosen the three set screws and rotate the camera mount until you achieve the desired angular alignment. Detector type Optical specifications Dimensions KAI line 2 k KAI4022/4021 KAI APS-C line 4 k 16 mm diag 21.5 mm diag 22.6 mm diag mm Part Focusing Mag. w x h 2k x 10 µm w x h w x h w x h 4 k x 7 µm WD Focal F/# Distortion Field CTF Image Object Length Diam. number 12.8 x x x x length (wf/#) typical (max) side NA side NA (x) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) F N F N near x x x x MC4K 025X-x nominal x x x x (8) < 0.08 (0.1) 6.8 > far x x x x near x x x x MC4K 050X-x nominal x x x x (10) < 0.04 (0.08) 2.5 > far x x x x near x x x x MC4K 075X-x nominal x x x x (11) < 0.04 (0.08) 1.3 > far x x x x near x x x x MC4K 100X-x nominal x x x x (13) < 0.01 (0.03) 0.9 > far x x x x near x x x x MC4K 125X-x nominal x x x x (15) < 0.01 (0.03) 0.7 > far x x x x near x x x x MC4K 150X-x nominal x x x x (17) < 0.01 (0.03) 0.5 > far x x x x near x x x x MC4K 175X-x nominal x x x x (18) < 0.01 (0.03) 0.4 > far x x x x near x x x x MC4K 200X-x nominal x x x x (20) < 0.01 (0.03) 0.4 > far x x x x Maximum and minimum magnification changes when focusing. 2 F/# = F-number, wf/# = Working F-number, the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 3 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but to get a perfectly sharp image only half of the nominal field depth should be taken into account. 5 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange; take into account a +/- 2.5 mm tolerance due to the focussing mechanism. Ordering information It s easy to select the right lens for your application: our part numbers are coded as MC4K yyyx -x where yyy refers to the magnification and -x refers to the mount option: - F for F-mount - N for M42x1 mount (flange distance FD mm). E.g. MC4K100X-N for a MC4K100X with M42x1 mount. 85

87 File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select MACRO LENSES VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS MC12K series Macro lenses for 12 k and 16 k pixel linescan cameras Mount F Mount I = M58x0.75 Mount R = M72x0.75 MC12K series are macro lenses specifically optimized to work with high resolution line scan cameras with sensor size up to 62 mm. Infinite conjugate lenses, like photographic optics, will offer poor performance when used to observe objects from up close: MC12K series are macro by design, enabling unmatched and uniform optical performance at short working distances. MC12K series lenses are the ideal choice for industrial applications where maximum image resolution is required: solar cells and printed sheets inspection, web inspection or high speed product sorting are just a few examples. In addition to the standard M72x0.75 mount, MC12K lenses can be easily equipped with any camera mount at no additional cost ensuring wide compatibility with most common linescan cameras. KEY ADVANTAGES Macro design Achieve unmatched resolution in critical applications. Exceptional low distortion Perform measurement tasks with a high degree of accuracy and reliability. Optimized for high resolution linescan cameras MC12K feature a large image circle ensuring wide compatibility with line scan sensors (up to 62.4 mm). Color correction MC12K can distinguish the finest tonal gradations and are the ideal solution for demanding applications where color consistency is required. Industrial design for factory automation MC12K feature precise manual focusing mechanism to achieve the best possible image sharpness. Wide image circle MC12K is optimized to cover the line scan sensor sizes up to 62.4 mm. SENSOR SIZE UP TO 62.4 mm 2048 px x 10 µm 2048 px x 14 µm 4096 px x 7 µm 4096 px x 10 µm 7450 px x 4.7 µm 6144 px x 7 µm 8192 px x 7 µm px x 5 µm 20.5 mm 28.6 mm 28.6 mm 35 mm 41 mm 43 mm 57.3 mm 62 mm Application examples MC12K Solar cell inspection Print and web inspection High speed sorting of tablets 86

88 Detector type Optical specifications Dimensions Full frame Line Line Line 35 mm 16 kpx 2 kpx 12 kpx Part Focusing Mag. w x h 16 k x 3.5 µm 12 k x 5 µm 12 k x 5.2 µm WD Focal F/# Distortion Field CTF Image Object Mount Length Diam. number 36.0 x length (wf/#) typical (max) side NA side NA (x) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view (mm x mm) near x 11.9 n.a. n.a. n.a F MC12K 200X-F nominal x 12.0 n.a. n.a. n.a (18) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.15 > far x 12.1 n.a. n.a. n.a near x n.a. n.a M58 x 0.75 MC12K 200X-I nominal x n.a. n.a (18) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.15 > FD far x n.a. n.a near x M72 x 0.75 MC12K 200X-R nominal x (18) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.15 > FD far x near x n.a. n.a F MC12K 150X-F nominal x n.a. n.a (15) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.2 > far x n.a. n.a near x n.a. n.a M58 x 0.75 MC12K 150X-I nominal x n.a. n.a (15) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.2 > FD far x n.a. n.a near x M72 x 0.75 MC12K 150X-R nominal x (15) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.2 > FD far x near x n.a. n.a F MC12K 100X-F nominal x n.a. n.a (12) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.3 > far x n.a. n.a near x n.a. n.a M58 x 0.75 MC12K 100X-I nominal x n.a. n.a (12) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.3 > FD far x n.a. n.a near x M72 x 0.75 MC12K 100X-R nominal x (12) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.3 > FD far x near x n.a. n.a F MC12K 067X-F nominal x n.a. n.a (10) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.6 > far x n.a. n.a near x n.a. n.a M58 x 0.75 MC12K 067X-I nominal x n.a. n.a (10) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.6 > FD far x n.a. n.a near x M72 x 0.75 MC12K 067X-R nominal x (10) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.6 > FD far x near x n.a. n.a F MC12K 050X-F nominal x n.a. n.a (9) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.9 > far x n.a. n.a near x n.a. n.a M58 x 0.75 MC12K 050X-I nominal x n.a. n.a (9) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.9 > FD far x n.a. n.a near x M72 x 0.75 MC12K 050X-R nominal x (9) < 0.01 (0.02) 0.9 > FD far x near x n.a. n.a F MC12K 025X-F nominal x n.a. n.a (8) < 0.05 (0.1) 3.2 > far x n.a. n.a near x n.a. n.a M58 x 0.75 MC12K 025X-I nominal x n.a. n.a (8) < 0.05 (0.1) 3.2 > FD far x n.a. n.a near x M72 x 0.75 MC12K 025X-R nominal x (8) < 0.05 (0.1) 3.2 > FD far x near x n.a. n.a M58 x 0.75 MC12K 012X-I nominal x n.a. n.a (7) < 0.05 (0.1) 11 > FD far x n.a. n.a near x M72 x 0.75 MC12K 012X-R nominal x (7) < 0.05 (0.1) 11 > FD far x near x n.a. n.a M58 x 0.75 MC12K 008X-I nominal x n.a. n.a (7) < 0.05 (0.1) 15 > FD far x n.a. n.a near x M72 x 0.75 MC12K 008X-R nominal x (7) < 0.05 (0.1) 15 > FD far x Maximum and minimum magnification changes when focusing. 2 F/# = F-number, wf/# = Working F-number, the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 3 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image: typical (average production) values and maximum (guaranteed) values are listed. 4 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but to get a perfectly sharp image only half of the nominal field depth should be taken into account. 5 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange; take into account a +/- 2.5 mm tolerance due to the focussing mechanism. 6 FD stands for Flange Distance (in mm), defined as the distance from the mounting flange (the metal ring in rear part of the lens) to the camera detector plane. F Mount (-F) may cause vignetting with sensor diagonal > 50 mm. For such sensor size we suggest mount M72x0.75, FD 6.56 (-R). Mount M58x0.75 (-I) may cause vignetting with sensor diagonal > 52 mm. For such sensor size we suggest mount M72x0.75, FD 6.56 (-R). Ordering information It s easy to select the right lens for your application: our part numbers are coded as MC12K yyyx-x where yyy refers to the magnification and -x refers to the mount option: - R for M72x0.75 mount (flange distance FD 6.56 mm) - F for F-mount - I for M58x0.75 mount (flange distance FD mm). E.g. MC12K100X-I for a MC12K100X with M58x0.75 mount. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Line lights, LTLNC series p. 142 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CLAMPING MECHANICS CMHOMC12Kxxx p. 200 Bar lights LTBRDC series p. 141 Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p

89 MACRO LENSES VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS MC16K series Macro Lenses for up to 82 mm line detectors Part Focal Mag. Image 35 mm Line - 8k Line - 16k Line - 12k number length circle w x h 8k x 7µm 16k x 3.5µm 12k x 5µm 36.0 x Detector type Optical specifications Dimension Line - 12k Line - 16k 12k x 5.2µm 16k x 5µm WD wf/# Back Distort. Mount Length Diam. focal length (mm) Ø (mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Object field of view RT-OPKE16-050M ± M95X1 496 ± 9 47 RT-OPKE16-070M ± M95X ± 9 47 RT-OPKE16-100M ± M95X ± 8 47 RT-OPKE16-150M ± M95X ± 9 47 RT-OPKE16-200M ± M95X1 496 ± 9 47 RT-OPKE16-300M ± M95X ± 8 47 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Line lights, LTLNC series p. 142 Bar lights LTBRDC series p. 141 Backlights LTBP, LTBC, LTBFC series p

90 FIXED FOCAL LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS UP TO 4/3 SENSORS VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS A wide range of solutions for every machine vision challenge. Opto Engineering family of fixed focal lenses comprises many optics with special features, in addition to the most common types of optics used in machine vision: we offer a wide variety of fixed focal lenses for small, medium and large detectors, including very high resolution and UV imaging options. At Opto Engineering we are constantly working to provide added-value products to our customers and this family is no exception: in fact, in addition to common fixed focal lenses, you will find a whole new line-up of optics featuring stepper-motorized iris and focus that can be easily controlled with an open protocol controller. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

91 FIXED FOCAL LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS ENMT series Fixed focal length lenses with motorized focus and aperture control KEY ADVANTAGES Motorized focus and aperture for fine and repeatable tuning of image focus and F-number setting. Fully automated installations with remote operation possibility. Compact and robust design. High optical resolution. Compatible MTDV controller designed to drive ENMT stepper motors via Modbus RTU / USB or manual interface. ENMT series are high resolution fixed focal length lenses with automated adjustment of focus and aperture. These motorized lenses guarantee precise and repeatable adjustment of both the aperture and focus to realize fully automated systems. This feature is ideal for installations where remote operation is necessary (e.g. in clean rooms where an operator cannot manually adjust the optical parameters), besides those requiring possibility to change format, lighting conditions, working distance or even inspection task. Additionally, different machines can be set with the exact same aperture/focus setting by automatically loading a pre-set configuration. Thanks to ENMT precise motorized design, the user can fully exploit the high resolution of ENMT fixed focal length optics. In fact, when compared to coarse manual operation, motorized adjustment allows for very fine and repeatable tuning of both the image focus and F-number setting. Opto Engineering motorization design integrates two bipolar stepper motors that respectively control focusing and aperture with fine incremental movements and accurate repeatable positioning. ENMT moving parts are conveniently shielded and integrated within a compact and robust enclosure. Focus and aperture can be adjusted by means of dedicated MTDV controller (available separately) specifically designed to drive up to three bi-polar stepper motors via Modbus RTU/USB or manually. Product combinations * ENMT series integrate high resolution optics featuring minimum distortion and 11 mm image circle for 5 Megapixel detectors up to 2/3. Electrical specifications Iris motorized Focusing Connector circular standard DIN 13Pos Male Motor Number 2 Type Stepper - bipolar Supply voltage (V, DC) 5-24 Amps/phase (A) 0.5 Resistance/phase 1 (Ω) 10 ± 7% Inductance/phase 2 (mh) 2.3 ± 20% Holding Torque (N m) Ratio 1:50 Step angle ( ) 18/50 Step accuracy ± 7% Rotor inertia (Kg/m 2 ) 1.0 x 10-7 Temperature rise ( C) 80 Ambient temperature ( C) 0 50 Insulation resistance (MΩ) 100 Insulation class E C Dielectric strength 3 (V AC) 500 Ambient humidity max 85% (no condensation) Compatibility 4 Stepper motors controller MTDV3CH-00A1 Cable 5 CBMT001 (circular standard DIN 12Pos Female to DB15M connector cable, 2 m) ENMT lens + CBMT001 cable + MTDV controller. * To be ordered separately. 1 At 25 C. 2 At 1 KHz. 3 For 1 min between the motor coils and the motor case. 4 All compatible products must be ordered separately. 5 Cable is required to connect ENMT series to MTDV3CH-00A1 controller and must be ordered separately. 90

92 FOR MOTORIZED MACRO ZOOM LENSES SEE ALSO MZMT12X series p. 78 MZMT5X series p. 82 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS Dome lights LTDM series p. 116 COMPATIBLE STEPPER MOTOR CONTROLLER MTDV p. 224 Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part Focal Mag. Image Max WD F/# Back Distortion Mount Length Width Height number length circle detector size focal length (mm) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) ENMT-M1224-MPW2-MM / C ENMT-M1620-MPW2-MM / C ENMT-M2518-MPW2-MM / C ENMT-M3520-MPW2-MM / C ENMT-M5028-MPW2-MM / C Application examples Pharmaceutical carton inspection Blister inspection 91

93 FIXED FOCAL LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS ENMP series Megapixel C-mount lenses for detectors up to 2/3 Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part number Focal length Magnification Image circle Max detector size WD F/# Back focal length Distortion Mount Length Diameter Filter thread (mm) (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) RT-H0514-MP / C C M43 x 0.75 RT-M0814-MP / C C M30.5 x 0.5 RT-M1214-MP / C C M30.5 x 0.5 RT-M1614-MP / C C M30.5 x 0.5 RT-M2514-MP / C C M30.5 x 0.5 RT-M3514-MP / C C M30.5 x 0.5 RT-M5018-MP / C C M30.5 x 0.5 RT-M7528-MP / C C M30.5 x 0.5 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Area scan cameras p LTRNDC LED direct ringlights p. 128 Optical filters p. 212 FIXED FOCAL LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS ENHR series 5 Megapixel C-mount lenses for detectors up to 2/3 Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part number Focal length Magnification Image circle Max detector size WD F/# Back focal length Distortion Mount Length Diameter Filter thread (mm) (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) RT-M0824-MPW / C M32 x 0.5 RT-M1224-MPW / C M27 x 0.5 RT-M1620-MPW / C M27 x 0.5 RT-M2518-MPW / C M27 x 0.5 RT-M3520-MPW / C M27 x 0.5 RT-M5028-MPW / C M27 x 0.5 HIGH RESOLUTION ENHR SERIES MATCH SMALL PIXEL SIZE DETECTORS: In order to effectively create a high resolution image a lens must be capable of resolving the detector pixel size. Take full advantage of high resolution detectors with ENHR series featuring MTFs in excess of 120 lp/mm! For further details about how to match optics and sensor resolution see section Optics and sensor resolution in pag. XIII of our Optics Basics section. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Area scan cameras p Optical filters p. 212 LTRNDC LED direct ringlights p

94 FIXED FOCAL LENSES 1/3 TO 2/3 SENSORS ENVF series Vari-focal lenses for detectors up to 2/3 Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part number Focal length Magnification Image circle Max detector size WD F/# Back focal length Distortion Mount Length Diameter Filter thread (mm) (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) RT-M3Z1228C-MP ~ 11 2/ (tele) / 50- <(wide) C C M35 x 0.5 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Area scan cameras p Optical filters p. 212 LTRNDC LED direct ringlights p. 128 FIXED FOCAL LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS EN2M series Megapixel C-mount lenses for up to 1 detectors Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part number Focal length Image circle Max detector size WD F/# Back focal length Distortion Mount Length Diameter Filter thread (mm) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) RT-VHF8M-MP C M55 x 0.75 RT-VHF12-5M-MP C M35.5 x 0.5 RT-VHF16M-MP C M35.5 x 0.5 RT-FL-BC2518-9M n.a. C M40.5 x 0.5 RT-FL-BC3518-9M n.a. C M40.5 x 0.5 RT-FL-BC5024-9M n.a. C M40.5 x 0.5 RT-FL-BC7528-9M n.a. C M40.5 x 0.5 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Area scan cameras p Optical filters p. 212 LTRNDC LED direct ringlights p

95 FIXED FOCAL LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS ENUV2M series UV C-mount lenses for up to 1 detectors Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part number Focal length Magnification Image circle Max detector size WD F/# Back focal length Distortion Mount Length Diameter Filter thread (mm) (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) RT-FL-BC2528-VGUV C M25 x 0.5 RT-FL-BC7838-VGUV C M49 x 0.75 FIXED FOCAL LENSES UP TO 4/3 SENSORS EN43 series 5 Megapixel C-mount lenses for up to 4/3 detectors Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part number Focal length Magnification Image circle Max detector size WD F/# Back focal length Distortion Nominal resolving power Mount Length Diameter Filter thread (mm) (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (lp/mm) (mm) (mm) RT-A-1224MX5M / < C M RT-A-1620MX5M / < C M RT-A-2520MX5M / < C M35.5 x 0.5 RT-A-3520MX5M / < C M37.5 x 0.5 FIXED FOCAL LENSES VERY LARGE & LINESCAN SENSORS EN4K series Line scan lenses for FF full frame detectors and up to mm image circle Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part number Focal length Magnification Image circle Max detector size WD F/# Back focal length Distortion Nominal resolving power Mount Length Diameter Filter thread (mm) (x) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (lp/mm) (mm) (mm) RT-A-2428MF Full frame - 35 mm < F M52x 0.75 RT-A-2428MT Full frame - 35 mm < M42x1 FD M52x 0.75 RT-A-2828MF Full frame - 35 mm < F M52x 0.75 RT-A-2828MT Full frame - 35 mm < M42x1 FD M52x 0.75 RT-A-3525MF Full frame - 35 mm F M52x 0.75 RT-A-3525MT Full frame - 35 mm M42x1 FD M52x 0.75 RT-FL-YFL Full frame - 35 mm n.a. 85 F M62X0.75 RT-A-5018MF Full frame - 35 mm < 1 30 F M52x 0.75 RT-A-5018MT Full frame - 35 mm < 1 30 M42x1 FD M52x 0.75 RT-FL-YFL5028A Full frame - 35 mm n.a. 85 F M52X0.75 RT-FL-YFL5028A Full frame - 35 mm n.a. 85 F M52X0.75 RT-FL-YFL Full frame - 35 mm n.a. 85 F M62X

96 INFRARED OPTICS SHORT WAVE INFRARED MEDIUM WAVE INFRARED LONG WAVE INFRARED Beyond the visible range, for advanced optical applications. Opto Engineering offers a wide variety of high resolution IR optics for both cooled and uncooled IR cameras spanning all IR spectral bands. Our IR optics feature large field of view and low distortion and can be equipped with custom mount interfaces. MWIR and LWIR thermal series also include HCAR coating for use in harsh environments. IR optics are used in a wide variety of sectors including defense, security/surveillance, industrial, medical and R&D. Applications include tracking/targeting systems, predictive maintenance, monitoring of high temperature industrial processes, thermography, flame detection, quality control /inspection. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

97 INFRARED OPTICS SHORT WAVE INFRARED SWIR series Short-wave infrared lenses KEY ADVANTAGES High resolution Designed for high resolution detectors up to 15 μm pixel pitch and 21 mm diameter. Custom mount interface Can be provided upon request. Large field of view and low distortion Superior optical performance. SWIR series is a range of short-wave infrared lenses specifically designed to operate in the µm wavelength region. This serie has been specifically designed to match the new 15 µm format InGaAs FPA Focal Plane Arrays. These lenses offer an industry standard C-mount threaded style interface or, alternatively, they can be equipped with a custom mount interface. In the design of the lenses, great importance was attached to a good image quality and a large aperture (small F-number). These lenses, mounted on a SWIR camera, are the perfect choice for a variety of applications, including solar cell inspection, night vision imaging of outdoors scenes without additional illumination (security applications), detecting bruises on fruit, imaging through silicon, biomedical imaging and many other infrared applications. Application examples VIS SWIR VIS SWIR Solar cell inspection. Liquid level inspection. Fruit sorting. Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part Focal F/# Wave Average Circular WD Image Distortion CTF Image Mount Focus Locking Back focal Length Diam. Mass number length length trans. FOV 30lp/mm side type screw length NA (mm) (µm) (%) (deg) (mm) (mm) (%) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) SW C Manual Yes SW C Manual Yes SW C Manual Yes Based on the listed image diagonal. 2 Maximum value at central wavelength. 3 Mean value at all the different fields. 4 Any custom mount is available at no additional cost. 5 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 6 Given with no mount attached. See layout drawings. 96

98 INFRARED OPTICS SHORT WAVE INFRARED ENSWIRMP series SWIR C-mount lenses for up to 2/3 detectors Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part Focal length Magnification Image Max detector WD F/# Back focal length Distortion Mount Length Diameter number circle size (mm) Ø (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) RT-M1614-SW / C RT-M2514-SW / C RT-M3514-SW / C RT-M5018-SW / C FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Optical filters p

99 INFRARED OPTICS MEDIUM WAVE INFRARED MWIR series Medium-wave infrared lenses KEY ADVANTAGES High resolution Designed for high resolution detectors up to 15 μm pixel pitch and 21 mm diameter. Custom mount interface Can be equipped with any custom mount interface. Large field of view and low distortion Superior optical performance. HCAR coating For applications exposing optical elements to harsh environments. MWIR series is a range of medium-wave infrared lenses specifically designed to operate in the 3-5 μm wavelength region with InSb Focal Plane Arrays (FPA). The lenses offer a standard Bayonet interface or, alternatively, they can be equipped with a custom mount interface. In the design of the lenses, great importance was attached to a good image quality and a large aperture (small F-number). These lenses, mounted on a MWIR camera, are the perfect choice for a variety of applications, including imaging through fog, highspeed thermal imaging, thermography, R&D (MWIR range), nondestructive testing. Application examples Electronic boards inspection. Thermal imaging. Automotive. Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part Focal F/# Wave Average Circular WD Image Distortion CTF Image Mount Focus Locking Back focal Length Diam. Mass number length length trans. FOV 30lp/mm side type screw length NA (mm) (µm) (%) (deg) (mm) (mm) (%) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) MW Bayonet Manual Yes MW Bayonet Manual Yes MW Bayonet Manual Yes MW Bayonet Manual Yes Based on the listed image diagonal. 2 Maximum value at central wavelength. 3 Mean value at all the different fields. 4 Any custom mount is available at no additional cost. 5 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 6 Given with no mount attached. See layout drawings. 98

100 INFRARED OPTICS LONG WAVE INFRARED LWIR series Long-wave infrared lenses KEY ADVANTAGES High resolution Designed for high resolution detectors up to 15 μm pixel pitch and 21 mm diameter. Custom mount interface Can be equipped with any custom mount interface. Large field of view and low distortion Superior optical performance. HCAR coating For applications exposing optical elements to harsh environments. LWIR series is a range of long-wave infrared lenses specifically designed to operate in the 8-14 μm wavelength region with uncooled detectors (a-si, VOx, ). In the design of the lenses great importance was assigned to high image quality and large aperture (small F-number). These lenses can also be equipped with custom mount interfaces. These lenses, mounted on an uncooled LWIR camera are the perfect choice for a variety of applications spanning from industrial to military, including temperature measurement for process quality control and monitoring, predictive maintenance, imaging through smoke and fog, medical imaging. Application examples Electronic boards inspection. Thermal imaging. Automotive. Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Part Focal F/# Wave Average Circular WD Image Distortion CTF Image Mount Focus Locking Back focal Length Diam. Mass number length length trans. FOV 30lp/mm side type screw length NA (mm) (µm) (%) (deg) (mm) (mm) (%) (%) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) LW M46X1 Manual Yes LW M46X1 Manual Yes LW M46X1 Manual Yes Based on the listed image diagonal. 2 Maximum value at central wavelength. 3 Mean value at all the different fields. 4 Any custom mount is available at no additional cost. 5 Measured from the front end of the mechanics to the camera flange. 6 Given with no mount attached. See layout drawings. 99

101 ADAPTIVE OPTICS A new technology to play with light and to make images better than ever. Recent advances in imaging and laser processing techniques are more and more requiring optical systems whose characteristics can be tuned in accordance with the specific configuration in which optics are operating. Defocus adjustment, aberration correction, light shaping are just some of the many tasks that traditional optics are not able to achieve with the desired accuracy and at the speed necessary for many applications. For this reason, Opto Engineering has launched its development program for adaptive optics based on the most advanced techniques in multiple piezoelectric actuation. In order to help customers in experiencing by these new techniques, Opto Engineering has created a kit of components, ready to be combined and used together. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels. 100

102 101

103 ADAPTIVE OPTICS ADKIT case Adaptive optics kit, for aberrations compensation and irregular surface focusing Part number Products included Description ADKIT MAAL10 EDAL18 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. MCAL200X-C n.a. RT-M1620-MPW2 n.a. n.a. RT-mvBF3-2051aG n.a. Multi-actuators adaptive lens 10 mm aperture Electronic driver 18 channels for adaptive lens control Power supply USB 2.0 cable Multi-wire cable USB key with manual and software suite include 2x macro lens for adaptive lens Spacer for adaptive lens substitution inside macro 16 mm C-mount lens Adaptor from C-mount lens to adaptive lens Adaptors for RMS microscopy thread 5.1 Mpix CMOS 2/3 camera USB 3.0 cable This kit is particularly indicated for performing experiments and building systems for: Machine Vision Imaging of irregular surfaces Defocus correction Specific aberration management Microscopy imaging of convex samples imaging of inhomogeneous biologic specimens two-photons imaging confocal imaging 3D reconstruction imaging Ophthalmology The adaptive lens can be combined with the Macro Lens supplied within the KIT in order to create a macro-adaptive optical system; alternatively you can connect it to a standard C-mount lens for wider field of view imaging experiments. Moreover you can integrate the adaptive element into a microscope system, by means of its specific adaptors, in order to work at very high magnifications. 102

104 The adaptive lens is operated through its specific electronic driver, which is controlled by PC via USB 2.0. The software suite includes a demo application, which will make extremely easy to modify the lens surfaces, in order either to obtain some specific type of aberration patterns or to create user specific aberration figures. By means of a second application of the software suite, which includes advanced adaptive optimization algorithms, you can easily build an image-based or an open-loop system. The software grabs an image from the camera, analyzes it, calculates all the aberration coefficients, and modifies the driver parameters until the adaptive lens deformation is such that an almost complete aberration correction is achieved. All of these software functions are made available for further integration, by means of a specific.dll library. The combination of the adaptive elements, software and driver with different types of imaging optics, makes possible to achieve fine autofocus and aberration correction and to enhance the image quality in non-standard configurations. Besides correcting aberrations, these systems can fit curved or toroidal fields of view and image highly 3D and asymmetric samples. Adaptive lens Optical specifications Dimensions Part number Trasmittance Flatness Clear aperture Diameter Heigth (%) (RMS waves at λ=633 nm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 90 < MAAL10 Zernike terms strokes (RMS waves at λ=633 nm) 1 Oblique Defocus Vertical Vertical Vertical Horizontal Oblique Oblique Oblique Primary Vertical Vertical astigmatism astigmatism trefoil coma coma trefoil quadrifoil secondary spherical secondary quadrifoil astigmatism astigmatism Electronic driver Electrical specifications Dimensions Part number Output channels Supply voltage Comunication port Length Width Heigth (V) (mm) (mm) (mm) 4 EDAL USB 2.0 Type B Macro lens Optical specifications Dimensions Part number Focusing Mag. Object field of view WD F/# (wf/#) Distortion Field depth CTF 50 lp/mm Image side N.A. Object side N.A. Mount Length Diam (mm x mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) Near x < > C MCAL200X-C Nominal x < > C Far x < > C C-Mount lens Optical specifications Dimensions Part number Adaptive Focal Mag. Image Max detector WD F/# Back focal Distortion Mount Length Diam lens length circle size length (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) (mm) (mm) 4 NO /3" C RT-M1620-MPW2 YES /3" C Camera Sensor specifications Functions Comunications Dimensions Part number Size Type Color Resolution Pixel Shutter Scan Operational Interface Mount Length Width Heigth size type rate mode 5 (pixel) (um) (fps) (mm) (mm) (mm) RT-mvBF3-2051aG 2/3" CMOS Monochrome 2464 x global 35 Free-run, edge-preset trigger, pulse width trigger USB 3.0 micro B C Measured in closed loop with Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor. 2 Maximum and minimum magnification changes when focusing. 3 Working F-number: the real F-number of a lens when used as a macro. 4 Percent deviation of the real image compared to an ideal, undistorted image. 5 SONY, IMX

105 Lighting 104

106 LED ILLUMINATORS LED PATTERN PROJECTORS Lighting is one of the most critical elements in a vision system and is in fact key to achieve stable and repeatable results. Incorrect illumination may result in extensive and time consuming image processing or, in the worst case, in crucial information loss. Opto Engineering lighting solutions, from standard to custom products, are the result of our optical knowledge and are designed with our guiding principle in mind: simple works better. We design and manufacture both lighting and optics. Many of our lighting solutions are conceived to perfectly match our lenses or even to be directly integrated into our optical systems: this approach allows to make the most out of our lighting products and greatly simplifies vision system integration, since our products are truly optimized both optically and mechanically. Opto Engineering machine vision lighting products include both LED illuminators and pattern projectors, designed to meet the needs of the most demanding industrial environments. Our innovative products enable reliable inspections in many applications thanks to their flexibility, robustness and ease of use

107 LED ILLUMINATORS TELECENTRIC LIGHTS DOME LIGHTS RINGLIGHTS COMBINED LIGHTS BACKLIGHTS BAR LIGHTS LINE LIGHTS TUNNEL LIGHTS COAXIAL LIGHTS Advanced lighting solutions. llumination is a critical part of every machine vision setup: proper choice of lighting color and geometry can effectively suppress or reveal specific features of an object, leading to simple and accurate image processing. Opto Engineering offers a wide range of illumination solutions including ringlights, dome illuminators and a unique space-saving lighting system complemented by specific high power/strobe controllers. The Opto Engineering illuminators family provides innovative and robust lighting units, designed to deal with fast-moving objects of various sizes and surface finishes, such as highly reflective or curved samples. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

108

109 LED ILLUMINATORS TELECENTRIC LIGHTS LTCLHP series Telecentric high-performance illuminators KEY ADVANTAGES Complete light coupling All the light emitted by a LTCLHP source is collected by a telecentric lens and transferred to the camera detector, ensuring very high signal-to-noise ratio. Border effects removal Diffused back-illuminators often make objects seem smaller than their actual size because of light reflections on the object sides, while collimated rays are typically much less reflected. Field depth and telecentricity improvement Collimated illumination geometry increases a telecentric lens natural field depth and telecentricity far beyond its nominal specs. Homogeneity test report with measured values. LTCLHP series are high-performance telecentric illuminators specifically designed to back illuminate objects imaged by telecentric lenses. LTCLHP telecentric illuminators offer higher edge contrast when compared to diffused back light illuminators and therefore higher measurement accuracy. This type of illumination is especially recommended for high accuracy measurement of round or cylindrical parts, where diffuse back lighting would offer poor performance due to reflections off the edges of the object under inspection. FEATURES - Excellent illumination stability with no light flickering over time even at low currents. - Precise light intensity tuning thanks to the leadscrew multi-turn trimmer positioned in the back. - Easy LED source replacement and alignment for all the LED colors offered by Opto Engineering. Available colours Optical specs Mechanical specs Compatibility Part Beam R G B W Working Length Outer number (*) diameter distance range diameter (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 LTCLHP 023-x 16 x x x x 45 ~ TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, LTCLHP 016-x 20 x x x x 35 ~ TCxx016, TC4MHR016-x, TC2MHR016-x, TCLWD series LTCLHP 024-x 30 x x x x 45 ~ TCxx024, TCxMHR024-x, TC16M009-x, TC16M012-x, TC16M018-x LTCLHP 036-x 45 x x x x 70 ~ TCxx036, TCxMHR036-x, TC16M036-x LTCLHP 048-x 60 x x x x 90 ~ TCxx048, TCCRxx048, TCxMHR048-x, TC16M048-x LTCLHP 056-x 70 x x x x 100 ~ TCxx056, TCCRxx056, TCxMHR056-x, TC16M056-x LTCLHP 064-x 80 x x x x 120 ~ TCxx064, TCCRxx064, TCxMHR064-x, TC16M064-x, TC12K064 LTCLHP 080-x 100 x x x x 150 ~ TC23072, TCxx080, TCCRxx080, TCxMHR080-x, TC16M080-x, TC12K080 LTCLHP 096-x 120 x x x x 200 ~ TC23085, TCxx096, TCCRxx096, TCxMHR096-x, TC16M096-x LTCLHP 120-x 150 x x x 220 ~ TC23110, TCxx120, TCxMHR120-x, TC16M120-x, TC12K120 LTCLHP 144-x 180 x x 270 ~ TC23130, TCxx144, TCxMHR144-x, TC16M144-x, TC12K144 LTCLHP 192-x 250 x x x 350 ~ TC23172, TCxx192, TCxMHR192-x, TC12K192 LTCLHP 240-x 300 x x 350 ~ TC23200, TC23240, TCxMHR240-x (*) The last digit of the part number -x defines the source colour. 1 Opto Engineering recommends green light for high precision measurement applications. 2 Nominal value, with no spacers in place. 108

110 SEE ALSO TCBENCH series p. 26 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CMHO series p. 200 LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 Precise light intensity tuning Easily and precisely tune the light intensity level thanks to the leadscrew multi-turn trimmer positioned in the back. Direct LED control The built-in electronics can be bypassed in order to drive the LED directly for use in continuous or pulsed mode. When bypassed, the built-in electronics behaves as an open circuit allowing for direct control of the LED source. Easy and precise alignment with bi-telecentric lenses Create the perfect optical bench for precision measurement applications by interfacing our bi-telecentric lenses and LTCLHP collimated illuminators using Opto Engineering precision clamping mechanics CMHO series. Typical emission spectrum of white LEDs Typical emission spectrum of R,G,B LEDs Relative spectral power distribution Relative spectral power distribution Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Wide selection of different colors Light Device power ratings LED power ratings Part number Light color, wavelength peak DC voltage Power consumption Max LED fwd current Forward voltage Max pulse current min max typical max (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) LTCLHP xxx-r red, 630 nm < LTCLHP xxx-g green, 520 nm < LTCLHP xxx-b blue, 460 nm < LTCLHP xxx-w white < n.a Tolerance ± 10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 4 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info online). 109

111 LED ILLUMINATORS TELECENTRIC LIGHTS LTCLHP CORE series Ultra compact telecentric illuminators KEY ADVANTAGES Deliver excellent performance LTCLHP CORE telecentric illuminators deliver exactly the same excellent optical performance as other Opto Engineering telecentric illuminators. Downsize your vision system LTCLHP CORE telecentric illuminators are up to 60% smaller than other telecentric illuminators on the market. Easily fit into existing systems LTCLHP CORE illuminators can be mounted in different directions in your machine. Improve your system performance LTCLHP CORE illuminators may be used instead of flat backlights to improve your system. Help to spare and sell A smaller system means less expenses and less space and is preferred by the industry. Homogeneity test report with measured values. LTCLHP CORE Series are ultra compact telecentric illuminators. They are up to 60% more compact than other collimated illuminators on the market. The ultra compact size allows you to greatly reduce the size of your machine and to easily integrate true collimated illumination instead of common flat backlights, thus improving your system s performance. The smart design also makes them easy to retrofit into existing systems. They can easily be mounted in different directions using any of their 4 sides, with or without clamps. A smaller system means lower manufacturing, shipping and storage costs, as well as less use of factory space and is the solution preferred by the industry. LTCLHP CORE illuminators can be used both with classic telecentric lenses and with ultra compact telecentric lenses from CORE family like TC CORE, TC2MHR CORE and TC4MHR CORE series. SEE ALSO TC series p. 8 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Mounting mechanics CMHO CR and CMPT CR series p. 203 LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 LTCLHP CORE telecentric illuminators are up to 60% shorter than other telecentric illuminators on the market. 110

112 Precise light intensity tuning Easily and precisely tune the light intensity level thanks to the leadscrew multi-turn trimmer positioned in the back. Direct LED control The built-in electronics can be bypassed in order to drive the LED directly for use in continuous or pulsed mode. When bypassed, the built-in electronics behaves as an open circuit allowing for direct control of the LED source. Light Device power ratings LED power ratings Part number Light color, wavelength peak DC voltage Power consumption Max LED fwd current Forward voltage Max pulse current min max typical max (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) LTCLCR xxx-r red, 630 nm < LTCLCR xxx-g green, 520 nm < LTCLCR xxx-w white < n.a Tolerance ± 10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 4 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info online). 111

113 LED ILLUMINATORS TELECENTRIC LIGHTS LTCLHP CORE series Ultra compact telecentric illuminators LTCLHP CORE - True collimated illumination in very limited space Limited space A standard collimated illuminator is impossible to use due to lack of space. Telecentric lens and collimated illuminator. Classic solution with diffuse backlight: less precise measurements due to surface eflections and uncertain edge position. Classic telecentric lens and flat backlight. Smart solution with LTCLHP CORE telecentric illuminator: no edge uncertainty for excellent measurement results. Classic telecentric lens and LTCLHP CORE collimated illuminator. The smartest solution with TC CORE telecentric lens and LTCLHP CORE telecentric illuminator: excellent measurement results in a super compact space. TC CORE telecentric lens and LTCLHP CORE collimated illuminator. 112

114 LTCLHP CORE illuminator dimensions (A, B, C): A Minimum beam shape dimensions: x B C x Ø Part number Light color, Minimum beam Working Optical specifications Dimensions Compatibility wavelength shape distance peak dimensions range (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 A B C 2 LTCLCR 048-R red, 630 nm Ø = 56; x = LTCLCR 048-G green, 520 nm Ø = 56; x = LTCLCR 048-W white Ø = 56; x = LTCLCR 056-R red, 630 nm Ø = 74; x = LTCLCR 056-G green, 520 nm Ø = 74; x = LTCLCR 056-W white Ø = 74; x = LTCLCR 064-R red, 630 nm Ø = 86; x = LTCLCR 064-G green, 520 nm Ø = 86; x = LTCLCR 064-W white Ø = 86; x = LTCLCR 080-R red, 630 nm Ø = 98; x = LTCLCR 080-G green, 520 nm Ø = 98; x = LTCLCR 080-W white Ø = 98; x = LTCLCR 096-G green, 520 nm Ø = 120; x = LTCLCR 096-R red, 630 nm Ø = 120; x = LTCLCR 096-W white Ø = 120; x = TCCRxx048, CMHOCR048, CMPTCR048, TCCR2M048-x, TCCR4M048-x, TCxx048, TCxMHR048-x, TC16M048, TC16M048-Q TCCRxx056, CMHOCR056, CMPTCR056, TCCR2M056-x, TCCR4M056-x, TCxx056, TCxMHR056-x, TC16M056, TC16M056-Q TCCRxx064, CMHOCR064, CMPTCR064, TCCR2M064-x, TCCR4M064-x, TCxx064, TCxMHR0564-x, TC16M064, TC16M064-Q, TC12K064 TCCRxx080, CMHOCR080, CMPTCR080, TCCR2M080-x, TCCR4M080-x, TCxx080, TCxMHR080x, TC16M080, TC16M080-Q, TC12K080, TCZR072 TCCRxx096, CMHOCR096, CMPTCR096, TCCR2M096-x, TCCR4M096-x, TCxx096, TCxMHR096x, TC16M096, TC16M096-Q, TC12K096 1 Opto Engineering recommends green light for high precision measurement applications. 2 Nominal value, with no spacers in place. 113

115 LED ILLUMINATORS TELECENTRIC LIGHTS LTCL4K series Flat telecentric illuminators for linescan cameras KEY ADVANTAGES Compact design Flat shape for easy integration. High optical throughput and enhanced field depth When coupled with compatible TC4K telecentric lenses. Dedicated CMMR4K mirrors Right-angle deflection of the light path for usage in tight spaces. Homogeneity test report with measured values. LTCL4K telecentric illuminators are specifically designed to be paired with TC4K telecentric lenses, in order to provide the high optical throughput needed for high-speed linescan measurement applications involving for instance steering components, gear and cam shafts, grinding and turning parts. These illuminators are equipped with state-of-the-art LED driving electronics, providing exceptional illumination stability, precise light intensity tuning and easy replacement of the LED source. The unique slim form factor allows these units to be used in constrained spaces, often a critical factor in many industrial environments. Also, CMMR4K right angle mirror attachments can be integrated to quickly assemble different illumination geometries, compatible with most types of inspection configurations. Application examples A LTCL4K back-illuminating a mechanical component and interfaced to a TC4K telecentric lens. A LTCL4K directly illuminating a sample and serving as a linear telecentric illuminator. 114

116 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE IMAGING TELECENTRIC LENSES TC4K series p. 46 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CMMR4K series p. 208 LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 A LTCL4K illuminator coupled with a TC4K lens using a CMMR4K deflecting mirrors to scan samples on a glass surface. Precise light intensity tuning Easily and precisely tune the light intensity level thanks to the leadscrew multi-turn trimmer positioned in the back. Direct LED control The built-in electronics can be bypassed in order to drive the LED directly for use in continuous or pulsed mode. When bypassed, the built-in electronics behaves as an open circuit allowing for direct control of the LED source. Electrical specifications Light Device power ratings LED power ratings Part number Light color, wavelength peak DC voltage Power consumption Max LED fwd current Forward voltage Max pulse current min max typical max (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) LTCL4K xxx-g green, 520 nm < LTCL4K xxx-w white < n.a Tolerance ± 10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 4 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info online). Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Compatibility Part Light color, Beam width Beam height Working distance Length Width Height Compatible TC4K number wavelength peak range (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) LTCL4K 060-G green, 520 nm TC4K060-x LTCL4K 060-W white TC4K060-x LTCL4K 090-G green, 520 nm TC4K090-x LTCL4K 090-W white TC4K090-x LTCL4K 120-G green, 520 nm TC4K120-x LTCL4K 120-W white TC4K120-x LTCL4K 180-G green, 520 nm TC4K180-x LTCL4K 180-W white TC4K180-x 115

117 LED ILLUMINATORS DOME LIGHTS LTDM series High-power strobe LED domes KEY ADVANTAGES Ultra-high power light output and strobe mode only operation For the inspection of fast moving objects and extended LED lifetime. Rugged industrial design with built-in industrial connector For easy integration into any machine vision system. Wide selection Available in three sizes, three colors and two power intensities. Compatible LTDV strobe controllers available For easy and appropriate power, control and synchronization of the illuminator. LTDM series are high power diffuse LED strobe dome illuminators designed to provide non-directional diffused light and to effectively eliminate glare and shadows. Lighting structure LTDM series provides ultra-high power light output and can be used to illuminate complex shapes with curved and shiny surfaces. LTDM dome illuminators can be exclusively operated in strobe mode, making them the perfect choice to illuminate very fast moving objects while ensuring extended LED lifetime since no heat is generated. LTDM series can be easily powered, controlled and synchronized by compatible LTDV strobe controllers and is available in: three sizes: small, medium and large, respectively with illumination area of 40 mm, 60 mm and 100 mm in diameter; two power intensities: medium power with driving current up to 7.5 A and high power with driving current up to 17 A; three different colors: white, red and green. LTDM series feature industry standard connection (M8 or M12 four poles connector) and resizable aperture that can be drilled to increase the diameter and accommodate the optics field of view. Additionally they can be easily integrated into any machine vision system by means of M6 screws. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLERS LTDV series p. 222 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series FULL RANGE OF INDUSTRIAL CAMERAS p. 92 Area scan cameras p DESIGNED FOR OEM APPLICATIONS Compatible LTDV strobe controllers available to easily power, control and synchronize LED illuminators. 116

118 Part number LTDMA1-W LTDMA1-G LTDMA1-R LTDMB2-W LTDMB2-G LTDMB2-R LTDMC1-W LTDMC2-W LTDMC2-G LTDMC2-R Optical specifications Number of LEDs Light colour white, 6000 K green, 525 nm red, 625 nm Spectral FWHM (nm) n.a n.a n.a. n.a Illumination area diameter (mm) Suggested working distance WD (mm) At driving current = 3.5 A (klux) Min estimated illumination 1 At driving current = 7.5 A At driving current = 17.0 A white, 6500K green, 528 nm red, 625 nm white white, 6500K green, 528 nm (klux) (klux) n.a. n.a. n.a n.a Aperture range (mm) 38 (fixed) 38 (fixed) 38 (fixed) Electrical specifications Power supply mode strobe only, constant current driving strobe only, constant current driving strobe only, constant current driving Min (A) Driving current Max (A) Pulse width 2 (ms) Connection Type 3 M8 industrial male connector M12 industrial male connector M12 industrial male connector Estimated MTBF 4 (hours) > > > > > > > > > > Mechanical specifications Dimensions Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Materials black anodized aluminum body black anodized aluminum body black anodized aluminum body / painted steel reflector Clamping system 4 threaded holes for M6 screw 4 holes for M6 screw 4 threaded holes for M6 screw Compatibility Strobe controllers LTDV1CH-7, LTDV6CH LTDV1CH-17, LTDV6CH Lenses TC23007, TC23009, TCLWD series, MC050X, MC033X TCLWD series, MC033X LTDV1CH-7, LTDV6CH LTDV1CH-17, LTDV6CH TCLWD series, MC4K050X-x, MC4K075X-x red, 625 nm 1 At max Working Distance WD. 2 At 25 C. At max pulse width (1 ms), max pulse frequency = 15 Hz. 3 5 m cable with straight female connector included. Optional cable with right angled connector is also available and must be ordered separately (refer to our website for further info and ordering codes). 4 At 25 C. Ordering information It s easy to select the right illuminator for your application: our part numbers are coded as LTDM xy-z, where x defines the illuminator size (A = small, B = medium, C = large), y refers to the power intensity (1 = medium, 2 = high) and z refers to color (W = white, R = red, G = green). For instance LTDM B2-R is a diffuse strobe dome illuminator - medium size high power red. 117

119 LED ILLUMINATORS DOME LIGHTS LTDMC series Continuous LED domes Lighting structure LTDMC series consists of LED dome illuminators designed to provide uniform illumination of complex surfaces. Light comes from all angles effectively eliminating glares and shadows. Suggested usage is continuous mode. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx light intensity controller p. 227 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Continuous mode Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Illumination area Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Outer Aperture Height number wavelength peak diam. voltage cons. voltage current diam. (mm) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 RT-IDS W-24V-FL white, 6300K RT-IDS R-24V-FL red, 630nm RT-IDS G-24V-FL green, 525nm RT-IDS B-24V-FL blue, 470nm RT-IDS W-24V-FL white, 6300K RT-IDS R-24V-FL red, 630nm RT-IDS G-24V-FL green, 525nm RT-IDS B-24V-FL blue, 470nm RT-IDS W-24V-FL white, 6300K RT-IDS R-24V-FL red, 630nm RT-IDS G-24V-FL green, 525nm RT-IDS B-24V-FL blue, 470nm With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 118

120 119

121 LED ILLUMINATORS RINGLIGHTS LTLA series High-power strobe LED low angle diffused ringlights KEY ADVANTAGES Ultra-high power light output and strobe mode only operation For the inspection of fast moving object and extended LED lifetime. Rugged industrial design with built-in industrial connector For easy integration into any machine vision system. Wide selection Available in two sizes, three colors and two power intensities. Compatible LTDV strobe controllers available For easy and appropriate power, control and synchronization of the illuminator. Low angle beam shaping diffuser Highly diffusive material avoids hot spots and ensures uniform light intensity. LTLA series are high power diffuse LED strobe low-angle ring light illuminators designed to provide darkfield lightning and to effectively enhance minute surface features or textures. Lighting structure LTLA series features ultra-high power light output and can be used to cast shadows that emphasize surface irregularities, scratches or special characteristics (such as bar codes) from a close distance. LTLA low angle ring illuminators can be exclusively operated in strobe mode, making them the perfect choice to illuminate very fast moving objects while ensuring extended LED lifetime since no heat is generated. LTLA series can be easily powered, controlled and synchronized by compatible LTDV strobe controllers and is available in: two sizes: medium and large, respectively with illumination area of 60 mm and 100 mm in diameter; two power intensities: medium power with driving current up to 7.5 A and high power with driving current up to 17 A; three different colors: white, red and green. LTLA series feature industry standard connection (M12 four poles connector) and can be easily integrated into any machine vision system by means of M6 screws FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLERS LTDV series p. 222 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series COMPATIBLE HOLE INSPECTION OPTICS p. 92 PCHI series p. 58 DESIGNED FOR OEM APPLICATIONS Compatible LTDV strobe controllers available to easily power, control and synchronize LED illuminators. 120

122 Part number LTLAB2-W LTLAB2-G LTLAB2-R LTLAC1-W LTLAC2-W LTLAC2-G LTLAC2-R Optical specifications Number of LEDs Light colour white, 6000 K green, 525 nm red, 625 nm white, 6500 K white, 6500 K green, 528 nm red, 625 nm Spectral FWHM (nm) n.a n.a. n.a Diffusive ring yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Illumination area diameter (mm) Suggested working distance WD (mm) Emission angle α (deg) At driving current = 3.5 A (klux) Min estimated illumination 1 At driving current = 7.5 A At driving current = 17.0 A (klux) (klux) Aperture range (mm) 64 (fixed) 64 (fixed) 64 (fixed) 102 (fixed) 102 (fixed) 102 (fixed) 102 (fixed) Electrical specifications Power supply mode strobe only, constant current driving strobe only, constant current driving Min (A) Driving current Max (A) Pulse width 2 (ms) Connection Type 3 M12 industrial male connector M12 industrial male connector Estimated MTBF 4 (hours) > > > > > > > Mechanical specifications Dimensions Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Materials black anodized aluminum body black anodized aluminum body Clamping system 4 holes for M6 screw 8 threaded holes for M6 screw Compatibility Strobe controllers Lenses LTDV1CH-17, LTDV6CH TC2300y, TC23012, TC12016, TC23016, TC12024, TC23024, TCxx036, TC2MHR016-x, TC2MHR024-x, TC2MHR036-x, TC4M004-x, TC4M007-x, TC4M009-x, TC4MHR016-x, TC4MHR024-x, TC4MHR036-x, TC16M009-x, TC16M012-x, TC16M018-x, TC16M036-x, TCLWD series, TCZR036, MCZR , MCZR , MCZR , MCZR , MC150X, MC100X, MC075X, MC050X, MC033X, MC4K050X-x, MC4K075X-x, MC4K100X-x, MC4K125X-x, MC4K150X-x, PCHI0xx LTDV1CH-7, LTDV6CH LTDV1CH-17, LTDV6CH TCxx036, TCxx048, TC12056, TC23056, TC13064, TCxx064, TC2MHR036-x, TC2MHR048-x, TC2MHR056-x, TC2MHR064-x, TC4MHR036-x, TC4MHR048-x, TC4MHR056-x, TC4MHR064-x, TC16M036-x, TC16M048-x, TC16M056-x, TC16M064-x, TC12K064, TCLW series, TC4K060-x, TCZR072, MCZR , MCZR , MCZR , MC033X, MC12K200X-x, MC12K150X-x, MC12K100X-x, MC12K067X-x, MC4K050X-x, MC4K075X-x, MC4K100X-x, MC4K125X-x, MC4K150X-x 1 At max Working Distance WD. 2 At 25 C. At max pulse width (1 ms), max pulse frequency = 15 Hz. 3 5 m cable with straight female connector included. Optional cable with right angled connector is also available and must be ordered separately (refer to our website for further info and ordering codes). 4 At 25 C. Ordering information It s easy to select the right illuminator for your application: our part numbers are coded as LTLA xy-z, where x defines the illuminator size (B = medium, C = large), y refers to the power intensity (1 = medium, 2 = high) and z refers to color (W = white, R = red, G = green). For instance LTLA B2-R is a diffuse strobe low angle ring light illuminator - medium size high power red. 121

123 LED ILLUMINATORS RINGLIGHTS LTRNST series LED ring illuminators - straight type KEY ADVANTAGES Mechanically fitting Opto Engineering optics Each lens integrates specific mechanical interfaces. Specific illumination geometry Illumination path matches Opto Engineering lenses viewing angle and numerical aperture. High performance to price ratio Cost-effective, without quality compromises. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Telecentric lenses p COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx-TB light intensity controller p. 227 LTRNST series are LED ring illuminators specifically designed for a wide range of Opto Engineering products. Especially the straight type models perfectly fit Opto Engineering telecentric lenses. Every illuminator is equipped with a mechanical interface which makes it very easy to mount it on different lens types. These products enable the optimal illumination geometry for the most common applications of their matching lens. LTRN illuminator coupled with TCZR series. Lighting structure Product overview LTRN 016 NW LTRNST - Ringlights / straight illumination LTRN 120 NW 122

124 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Compatibility Continuous mode 1 Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Optimal Lighting area Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Outer Inner Height Compatible OE products number peak WD diam. voltage cons. voltage current diam. diam. wavelength inner outer (mm) (mm) (mm) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 2 3 Straight illumination LTRN 023 RD red, 630 nm TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, MC3-03X LTRN 023 GR green, 525 nm TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, MC3-03X LTRN 023 BL blue, 470 nm TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, MC3-03X LTRN 023 NW white, 6300 K TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, MC3-03X LTRN 016 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 016 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 016 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 016 NW white, 6300 K TCxx016, TCxMHR016-x, TCSM016, TCLWD series TCxx016, TCxMHR016-x, TCSM016, TCLWD series TCxx016, TCxMHR016-x, TCSM016, TCLWD series TCxx016, TCxMHR016-x, TCSM016, TCLWD series LTRN 024 RD red, 630 nm TCxx024, TCxMHR024-x, TCSM024 LTRN 024 GR green, 525 nm TCxx024, TCxMHR024-x, TCSM024 LTRN 024 BL blue, 470 nm TCxx024, TCxMHR024-x, TCSM024 LTRN 024 NW white, 6300 K TCxx024, TCxMHR024-x, TCSM024 LTRN 032 RD red, 630 nm TCZR036 LTRN 032 GR green, 525 nm TCZR036 LTRN 032 BL blue, 470 nm TCZR036 LTRN 032 NW white, 6300 K TCZR036 LTRN 036 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 036 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 036 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 036 NW white, 6300 K LTRN 048 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 048 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 048 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 048 NW white, 6300 K LTRN 056 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 056 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 056 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 056 NW white, 6300K LTRN 064 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 064 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 064 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 064 NW white, 6300 K LTRN 080 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 080 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 080 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 080 NW white, 6300 K LTRN 096 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 096 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 096 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 096 NW white, 6300 K LTRN 120 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 120 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 120 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 120 NW white, 6300 K LTRN 144 RD red, 630 nm LTRN 144 GR green, 525 nm LTRN 144 BL blue, 470 nm LTRN 144 NW white, 6300 K TCxx036, TCxMHR036-x, TC16M036-x, TCSM036, MCZRxxx-yyy TCxx036, TCxMHR036-x, TC16M036-x, TCSM036, MCZRxxx-yyy TCxx036, TCxMHR036-x, TC16M036-x, TCSM036, MCZRxxx-yyy TCxx036, TCxMHR036-x, TC16M036-x, TCSM036, MCZRxxx-yyy TCxx048, TCCRxx048, TCxMHR048-x, TC16M048-x, TCSM048 TCxx048, TCCRxx048, TCxMHR048-x, TC16M048-x, TCSM048 TCxx048, TCCRxx048, TCxMHR048-x, TC16M048-x, TCSM048 TCxx048, TCCRxx048, TCxMHR048-x, TC16M048-x, TCSM048 TCxx056, TCCRxx056, TCxMHR056-x, TC16M056-x, TCSM056 TCxx056, TCCRxx056, TCxMHR056-x, TC16M056-x, TCSM056 TCxx056, TCCRxx056, TCxMHR056-x, TC16M056-x, TCSM056 TCxx056, TCCRxx056, TCxMHR056-x, TC16M056-x, TCSM056 TCxx064, TCCRxx064, TCxMHR064-x, TC16M064-x,TC12K064, TCSM064, TCZR072 TCxx064, TCCRxx064, TCxMHR064-x, TC16M064-x,TC12K064, TCSM064, TCZR072 TCxx064, TCCRxx064, TCxMHR064-x, TC16M064-x,TC12K064, TCSM064, TCZR072 TCxx064, TCCRxx064, TCxMHR064-x, TC16M064-x,TC12K064, TCSM064, TCZR072 TCxx080, TC23072, TCxMHR080-x, TC16M080-x, TC12K080, TCSM080 TCxx080, TCCRxx080, TC23072, TCxMHR080-x, TC16M080-x, TC12K080, TCSM080 TCxx080, TCCRxx080, TC23072, TCxMHR080-x, TC16M080-x, TC12K080, TCSM080 TCxx080, TCCRxx080, TC23072, TCxMHR080-x, TC16M080-x, TC12K080, TCSM080 TCxx096, TCCRxx096, TC23085, TCxMHR096-x, TC16M096-x, TCSM096 TCxx096, TCCRxx096, TC23085, TCxMHR096-x, TC16M096-x, TCSM096 TCxx096, TCCRxx096, TC23085, TCxMHR096-x, TC16M096-x, TCSM096 TCxx096, TCCRxx096, TC23085, TCxMHR096-x, TC16M096-x, TCSM096 TCxx120, TC23110, TCxMHR120-x, TC16M120-x, TC12K120 TCxx120, TC23110, TCxMHR120-x, TC16M120-x, TC12K120 TCxx120, TC23110, TCxMHR120-x, TC16M120-x, TC12K120 TCxx120, TC23110, TCxMHR120-x, TC16M120-x, TC12K120 TCxx144, TC23130, TCxMHR144-x, TC16M144-x, TC12K144 TCxx144, TC23130, TCxMHR144-x, C16M144-x, TC12K144 TCxx144, TC23130, TCxMHR144-x, TC16M144-x, TC12K144 TCxx144, TC23130, TCxMHR144-x, TC16M144-x, TC12K144 1 Lifespan: hours (drop to 50% intensity) at 25 C. 2 With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 3 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 123

125 LED ILLUMINATORS RINGLIGHTS LTRNOB series LED ring illuminators - oblique type KEY ADVANTAGES Mechanically fitting Opto Engineering optics Each lens integrates specific mechanical interfaces. Specific illumination geometry Illumination path matches Opto Engineering lenses viewing angle and numerical aperture. High performance to price ratio Cost-effective, without quality compromises. LTRNOB series are LED ring illuminators specifically designed for a wide range of Opto Engineering products. Especially the oblique type models perfectly fit Opto Engineering 360 view optics. Every illuminator is equipped with a mechanical interface which makes it very easy to mount it on different lens types. These products enable the optimal illumination geometry for the most common applications of their matching lens. LTRN 050 W 45 mounted on PCPW series. Lighting structure Product overview LTRN 050 W45 LTRNOB - Ringlights / oblique illumination LTRN 245 W45 124

126 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS 360 view optics p COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx-TB light intensity controller p. 227 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Compatibility Continuous mode 1 Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Optimal Lighting area Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Outer Inner Height Compatible OE products number peak WD diam. voltage cons. voltage current diam. diam. wavelength inner outer (mm) (mm) (mm) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 2 3 Oblique illumination LTRN 050 R45 red, 630 nm PCPW0xx, MCxxxX, TCCAGExx048 LTRN 050 G45 green, 525 nm PCPW0xx, MCxxxX, TCCAGExx048 LTRN 050 B45 blue, 470 nm PCPW0xx, MCxxxX, TCCAGExx048 LTRN 050 W45 white, 6300 K PCPW0xx, MCxxxX, TCCAGExx048 LTRN 075 R45 red, 630 nm TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, PCHI0xx, TCCAGExx096, MC3-03X LTRN 075 G45 green, 525 nm TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, PCHI0xx, TCCAGExx096, MC3-03X LTRN 075 B45 blue, 470 nm TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, PCHI0xx, TCCAGExx096, MC3-03X LTRN 075 W45 white, 6300 K TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, PCHI0xx, TCCAGExx096, MC3-03X LTRN 165 R45 red, 630 nm PCCD0xx LTRN 165 G45 green, 525 nm PCCD0xx LTRN 165 B45 blue, 470 nm PCCD0xx LTRN 165 W45 white, 6300 K PCCD0xx LTRN 210 R20 red, 630 nm PCxx030XS LTRN 210 G20 green, 525 nm PCxx030XS LTRN 210 B20 blue, 470 nm PCxx030XS LTRN 210 W20 white, 6300 K PCxx030XS LTRN 245 R25 red, 630 nm PCxx030HP LTRN 245 G25 green, 525 nm PCxx030HP LTRN 245 B25 blue, 470 nm PCxx030HP LTRN 245 W25 white, 6300 K PCxx030HP LTRN 245 R35 red, 630 nm PCCD0xx LTRN 245 G35 green, 525 nm PCCD0xx LTRN 245 B35 blue, 470 nm PCCD0xx LTRN 245 W35 white, 6300 K PCCD0xx LTRN 245 R45 red, 630 nm PCPW0xx LTRN 245 G45 green, 525 nm PCPW0xx LTRN 245 B45 blue, 470 nm PCPW0xx LTRN 245 W45 white, 6300 K PCPW0xx 1 Lifespan: hours (drop to 50% intensity) at 25 C. 2 With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 3 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 125

127 LED ILLUMINATORS RINGLIGHTS LTLAIC series Continuous LED low angle diffused ringlights Lighting structure 0 LTLAIC series consists of LED low angle diffused ringlights that provide diffused even illumination, effectively preventing glare when inspecting shiny surfaces. Suggested use is continuous mode. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx-TB light intensity controller p. 227 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Continuous mode Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Optimal Lighting area Emission Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Outer Inner Height number wavelength peak WD inner outer angle α voltage cons. voltage current diam. diam. diam. diam. (mm) (mm) (mm) (deg) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 RT-DLR W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-DLR R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-DLR G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-DLR B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-DLR W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-DLR R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-DLR G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-DLR B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-DLR W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-DLR R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-DLR G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-DLR B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-DLR W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-DLR R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-DLR G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-DLR B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 126

128 LED ILLUMINATORS RINGLIGHTS LTLADC series Continuous LED low angle direct ringlights Lighting structure 0 LTLADC series consists of low angle direct ringlights that provide direct side illumination to emphasize the surface features of the workpiece, such as scratches or texture. Suggested use is continuous mode. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx-TB light intensity controller p. 227 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Continuous mode Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Optimal Lighting area Emission Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Outer Inner Height number wavelength peak WD inner outer angle α voltage cons. voltage current diam. diam. diam. diam. (mm) (mm) (mm) (deg) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 RT-LLA W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LLA R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LLA G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LLA B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LLA W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LLA R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LLA G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LLA B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 127

129 LED ILLUMINATORS RINGLIGHTS LTRNDC series Continuous LED direct ringlights Lighting structure 0 LTRNDC series consists of LED direct ringlights that provide direct side illumination from different angles. These ringlights reduce shadows and can effectively illuminate non-reflective objects. Suggested use is continuous mode. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx-TB light intensity controller p. 227 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Continuous mode Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Optimal Lighting area Emission Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Outer Inner Height number wavelength peak WD inner outer angle α voltage cons. voltage current diam. diam. diam. diam. (mm) (mm) (mm) (deg) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 RT-LSW W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LSW R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LSW G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LSW B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LSW W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LSW R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LSW G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LSW B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LSW W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LSW R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LSW G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LSW B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LSW W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LSW R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LSW G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LSW B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LSW W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LSW R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LSW G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LSW B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 128

130 129

131 LED ILLUMINATORS COMBINED LIGHTS LTDMLA series High power strobe dome + low angle illumination systems KEY ADVANTAGES Two independent illumination units in one solution Dome unit for homogeneous illuminations and low angle unit for dark field lightning can be independently operated. Ultra-high power light output and strobe mode only operation For the inspection of fast moving object and extended LED lifetime. Rugged industrial design with built-in industrial connector For easy integration into any machine vision system. Multiple configurations Available in two sizes and two power intensities. Compatible LTDV strobe controllers available For easy and appropriate power, control and synchronization of the illuminator. LTDMLA series are ultra-high power diffuse LED strobe illuminators combining a dome light and a low angle ring light. Lighting structure This solution provides two different illumination types in a single, compact, easy-to-integrate system: the dome unit provides nondirectional diffused light that can be used to homogeneously illuminate complex shapes with curved and shiny surfaces, effectively eliminating glare and shadows. The low angle ring light unit provides darkfield lightning that can be used to cast shadows, greatly emphasizing surface irregularities, scratches and other details. LTDMLA illuminators operate exclusively in strobe mode: the reduced heat generation guarantees extended LED lifetime and makes LTDMLA the perfect choice to illuminate very fast moving objects. The two illumination units can be operated independently and easily powered, controlled and synchronized by compatible LTDV strobe controllers. LTDMLA series is available in: two sizes: medium and large, respectively with illumination area of 60 mm and 100 mm in diameter; two power intensities: medium power with driving current up to 7.5 A and high power with driving current up to 17 A LTDMLA series features industry standard connection (M12 four poles connector), resizable aperture for the dome unit that can be drilled to increase the diameter and accommodate the optics field of view and effective diffuser for the ring light unit to avoid hot spots formation. Additionally LTDMLA series can be easily mounted and integrated into any machine vision system by means of M6 screws. DESIGNED FOR OEM APPLICATIONS Compatible LTDV strobe controllers available to easily power, control and synchronize LED illuminators. 130

132 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLERS LTDV series p. 222 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 Part number LTDMLAB2-WW LTDMLAC1-WW LTDMLAC2-WW Optical specifications Dome unit Number of LEDs Light colour white, 6500 K white white, 6500 K Spectral FWHM (nm) n.a. n.a. n.a. Illumination area diameter (mm) Suggested working distance WD (mm) At driving current = 3.5 A (klux) Min estimated illumination 1 At driving current = 7.5 A (klux) At driving current = 17.0 A (klux) Aperture range (mm) Low angle ringlight unit Number of LEDs Light colour white, 6000 K white, 6500 K white, 6500 K Spectral FWHM (nm) n.a. n.a. n.a. Diffuse ring yes yes yes Illumination area diameter (mm) Suggested working distance WD (mm) At driving current = 3.5 A (klux) Min estimated illumination 1 At driving current = 7.5 A (klux) At driving current = 17.0 A (klux) Electrical specifications Power supply mode strobe only, constant current driving strobe only, constant current driving Min (A) Driving current Max (A) Pulse width 2 (ms) Connection Type 3 M12 industrial male connector M12 industrial male connector Estimated MTBF 4 (hours) > > > Mechanical specifications Dimensions Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Materials black anodized aluminum body black anodized aluminum body / Painted steel reflector Clamping system 4 holes for M6 screw 8 threaded holes for M6 screw Compatibility Strobe controllers LTDV1CH-17 (2 units), LTDV6CH LTDV1CH-7 (2 units), LTDV6CH LTDV1CH-17 (2 units), LTDV6CH Lenses TCLWD series MC4K050X 1 At max Working Distance WD. 2 At 25 C. At max pulse width (1 ms), max pulse frequency = 15 Hz. 3 PIN 1 and PIN 2 for the dome unit, PIN 3 and PIN 4 for the ringlight unit. 5 m cable with straight female connector included. Optional cable with right angled connector is also available and must be ordered separately (refer to our website for further info and ordering codes). 4 At 25 C. Ordering information It s easy to select the right illuminator for your application: our part numbers are coded as LTDMLA xy-ww where x defines the illuminator size (B = medium, C = large), y refers to the power intensity (1 = medium, 2 = high). For instance LTDMLA B2-WW is a diffuse strobe dome + low angle illumination system - medium size, high power, dome white, ringlight white. 131

133 LED ILLUMINATORS COMBINED LIGHTS View-through system Space saving illumination system for double-side object inspection KEY ADVANTAGES Compact space-saving solution for inspection of fast moving object Illuminates two sides of an object almost simultaneously. Ultra-high power light output and strobe mode only operation For the inspection of fast moving object and extended LED lifetime. Rugged industrial design with built-in industrial connector For easy integration with any machine vision system. Modular configuration. The View-through system is a unique space-saving illumination solution designed to illuminate two sides of an object. It consists of two symmetrical modules, each one made of two illumination units: A diffuse strobe dome illuminator (white color) A special active view-through backlight unit (white color) View-through system is designed to create very compact inline inspection solutions that illuminate and image both sides of fastmoving objects. While one camera acquires the image of one side of an object, the corresponding dome and special backlight units emit light simultaneously so that one side of the object can be inspected. Subsequently, the dome and the backlight units are turned off so that the second camera can acquire the image of the other side of the object while its corresponding dome and special backlight units are now switched on. Such innovative approach can be achieved thanks to the special backlight units which act either as transparent windows (when turned off) or as backlights (when turned on), enabling to quickly and accurately inspect fast-moving objects almost simultaneously, in a very compact solution. The View-through system can be used for many different inspections, especially for identification of surface defects/features in applications spanning from automotive to pharmaceutical. The View-through system is available as LTVTA1-W, which consists of two dome units and two active backlight view-through units (white color) or as LTVTBENCH, a complete bench solution which additionally includes a base plate with two right-angle brackets, the LTDV6CH compatible strobe controller (programmable) and the ADPT001 RS485-USB adapter. Lighting structure DESIGNED FOR OEM APPLICATIONS Compatible LTDV6CH strobe controllers available to easily power, control and synchronize the View-through system. DIL socket, bottom side. DIL socket, top side. 132

134 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE TELECENTRIC LENSES TCLWD series p. 18 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER AVAILABLE LTDV6CH p. 222 Part number LTVTA1-W LTVTBENCH Optical specifications Dome unit Number of LEDs 15 Light colour white, 6000 K Spectral FWHM (nm) n.a. Illumination area diameter (mm) 40 Suggested working distance WD (mm) 5-25 At driving current = 3.5 A (klux) 290 Min estimated illumination 1 At driving current = 7.5 A (klux) 490 Aperture range (mm) 48 (fixed) Active backlight view-through unit Number of LEDs 18 Light colour white, 6000 K Spectral FWHM (nm) n.a. Diffusive material yes Illumination area diameter (mm) 40 Suggested working distance WD (mm) n.a. Min estimated illumination 1 At driving current = 17.0 A (klux) 5 Electrical specifications Power supply mode strobe only, constant current driving Pulse width 2 (ms) 1 Connection Type 3 M8 industrial male connector Dome unit Driving current Min - Max (A) Active backlight view-through unit Driving current Min - Max (A) Estimated MTBF 4 (hours) > Mechanical specifications Length (mm) Dimensions Width (mm) Height (mm) Materials black anodized aluminum body Clamping system 4 threaded holes for M6 screw Compatibility Lenses TCLWD series Items included LTVTA1-W LTVTBENCH Description Qty Description Qty Dome unit 5 2 Dome unit 5 2 Active backlight view-through unit 5 2 Active backlight view-through unit 5 2 Base plate with two right-angle brackets 1 LTDV6CH strobe controller 1 ADPT001 adapter RS485-USB 1 1 At max Working Distance WD. 2 At 25 C. At max pulse width (1 ms), max pulse frequency = 15 Hz. 3 PIN 1 and PIN 2 for the dome unit, PIN 3 and PIN 4 for the ringlight unit. 4 At 25 C. 5 Cables included. 133

135 LED ILLUMINATORS BACKLIGHTS LTBP series High-power strobe LED backlights KEY ADVANTAGES Excellent uniformity (down to ±10 %). Ultra high-power light output and strobe mode operation For inspection and measurement of fast moving objects and an extended LED lifetime. Suitable for frequent cleaning Thanks to the optical grade and scratch resistant protective cover. Wide selection and modular design Size options range from 48 x 36 to 288 x 216 mm available in red, white, green and blue. Compact design with reduced thickness (26 mm). Special continuous alignment mode. Compatible LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller. LTBP series are high power LED backlights designed to provide exceptional illumination performance and excellent uniformity. Their special design provides both powerful and homogeneous lighting that perfectly fits confined spaces thanks to a special beam shaping diffuser, new high efficiency LEDs and reduced thickness. Lighting structure LTBP series innovative optical layout has been designed to emit directional light beams and achieve accurate results even when used in combination with telecentric lenses for measurement applications. When positioned behind the objects to be inspected, LTBP series highlight the silhouette of the objects providing excellent image contrast and high illuminance for the most demanding high speed applications (down to exposure times of tens of μs). These backlights work in strobe mode only but they also feature a special continuous mode to be used for alignment/setting purpose (when used with LTDV1CH-17V controller). Their robust and modular design featuring M8/M12 connectors and scratch resistant protective cover is conceived for demanding industrial automation environments and to provide you with a great choice of sizes, colors and aspect ratios for many diverse applications (from 4:3 to 16:9 and bar lights). Furthermore, LTBP series can be easily installed into any machine vision system thanks to the lateral M6 threads and their slick design, suitable for environments with space constrains. 26 mm 134

136 Optical specifications Available light colours red, green, blue, white Electrical specifications Power supply mode strobe only, constant current driving width yyy (mm) Pulse width 1 (ms) 1 Estimated MTBF 2 (h) > Mechanical specification Materials Black&Blue anodized Aluminum length xxx (mm) 1 At 25 C. At max pulse width (1 ms), max pulse frequency = 15 Hz. 2 At 25 C. Optical specifications Electrical specifications Mechanical specifications Part Number Lighting area dim. Max Driving Current Connection Dimensions Clamping system number 1 Modules of LEDs Length Width -R (red) -G (green) -B (blue) -W (white) type Length Width Thickness xxx yyy (mm) (mm) (A) 2 (mm) (mm) (mm) LTBP z 1 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 2 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 4 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 5 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 6 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 1 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 2 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 4 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 5 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 6 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 1 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 2 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 4 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 5 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 6 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 1 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 2 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 4 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 5 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 6 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 1 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 2 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 4 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 5 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 6 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 1 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 2 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 4 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 5 x M x M6 threaded holes LTBP z 3 6 x M x M6 threaded holes 1 The last digit of the part number (-z) refers to the color (R = red, G = green, B = blue, W = white). 2 5 m cable with straight female connector included. Optional cable with right angled connector is also available and must be ordered separately (refer to our website for further info and ordering codes). 3 Red and Green versions of these models feature 2 separate channels. Ordering information Our part numbers are coded as LTBP xxx yyy - z, where xxx defines the illumination area length (in mm), yyy defines the illumination area width (in mm) and z refers to the color (W = white, R = red, G = green, B = blue). For instance LTBP R is a high power strobe LED backlight, 48 x 36 mm lighting area, red. 135

137 LED ILLUMINATORS BACKLIGHTS LTBP series High-power strobe LED backlights FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLERS LTDV series p. 222 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE TELECENTRIC LENSES Telecentric lenses p FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES LTBP W LTBP G Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 Light colour -R (red) -G (green) -B (blue) -W (white) Wavelength Spectral FWHM Min estimated illumination (nm) (nm) (klux) LED Type A cool white, > 4500 K B cool white, > 4500 K A cool white, > 4500 K B cool white, > 4500 K A B 2 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. 1 At max driving current, on emitting surface. 2 Available upon request. Part number Module LED type LTBP z 1 x 1 A LTBP z 2 x 1 A LTBP z 3 x 1 A LTBP z 4 x 1 A LTBP z 5 x 1 A LTBP z 6 x 1 A LTBP z 1 x 2 A LTBP z 2 x 2 A LTBP z 3 x 2 A LTBP z 4 x 2 A LTBP z 5 x 2 B LTBP z 6 x 2 B LTBP z 1 x 3 A LTBP z 2 x 3 A LTBP z 3 x 3 A LTBP z 4 x 3 B LTBP z 5 x 3 B LTBP z 6 x 3 B LTBP z 1 x 4 A LTBP z 2 x 4 A LTBP z 3 x 4 B LTBP z 4 x 4 B LTBP z 5 x 4 B LTBP z 6 x 4 B LTBP z 1 x 5 A LTBP z 2 x 5 B LTBP z 3 x 5 B LTBP z 4 x 5 B LTBP z 5 x 5 B LTBP z 6 x 5 B LTBP z 1 x 6 A LTBP z 2 x 6 B LTBP z 3 x 6 B LTBP z 4 x 6 B LTBP z 5 x 6 B LTBP z 6 x 6 B Relative spectral power distribution Relative spectral power distribution Typical emission spectrum of type A LEDs (R, G, B) Wavelength (nm) Typical emission spectrum of type B LEDs (R, G, B) Wavelength (nm) 136

138 File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select Application examples Fill level of glass ampoules/vials Nut dimensional measurement Sealing/gasket dimensional measurement 137

139 LED ILLUMINATORS BACKLIGHTS LTBC series Continuous LED backlights KEY ADVANTAGES Cost-effective homogeneous illumination Densely packed LED arrays with matte diffuser eliminating hot spots and glare. Robust industrial Design M8 connector for easy connection to power supplies. Easy integration M6 nut channels for easy mounting. LTBC series are LED backlights designed to be employed in a wide variety of applications such as shape and size inspection of workpieces. These backlights are a cost-effective solution with no compromise on quality: they feature a robust design and provide diffuse even illumination without hotspots. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx light intensity controller p. 227 LTBC series backlights effectively emphasize the silhouette of a workpiece, providing excellent optical contrast in combination with many different lenses. Lighting structure Application examples Shape inspection. Detection of patterns/holes. 138

140 LTBC G LTBC with M6 threaded hole for easy mounting. Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Compatibility Part Colour, peak Lighting area Continuous mode Pulsed mode Optics number wavelength Length Width Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Length Width Height Voltage cons. Voltage Current (mm) (mm) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 LTBC W white, 6300 K LTBC G green, 525 nm TC2300y, TC23012, TCxx016, TCxx024, TCxx036, TCLWD series, TCxMHR016-x,TCxMHR024-x, TCxMHR036-x, TC4M00y-x, TC16M009-x, TC16M012-x, TC16M018-x, TC16M036-x, TCZR036, MC series, MC4K050X-x, MC4K100X-x, MC4K125X-x, MC4K150X-x, MC4K175X-x, MC4K200X-x, MC12K200X-x, MC12K150X-x, MC12K100X-x LTBC W LTBC G white, 6300 K green, 525 nm TCxx048, TCxx056, TCxx085, TCxMHR048-x, TCxMHR056-x, TCxMHR064-x, TCxMHR080-x, TC16M048-x, TC16M056-x, TC16M064-x, TC16M080-x, TCZR072, MC4K025X-x, MC12K067X-x,MC12K050X-x LTBC W white, 6300 K LTBC G green, 525 nm TCxx096, TCxx130, TCxMHR096-x,TCxMHR120-x, TC16M096-x, TC16M0120-x, TCDPxX096, TCDPxX120, MCZR , MC12K025X-x LTBC W white, 6300 K LTBC G green, 525 nm TCxx144, TC23172, TCxMHR144-x, TC16M144-x, TC16M192-x, TCDPxX144, MCZR , MCZR With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 139

141 LED ILLUMINATORS BACKLIGHTS LTBFC series Continuous flat side-emitting LED backlights Lighting structure LTBFC series consists of flat side-emitting LED backlights: two types are available either with four borders or with three borders and one side flush. Suggested use is continuous mode. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx light intensity controller p. 227 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Continuous mode Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Lighting area Sides type Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Length Width Height number wavelength peak Width Length voltage cons. voltage current (mm) (mm) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 RT-BHD W-24V-FL white, 6300 K borders RT-BHD R-24V-FL red, 630 nm borders RT-BHD G-24V-FL green, 525 nm borders RT-BHD B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm borders RT-BHD W-24V-FL white, 6300 K borders RT-BHD R-24V-FL red, 630 nm borders RT-BHD G-24V-FL green, 525 nm borders RT-BHD B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm borders RT-BHDS-25X36-1-W-24V-FL white, 6300 K borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS-25X36-1-R-24V-FL red, 630 nm borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS-25X36-1-G-24V-FL green, 525 nm borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS-25X36-1-B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS-31X58-1-W-24V-FL white, 6300 K borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS-31X58-1-R-24V-FL red, 630 nm borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS-31X58-1-G-24V-FL green, 525 nm borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS-31X58-1-B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS W-24V-FL white, 6300 K borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS R-24V-FL red, 630 nm borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS G-24V-FL green, 525 nm borders and 1 edge to edge RT-BHDS B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm borders and 1 edge to edge With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 140

142 LED ILLUMINATORS BAR LIGHTS LTBRDC series Continuous LED bar lights Lighting structure LTBRDC series LTBRDC series consists of LED bar lights that can be used in a wide variety of applications such as text reading on flat surfaces. They provide rectangular illumination on the workpiece and the installation angle can be set freely. Suggested use is continuous mode. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx light intensity controller p. 227 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Continuous mode Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Lighting area Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Length Width Height number wavelength peak Width Length voltage cons. voltage current (mm) (mm) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 RT-LBRX W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LBRX R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LBRX G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LBRX B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LBRX W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LBRX R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LBRX G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LBRX B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LBRX W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LBRX R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LBRX G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LBRX B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LBRX W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LBRX R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LBRX G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LBRX B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-LBRX W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-LBRX R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-LBRX G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-LBRX B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 141

143 LED ILLUMINATORS LINE LIGHTS LTLNC series Continuous LED line lights KEY ADVANTAGES Ultra high power. Color matched white models. Condenser lens for a perfectly focused beam of light. Rugged industrial design with built in industrial connector for easy integration into any machine vision system. Air cooling option. LTLNC series are ultra-high power LED line illuminators designed for linescan applications. Their special design provides both a powerful and homogeneous beam of light that is sharply focused onto the object that must be inspected by means of a condenser lens. LTLNC series can efficiently dissipate the generated heat thanks to the fins machined in the aluminum housing and the air cooling ports designed to inject compressed air into the illuminator. SEE ALSO FULL RANGE OF LINESCAN LENSES MC4K, MC12K series p TC4K, TC12K series p Furthermore LTLNC series features industrial M8 connectors and can be easily installed into any machine vision system thanks to the four M4 threads in the rear part of the aluminum housing. Lighting structure 142

144 Application examples Print inspection Metal film inspection Web inspection Part number LTLNC100-W LTLNC150-W Optical specifications Number of LEDs Light color white, 6500 K white, 6500 K Spectral FWHM (nm) n.a. n.a. Illumination area (mm) 100 x x 15 Suggested working distance WD (mm) Electrical specifications Continuous mode Supply voltage (V) 24 ± 2% 24 ± 2% Continuous driving current, max (ma) Power consumption (W) Connection type 1 M8 industrial male connector Estimated MTBF 2 (hours) >20000 >20000 Mechanical specifications Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) Material black anodized aluminum body Cooling method air compressed cooling or passive (attached to machine frame for better heat dissipation) Clamping system 4 threaded holes for M3 screw Compatibility Lenses TC4K060-x TC4K090-x TC4K120-x, TC12K064, TC12K080, TC12K120, TC12K144, MC4K series, MC12K200X-x, MC12K150X-x, MC12K100X-x, MC12K067X-x, MC12K050-x Cable CBLT003, CBLT m cable with straight female connector included. Optional cable with right angled connector is also available and must be ordered separately (refer to our website for further info and ordering codes). 2 Drop to 50% 25 C. 143

145 LED ILLUMINATORS TUNNEL LIGHTS LTTNC series Continuous LED tunnel lights Lighting structure LTTNC series consists of LED tunnel lights designed to provide even illumination on long cylindrical surfaces or shafts. Suggested use is continuous mode. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx light intensity controller p. 227 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Continuous mode Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Optimal Lighting area Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Width x length Aperture Height number wavelength peak WD inner Width voltage cons. voltage current diam. (mm) (mm) (mm) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 RT-IDT W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-IDT R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-IDT G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-IDT B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm RT-IDT W-24V-FL white, 6300 K RT-IDT R-24V-FL red, 630 nm RT-IDT G-24V-FL green, 525 nm RT-IDT B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 144

146 LED ILLUMINATORS COAXIAL LIGHTS LTCXC series Continuous LED coaxial lights Lighting structure LTCXC series consists of LED coaxial lights that provide coaxial illumination ideal for inspection of scratches/dents on glossy surfaces or pattern inspection on PCB to be used in combination with telecentric lenses. Light is reflected by a 45 beam splitter so that it is projected on the same axis as the camera. Suggested use is continuous mode. COMPATIBLE STROBE CONTROLLER LTDV1CH-17V strobe controller p. 222 COMPATIBLE LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROLLER RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx light intensity controller p. 227 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Continuous mode Pulsed mode Part Light colour, Lighting area Supply Current Power Supply Max pulse Length Width Height number wavelength peak Width Length voltage cons. voltage current (mm) (mm) (V) (ma) (W) (V) (ma) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 2 RT-CAS X-W-24V-FL white, 6300 K , RT-CAS X-R-24V-FL red, 630 nm , RT-CAS X-G-24V-FL green, 525 nm , RT-CAS X-B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm , RT-CAS X-W-24V-FL white, 6300 K , RT-CAS X-R-24V-FL red, 630 nm , RT-CAS X-G-24V-FL green, 525 nm , RT-CAS X-B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm , RT-CAS X-W-24V-FL white, 6300 K , RT-CAS X-R-24V-FL red, 630 nm , RT-CAS X-G-24V-FL green, 525 nm , RT-CAS X-B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm , RT-CAS X-W-24V-FL white, 6300 K , RT-CAS X-R-24V-FL red, 630 nm , RT-CAS X-G-24V-FL green, 525 nm , RT-CAS X-B-24V-FL blue, 470 nm , With constant driving voltage (36V recommended, 48V max). Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 2 With constant driving current. Duty cycle = 0-10 %. Max pulse width = 10 ms. 145

147 LED PATTERN PROJECTORS Advanced structured lighting. Opto Engineering LED pattern projectors have been designed for 3D profiling/reconstruction and for the measurement of objects with complex structures or inclined planes. They are successfully used in a variety of applications like quality control in food and packaging to check for correct volume, reverse engineering, dimensional measurement of electronic components, planarity control of products, robot guidance for pick and place and alignment applications. When compared to laser emitters, LED technology ensures more homogeneous illumination in addition to sharp edges and no speckle effect. Many 3D machine vision applications require structured light to be projected onto inclined surfaces, i.e. at a certain angle from the vertical axis. In such cases, the focus is maintained only within a small area close to the center of the field of view and the rest of the image shows relevant defocusing, thus making 3D measurement inaccurate. For this reason, our family of pattern projectors includes special projectors equipped with a highprecision tilting mechanism that allows the pattern of the light source to meet the Scheimpflug condition so that the projected light is properly and evenly focused across the entire sample surface. All Opto Engineering LED projectors feature a wide selection of interchangeable patterns. Furthermore, the size of the projection area can be easily modified by interchanging different 2/3 C-mount lenses. To achieve the best results we suggest to use bi-telecentric lenses or zero distortion macro lenses. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

148

149 LED PATTERN PROJECTORS LTPRHP3W series 3W LED pattern projectors KEY ADVANTAGES Perfectly sharp edges LTPR series ensures thinner lines, sharper edges and more homogeneous illumination than lasers. With laser emitters the illumination decays both across the line cross section and along the line width. Laser emitters lines are thicker and show blurred edges; diffraction and speckle effects are also present. LTPRHP3W series are advanced and efficient devices for pattern projection and structured light applications, such as 3D reconstruction. Unlike laser sources, which typically show poor line sharpness and power distribution as well as scattering and diffraction effects, LTPR pattern projectors overcome all of these problems by integrating LED sources and precisely engraved masks. Any kind of pattern shape can be easily supplied, integrated and projected. LIGHT SOURCE - Higher efficiency - Precise light intensity adjustment - Easy LED source replacement Different colors are available and the size of the projection area can be easily modified by interchanging different 2/3 C-mount lenses. Application examples 3D reconstruction. Mechanical alignment. Visualization & mapping. Telecentric pattern projection. 148

150 Every kind of shape can be projected Standard patterns Custom patterns Stripe 0.5 mm line thickness. Edge. Grid 0.05 mm line thickness. Line 0.5 mm line thickness. Electrical features These LED devices integrate built-in switching electronics that control the current flow through the LED and which can be easily tuned by the user. This ensures both light stability and longer lifetime of the product. The inner circuitry can be bypassed in order to directly drive the LED. Simply connect the black and blue wires to your power supply instead of the black and brown ones, ensuring that the maximum rates are not exceeded. Typical emission spectrum of white LEDs Typical emission spectrum of R,G,B LEDs Relative spectral power distribution Relative spectral power distribution Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Light Device power ratings LED power ratings Part Light color, DC Voltage Power Max LED forward Forward voltage Max pulse number wavelength peak consumption current current Minimum Maximum Typical Maximum (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) 1 2 3,4 5 LTPRHP3W-R red, 630 nm < LTPRHP3W-G green, 520 nm < LTPRHP3W-B blue, 460 nm < LTPRHP3W-W white < n.a Tolerance ± 10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. 4 Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 5 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info online). 149

151 LED PATTERN PROJECTORS LTPRHP3W series Product insight Custom-made pattern Custom-made patterns can be supplied on request. A drawing with accurate geometrical information must be submitted (please refer to the instructions here below). active area Fill-in the opaque features pattern C-mount adapter Ø = 11 mm glass substrate Ø = /-0.3 mm Keep white the light-transmitting features retaming ring thickness: min: 1 mm max: 2.5 mm 11 mm Pattern selection active area Photolithography patterns line thickness line gap Laser engraved patterns The projection pattern can be easily integrated into the LTPR projection unit by unscrewing the retaining ring that holds the pattern. This simple procedure makes it easy to interchange different patterns. The pattern outer diameter is 21 mm, while the active projection area is a circle of Ø 11 mm: all the significant features of the pattern are drawn inside this circle. The projection area will have the same aspect ratio as the pattern. The projection accuracy depends both on the pattern manufacturing accuracy and lens distortion. The edge sharpness of the projected pattern depends on both the lens resolution and the engraving technique: laser-engraved patterns (part numbers ending in L ) or photolithography-engraved patterns (part numbers ending in P ) can be chosen depending on the type of application. PT P format: line line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: line line thickness 0.5 mm Pattern specifications Photolithography patterns Substrate Soda lime grass Coating Chrome PT P format: cross line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: cross line thickness 0.5 mm Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Laser engraved patterns 2 μm 1.4 μm Substrate Borofloat glass PT P format: stripe line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT L format: stripe line gap 0.5 mm line thickness 0.5 mm line length 7.78 mm Coating Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Dichroic mirror 50 μm 50 μm FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PROJECTION OPTICS PT P format: grid line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT L format: grid line gap 0.8 mm line thickness 0.2 mm line length 7.78 mm ENHR series p. 92 FULL RANGE OF PROJECTION PATTERNS PTPR series p. 218 PT P format: edge line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: edge line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.5 mm FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE POWER SUPPLIES PS power supplies p

152 Projection lens selection The pattern drawing which has to be projected must be inscribed in a 11 mm diameter circle, the same diagonal of a 2/3 detector. For example, the pattern drawing could cover the entire 11 mm diameter area or be like a 8.8 x 6.6 mm rectangle or, again, be a square whose sides are 7.78 mm. Unless the projection optics introduces significant distortion, the shape of the projected pattern will preserve the features and aspect ratio of the engraved pattern. The projected area dimensions will be M times the original dimensions of the pattern, where M is the optical magnification of the selected projection lens. Pattern drawing and projection area Circle type 4:3 (2/3 ) type Square type P.d. (Projection distance) Projection area size Pattern active area size 11 mm D 8.8 mm 6.6 mm h 7.78 mm 7.78 mm L W L D (Projection diameter) LTPR series can integrate most types of high resolution lenses: any high resolution C-mount lens for 2/3 detectors (11 mm image diagonal) can be used, such as the ones included in our ENHR series. Telecentric lenses for 2/3 detectors can also be interfaced, thus providing telecentric projection of the pattern and enabling unparalleled performance in 3D measurement applications. C-mount lenses and telecentric optics can be connected to the unit by means of the C-mount adaptor included in the product package. Here is a list of the projection diameters and the recommended projection distances with different types of optics. Telecentric lenses TC TC TC TC TC TC P.d. (mm) D (mm) TC TC TC TC TC TC P.d. (mm) D (mm) Bi-telecentric lenses. 2 / 3 C-mount @500 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Focal D (Projection diameter) length (mm) 6 mm mm 58 (*) mm 35 (*) 58 (*) mm 41 (*) 58 (*) 92 (*) mm 55 (*) 77 (*) 99 (*) 121 (*) (*) 35 mm 68 (*) 83 (*) Standard C-mount lenses. (*) = spacers may be needed to compensate back focal length. 151

153 LED PATTERN PROJECTORS LTPRSMHP3W series 3W tilting LED pattern projectors KEY ADVANTAGES Scheimpflug tilt adjustment compatible with C-mount optics Focus is maintained even when the pattern is tilted. Light condenser focusing mechanism For excellent optical coupling and light throughput. Enhanced optical power High numerical aperture condenser lens. LTPRSMHP3W series are LED pattern projectors specifically designed for the most demanding 3D profiling and measurement applications. Triangulation techniques require that structured light is directed onto a sample at a considerable angle from vertical. Tilting the light source pattern becomes essential to ensure that the patterned light is properly focused across the entire sample surface. LTPRSMHP3W pattern projectors integrate a precision tilting mechanism based on the Scheimpflug condition. This ensures that focus is maintained across the entire part, and reconstruction of the 3d surface is as accurate as possible. Moreover, the internal focus mechanism offers the maximum optical throughput. Examples of setup and applications Configuration with zero distortion macro lenses. Configuration with bi-telecentric lenses. LTPRSM pattern projector with a standard C-mount lens. Scheimpflug telecentric optics for both projection and imaging at

154 LIGHT SOURCE - Higher efficiency - Precise light intensity adjustment - Easy LED source replacement Without tilt adjustment the pattern features are only partly focused. With the Scheimpflug adjustment focus is maintained across the entire plane. Electrical features These LED devices integrate built-in switching electronics that control the current flow through the LED and which can be easily tuned by the user. This ensures both light stability and longer lifetime of the product. The inner circuitry can be bypassed to directly drive the LED. Simply connect the black and blue wires to your power supply instead of the black and brown ones, ensuring that maximum rates are not exceeded. Typical emission spectrum of white LEDs Typical emission spectrum of R,G,B LEDs Relative spectral power distribution Relative spectral power distribution Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Light Device power ratings LED power ratings Part Light color, DC Voltage Power Max LED forward Forward voltage Max pulse number wavelength peak consumption current current Minimum Maximum Typical Maximum (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) 1 2 3, 4 5 LTPRSMHP 3W-R red, 630 nm < LTPRSMHP 3W-G green, 520 nm < LTPRSMHP 3W-B blue, 460 nm < LTPRSMHP 3W-W white < n.a Tolerance ± 10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. 4 Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 5 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info online). 153

155 LED PATTERN PROJECTORS LTPRSMHP3W series Product insight C-mount pattern retaining ring 8 mm Pattern selection active area 8 mm line thickness line gap The projection pattern placed inside the unit can be changed with ease: just remove the C-mount adaptor by loosening the set-screws and fix the pattern by securing the retaining ring. Different types of stripe and grid patterns are available; the chart shows the line thickness (0.05 mm) and the gap between neighboring lines for each pattern type. When these features are projected, they become 1/M times larger, with M being the magnification of the projection lens. The number of lines mentioned after each part number indicates the number of features on the active area of the pattern. Photolithography stripe patterns Photolithography grid patterns Pattern specifications PT P 8 lines in projection area line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT P 8 x 8 lines in projection area line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm Photolithography patterns Substrate Coating Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Soda lime glass Chrome 2 μm 1.4 μm PTST P 16 lines in projection area PTGR P 16 x 16 lines in projection area line gap 0.45 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line gap 0.45 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PTST P 32 lines in projection area PTGR P 32 x 32 lines in projection area line gap 0.20 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line gap 0.20 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PTST P 53 lines in projection area line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PTGR P 53 x 53 lines in projection area line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.05 mm FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PROJECTION OPTICS TC series p. 8 MC series p. 70 PTST P 80 lines in projection area line gap 0.05 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PTGR P 80 x 80 lines in projection area line gap 0.05 mm line thickness 0.05 mm FULL RANGE OF PROJECTION PATTERNS PTPR series p

156 Projection lens selection ϑ LTPRSMHP3W series units can be interfaced with any type of optics, but the best results are achieved with bi-telecentric lenses. The projection area is undistorted since tilting the pattern causes a linear extension along only one direction. P.d. (Projection distance) Excellent results can also be obtained with zero distortion macro lenses; here, the magnification changes along both axes, but image resolution and distortion still easily allows for 3D reconstruction. ϑ With non bi-telecentric lenses, a square pattern becomes a trapezoid in the projection plane, whose parallel sides are indicated as w and W in the drawings below. The projection area shown in the chart are also a good approximation for standard C-mount lenses used as macro lenses. h h h h W W w W Original pattern features Projection area with a bi-telecentric lens Projection area with a macro lens Projection area with bi-telecentric lenses (TC series) ϑ = 0 ϑ = 15 ϑ = 30 ϑ = 45 Part Projection Projection Pattern Projection Pattern Projection Pattern Projection Pattern number distance area tilt area tilt area tilt area tilt P.d. W x h ϑ W x h ϑ W x h ϑ W x h ϑ (mm) (mm x mm) (deg) (mm x mm) (deg) (mm x mm) (deg) (mm x mm) (deg) TC x x x x TC x x x x TC x x x x TC x x x x TC x x x x TC x x x x TC x x x x TC x x x x TC x x x x Bi-telecentric lenses. Projection area with macro (MC3-03x and MC series) and standard lenses ϑ = 0 ϑ = 15 ϑ = 30 ϑ = 45 Mag. Projection Projection Pattern Projection Pattern Projection Pattern Projection Pattern distance area tilt area tilt area tilt area tilt P.d. w (W) x h ϑ w (W) x h ϑ w (W) x h ϑ w (W) x h ϑ (x) (mm) (mm) (mm x mm) (deg) (mm) (mm x mm) (deg) (mm) (mm x mm) (deg) (mm) (mm x mm) (deg) (8.0) x (8.3) x (8.6) x (8.9) x (10.7) x (11.1) x (11.6) x (12.1) x (16.1) x (16.7) x (17.5) x (18.4) x (24.3) x (25.3) x (26.5) x (28.1) x (40.1) x (41.6) x (43.6) x (46.6) x (79.5) x (82.6) x (86.6) x (92.6) x Standard C-mount lenses. Macro lenses. 155

157 LED PATTERN PROJECTORS LTPRXP series 10W continuous LED pattern projectors KEY ADVANTAGES Superior optical throughput For illumination of large targets and fast 3D scanning, with minimal sensitivity to ambient light. Perfectly sharp edges LTPR series ensures thinner lines, sharper edges and more homogeneous illumination than lasers. With laser emitters the illumination decays both across the line cross section and along the line width. Laser emitters lines are thicker and show blurred edges; diffraction and speckle effects are also present. Easy LED source replacement. LTPRXP series extends the working range of the projector series by further increasing the LED light output, making these products the solution of choice for 3D measurement of large objects. These projectors are powerful enough to rival lasers on large work areas in high speed, online, and line scan applications. The high power can also be used in order to decrease system sensitivity to ambient light, for example, to perform 3D mapping of objects with illumination levels found in typical working environments. Examples of setup and applications 3D reconstruction. Visualization & mapping. 156

158 Every kind of shape can be projected Standard patterns Custom patterns Stripe 0.5 mm line thickness. Edge. Grid 0.05 mm line thickness. Line 0.5 mm line thickness. Electrical features These LED projectors integrate built-in switching electronics that control the current flow though the LED source. The large heat sink ensures long lifetime at the highest power rates for the LED module and driving electronics. Typical emission spectrum of white LEDs Typical emission spectrum of R,G,B LEDs Relative spectral power distribution Relative spectral power distribution Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Light Device power ratings Compatible products Part Light color, DC Voltage Power Illuminance number wavelength peak consumption (V) (W) (klux) 1 LTPRXP-R red, 630 nm 24 < ENHR series LTPRXP-G green, 520 nm 24 < ENHR series LTPRXP-B blue, 460 nm 24 < 13 9 ENHR series LTPRXP-W white 24 < ENHR series 1 With a 35 mm lens, F/# 1.4 at 100 mm working distance without projection pattern. 157

159 LED PATTERN PROJECTORS LTPRXP series Product insight Custom-made pattern Custom-made patterns can be supplied on request. A drawing with accurate geometrical information must be submitted (please refer to the instructions here below). active area Fill-in the opaque features Ø = 11 mm pattern C-mount adapter glass substrate Ø = /-0.3 mm Keep white the light-transmitting features retaining ring thickness: min: 1 mm max: 2.5 mm 11 mm Pattern selection active area Photolithography patterns line thickness line gap Laser engraved patterns The projection pattern can be easily integrated into the LTPR projection unit by unscrewing the retaining ring that holds the pattern itself. This simple procedure makes it easy to interchange different patterns on the same projection unit. The pattern outer diameter is 21 mm, while the active projection area is a circle of Ø 11 mm: all the significant features of the pattern are drawn inside this circle. The projection area will have the same aspect ratio as the pattern. The projection accuracy depends both on the pattern manufacturing accuracy and lens distortion. The edge sharpness of the projected pattern depends on both the lens resolution and the engraving technique: laser-engraved patterns (part numbers ending in L ) or photolithography-engraved patterns (part numbers ending in P ) can be chosen depending on the type of application. PT P format: line line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: line line thickness 0.5 mm Pattern specifications Photolithography patterns Substrate Soda lime grass PT P format: cross line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: cross line thickness 0.5 mm Coating Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Chrome 2 μm 1.4 μm Laser engraved patterns PT P format: stripe line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT L format: stripe line gap 0.5 mm line thickness 0.5 mm line length 7.78 mm Substrate Coating Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Borofloat glass Dichroic mirror 50 μm 50 μm PT P format: grid line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT L format: grid line gap 0.8 mm line thickness 0.2 mm line length 7.78 mm FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PROJECTION OPTICS ENHR series p. 92 PT P format: edge line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: edge line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.5 mm FULL RANGE OF PROJECTION PATTERNS PTPR series p

160 Projection lens selection The pattern drawing must be inscribed in a 11 mm diameter circle, same diagonal of a 2/3 detector. For example, the pattern drawing could cover the entire 11 mm diameter area or be shaped as a 8.8 x 6.6 mm rectangle or also a square of 7.78 mm side length. Unless the projection optics introduces significant distortion, the shape of the projected pattern will preserve the features and aspect ratio of the engraved pattern. The projected area size will be equal to 1/M, where M is the lens magnification. LTPRXP series can integrate high resolution C-mount lenses for 2/3 detectors (11 mm image diagonal), using the mount adaptor included in the product package. Here is a list of the projection diameters and the recommended projection distances with different types of optics. Pattern drawing and projection area Circle type 4:3 (2/3 ) type Square type P.d. (Projection distance) Projection area size Pattern active area size 11 mm D 8.8 mm 6.6 mm h 7.78 mm 7.78 mm L W L D (Projection diameter) 2 / 3 C-mount @500 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Focal D (Projection diameter) length (mm) 6 mm mm 58 (*) mm 35 (*) 58 (*) mm 41 (*) 58 (*) 92 (*) mm 55 (*) 77 (*) 99 (*) 121 (*) (*) 35 mm 68 (*) 83 (*) (*) = spacers may be needed to compensate back focal length. Standard C-mount lenses. 159

161 File Edit Zoom Select LED PATTERN PROJECTORS LTPRUP series 90W strobe LED pattern projectors KEY ADVANTAGES Ultra high-power light output and strobe mode only operation Low sensitivity to ambient light for the inspection of fast moving objects and an extended LED lifetime. LED technology Thinner lines, sharper edges and more even illumination than lasers. Repeatable results with dedicated strobe controllers Compatible LTDV series ensures very stable illumination intensity. Wide selection of projection patterns available Chrome-on-glass patterns with geometrical accuracy down to 2 μm. Compatible with any C-mount optics. LTPRUP series are the most powerful LED pattern projectors designed for fast image acquisition in high speed applications where camera exposure time must be set to the minimum, including planarity control of opaque products, robot guidance for fast pick and place and 3D profiling. LTPRUP projectors are strobe only and provide ultra-high intensity while ensuring extended LED lifetime and reduced heat generation. LTPRUP series are current driven and can be precisely controlled using compatible LTDV strobe controllers series. LTDV controllers are designed to drive the LED of LTPRUP pattern projectors with perfectly constant current, ensuring repeatable results even in applications where low exposure time is required. This minimizes illumination intensity variations down to ± 1%, leading to accurate and repeatable results when compared to models offered by major competitors. Additionally, rise and fall time are kept to the minimum: this ensures repeatable results specifically in applications where light intensity is controlled through time-dimming. Multiple interchangeable patterns, either stripe or grid styles, are available along with optional custom patterns. LTPRUP is easily integrated into any system thanks to its compact design, multiple threaded holes positioned in the rear part, and compatibility with CMHO016 clamping mechanics. Additionally the phase-adjustment design allows for easy pattern alignment. Application examples Planarity control of black products Robot guidance for fast pick and place Pharmaceutical blister volume vision control 160

162 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PROJECTION OPTICS ENHR series p. 92 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES Projection patterns PTPR series p. 218 Strobe controllers LTDV series p. 222 LTPRUP-x + CMHO016 clamping mechanics. Three M4 and one M6 threads for additional fixing options. Clamping mechanics CMHO016 p. 200 Typical emission spectrum of white LEDs Typical emission spectrum of R,G,B LEDs Relative spectral power distribution Relative spectral power distribution Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Part Number LTPRUP-W LTPRUP-R LTPRUP-G LTPRUP-B Optical specifications Light color White Red, 618 nm Green, 525 nm Blue, 460 nm Spectral FWHM (nm) n.a Illuminance 1 (klux) Electrical specifications Power supply mode strobe only, constant current driving Driving current, max (A) Pulse width 2 (ms) <= 1 <= 1 <= 1 <= 1 Connection Type 3 M12 industrial male connector Estimated MTBF 4 (h) > > > > Strobe peak LED source power (W) Mechanical specifications Length 5 (mm) 108,9 108,9 108,9 108,9 Width (mm) Height (mm) Materials anodized aluminum body Clamping system 3 Holes for M4 screw or 37.7 mm diameter clamp Compatibility Strobe controllers LTDV1CH-17, LTDV1CH-17V, LTDV6CH Lenses ENMP series, ENHR series, ENVF series, TC series, TCLWD series, TCHM series Cable CBLT001, CBLT002 Clamping mechanics CMHO016 Projection patterns PTPR series 1 With a 35 mm lens, F/N 1.4 at 100 mm working distance without projection pattern at driving current = 17A. Estimated value. 2 At 25 C. At max pulse width (1 ms), max pulse frequency = 15 Hz. Contact us to check other allowed combinations of duty cycle-frequency-temperature. 3 5 m cable with straight female connector included. Optional cable with right angled connector is also available and must be ordered separately (refer to our website for further info and ordering codes. 4 At 25 C. 5 Including connector. 161

163 LED PATTERN PROJECTORS LTPRUP series Product insight Custom-made pattern Custom-made patterns can be supplied on request. A drawing with accurate geometrical information must be submitted (please refer to the instructions here below). active area Fill-in the opaque features pattern C-mount adapter Ø = 11 mm glass substrate Ø = /-0.3 mm Keep white the light-transmitting features retaining ring thickness: min: 1 mm max: 2.5 mm Pattern selection 11 mm active area Photolithography patterns line thickness line gap Laser engraved patterns The projection pattern can be easily integrated into the LTPR projection unit by unscrewing the retaining ring that holds the pattern itself. This simple procedure makes it easy to interchange different patterns on the same projection unit. The pattern outer diameter is 21 mm, while the active projection area is a circle of Ø 11 mm: all the significant features of the pattern are drawn inside this circle. The projection area will have the same aspect ratio as the pattern. The projection accuracy depends both on the pattern manufacturing accuracy and lens distortion. The edge sharpness of the projected pattern depends on both the lens resolution and the engraving technique: laser-engraved patterns (part numbers ending in L ) or photolithography-engraved patterns (part numbers ending in P ) can be chosen depending on the type of application. PT P format: line line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: line line thickness 0.5 mm PT P format: cross line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: cross line thickness 0.5 mm PT P format: stripe line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT L format: stripe line gap 0.5 mm line thickness 0.5 mm line length 7.78 mm Pattern specifications Photolithography patterns PT P format: grid line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT L format: grid line gap 0.8 mm line thickness 0.2 mm line length 7.78 mm Substrate Coating Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Soda lime grass Chrome 2 μm 1.4 μm Laser engraved patterns PT P format: edge line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: edge line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.5 mm Substrate Coating Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Borofloat glass Dichroic mirror 50 μm 50 μm 162

164 Projection lens selection The pattern drawing which has to be projected must be inscribed in a 11 mm diameter circle, same diagonal of a 2/3 detector. For example, the pattern drawing could cover the entire 11 mm diameter area or be like a 8.8 x 6.6 mm rectangle or, again, be a square whose side is 7.78 mm. Unless the projection optics introduces significant distortion, the shape of the projected pattern will preserve the features and aspect ratio of the engraved pattern. The projected area dimensions will be M times the original dimensions of the pattern, where M is the optical magnification at which the selected projection lens is operating. LTPR series can integrate most types of high resolution lenses: any high resolution C-mount lens for 2/3 detectors (11 mm image diagonal) can be used such as the ones included in our ENHR series. Telecentric lenses for 2/3 detectors can also be interfaced, thus providing telecentric projection of the pattern and enabling unparalleled performance in 3D measurement applications. C-mount lenses and telecentric optics can be connected to the unit by means of the mount adaptor included in the product package. Here is a list of the projection diameters and the recommended projection distances with different types of optics. Pattern drawing and projection area Circle type 4:3 (2/3 ) type Square type P.d. (Projection distance) Projection area size Pattern active area size 11 mm D 8.8 mm 6.6 mm h 7.78 mm 7.78 mm L W L D (Projection diameter) Telecentric lenses TC TC TC TC TC TC P.d. (mm) D (mm) TC TC TC TC TC TC P.d. (mm) D (mm) LTPRUP+TC. 2 / 3 C-mount @500 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Focal D (Projection diameter) length (mm) 6 mm mm 58 (*) mm 35 (*) 58 (*) mm 41 (*) 58 (*) 92 (*) mm 55 (*) 77 (*) 99 (*) 121 (*) (*) 35 mm 68 (*) 83 (*) LTPRUP+C Mount Standard. (*) = spacers may be needed to compensate back focal length 163

165 LTPKIT LTPKIT case High power lighting kit The LTPKIT is a selection of some of the Opto Engineering high-power LED lighting solutions, including three different strobe illuminators and an ultra-bright strobe LED pattern projector. The case also includes a 6 channel strobe controller, designed to precisely control the lights and easily manage the trigger signals, in addition to a DIN rail industrial power supply. This versatile and portable light kit is ideal for system integrators dealing with machine vision applications that require high power strobe illumination. The LTPKIT also benefits from our special educational price: you should seriously consider buying one for your laboratory to discover the advantages of our strobe lights! Part number Products included Description LTLAB2-W Diffuse strobe low angle ring light illuminator - medium size high power white LTDMLAB2-W Diffuse strobe dome + low angle illumination system - medium size high power white LTBP W High power strobe LED backlight, 96 x 72 mm lighting area, white LTPKIT LTPRUP-W 90W strobe LED pattern projector white LTDV6CH Strobe controller 6 channels RT-SDR VDC DIN rail power supply ADPT001 Adapter RS485-USB + cable with 3 elements for LTDV6CH connection 164

166 165

167 Cameras

168 SMART CAMERAS AREA SCAN CAMERAS The quality of an industrial camera defines the stability and reliability of a vision system. Opto Engineering manufactures and selects high quality cameras based on its expertise in optical imaging technologies in order to provide a complete product bundle to customers. The technology of industrial cameras has greatly improved in recent years and having access to a reliable and robust high resolution camera with good quality/price ratio is very easy nowadays. With such a vast selection available on the market, choosing the RIGHT camera for an application becomes a critical decision while designing and building a vision system. By leveraging our expertise in optics, illumination and camera technology, we can assist in building a fast, reliable and cost effective system. 167

169 SMART CAMERAS Smart cameras for VIS and IR imaging. Opto Engineering expands its offering of optical imaging technologies with new families of proprietary smart cameras for VIS and IR imaging. CLOE optical cameras offer a new approach to machine vision applications. Camera, optics and image pre-processing hardware are packaged in a pre-assembled and pre-calibrated unit to deliver the best possible digital image right out of the box. The embedded image pre-processing functions greatly simplify software programming for image analysis, thus making CLOE cameras ready for use even with vision softwares and systems that have limited image correction tools. Opto Engineering smart thermal camera is designed for automatic recognition of thermal anomalies in the inspected area. It sends output signals that can be used to activate alarms and, based on the chosen configuration, to even automatically stop a malfunctioning machine. It may be used to monitor the industrial process, high value machinery and server farms, helping to prevent expensive damage and downtime and contributing to the reduction of the insurance costs. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

170

171 SMART CAMERAS CLOE-CORE series Optical cameras for 2D precision metrology KEY ADVANTAGES Perfect for precision measurement applications Camera, optics and image pre-processing hardware packaged in a pre-assembled and pre-calibrated unit. Onboard distortion correction CLOE-CORE cameras are corrected for distortion at production level, ensuring minimal distortion right out of the box. Constant magnification and FOV for every model Every optical camera model provides the same FOV, magnification and working distance. Edge recognition and pre-processing Object s edges are analyzed and pre-processed onboard according to standard calibration models. CLOE-CORE series offers a new approach to metrology applications. This optical camera contains pre-aligned imaging components and a pre-processing unit that deliver the best possible digital image, where distortion has already been corrected and the object s edges have been pre-processed to facilitate accurate edge detection. Every CLOE-CORE model is characterized by the same magnification and working distance, ensuring excellent consistency between units and making them easy to swap out. CLOE-CORE prevents camera-lens alignment issues and can be used without additional optical calibration and fine-tuning. The embedded image pre-processing functions greatly simplify software programming for image analysis, thus making CLOE-CORE cameras ready for use with vision systems that have few software calibration tools. Common measurement system integration CLOE-CORE integration TO DO LIST - Make sure the sensor or lens does not limit the system resolution - Check and adjust back flange distance - Calibrate image distortion - Write and/or apply image processing algorithms to optimally analyze the object s edges REPEAT X TIMES FOR EVERY SYSTEM TO DO LIST Ready to use! 170

172 Edge recognition and pre-processing Onboard distortion correction edge edge edge edge Pincushion distortion Keystone distortion Barrel distortion edge edge Raw image: objects with complex geometry contain different types of edge profiles. Pre-processed image: different types of edges are processed according to a standard sigmoidal edge transition profile. Corrected image Different types of edges are pre-processed by CLOE-CORE cameras according to a standard sigmoidal edge transition profile. An improved image is generated for further processing by an external measurement software. All edges can be correctly analyzed using standard algorithms, ensuring consistent measurement results. The residual distortion of a bi-telecentric lens in CLOE-CORE optical cameras is calibrated on-board coherently with the factory calibration data. CLOE-CORE cameras are corrected for distortion at production level, ensuring minimal distortion right out of the box (when imaging a certified calibrated pattern illuminated with a green diffuse backlight). Constant magnification and FOV for every unit Excellent camera to camera consistency WD Field of view WD Field of view Magnification, FOV and working distance of each particular unit are always the same, ensuring a hassle-free integration of multiple camera systems and consistent batch-to-batch measurement machines. CLOE-CORE optical cameras deliver consistent unit to unit performance, since all the components are adjusted mechanically and the possible residual variations are corrected on-board. If required, one CLOE-CORE metrology camera can be swapped out with no additional adjustment needed. 171

173 SMART CAMERAS CLOE-CORE series Optical cameras for 2D precision metrology A key factor influencing the performance of a machine vision system is the quality of the image projected onto the camera, and how well machine vision software is able to process it. This is especially critical for precision measurement applications, where even a slight variation in the optical output has a direct impact on the measurement accuracy. CLOE-CORE components have been carefully selected and engineered together to prevent typical integration issues, caused by inaccurate hardware and pitfalls in the vision system set-up. Resolution limited by detector or lens Perfectly matched lens to sensor resolution Example of a resolution limited by detector. Example of a resolution limited by lens. Example of a balanced resolution. Choosing suitable components for a precision measurement system requires a study aimed at matching camera and lens resolutions. Pixels that are too small or too large will not only influence the overall resolution of the system, but also the overall depth of field. The lens aperture and CTF should also be optimized for the camera sensor resolution, in order to avoid degraded image quality and poor system efficiency. CLOE-CORE cameras maximize optical performance thanks to the latest CMOS sensor technology and CORE bi-telecentric lenses, whose resolution is perfectly matched to the sensor pixel size. Sensor is decentered or rotated Correct sensor alignment Image sensor is decentered. Image sensor is correctly aligned. Image sensor is rotated. The accuracy in mounting a sensor impacts image quality. If the sensor is decentered or rotated, a part of the image may not be usable. However the user will notice it only after mounting the lens and taking an image. Moreover, the sensor position may vary from camera to camera, which would require extra work to verify that all cameras produce the same result. CLOE-CORE optical cameras integrate an extremely precise mechanism developed to correctly mount the sensor inside the camera assembly, thus preventing sensor rotation or decentering. This ensures that the image quality of the optical system is optimal and not affected by the last link in the chain - the sensor. 172

174 Back flange distance is not respected Correct back flange distance Lens Camera Lens Camera Lens Camera Sensor image plane Sensor image plane Sensor image plane Back flange distance > mm Back flange distance < mm Back flange distance = mm While C-mount lenses are designed with a flange-focal length of mm, many cameras do not accurately meet this industrial standard. When the back focal distance is not correct, the best focus plane of the lens will be shifted from the nominal working distance value. The bigger the difference, the more the optical performance will be affected. In order to reach the best possible lens performance, it is necessary to calculate and manually adjust the back focal distance. CLOE-CORE optical camera components are precisely aligned in production, ensuring that the back focal distance is correctly set. As a result, you can simply mount the CLOE-CORE camera in your system and put the sample at the nominal working distance to get optimal results. No further verification or adjustments is needed, making the integration of CLOE-CORE cameras extremely fast. CLOE-CORE is a pre-assembled and pre-calibrated system consisting of a camera, a bi-telecentric lens and image pre-processing hardware, all bundled together. Optimal alignment of the imaging components along with pre-processing hardware delivers an optimized digital image, calibrated to eliminate distortion and pre-processed to facilitate accurate edge detection. This optimized digital image can be conveniently analyzed by any imaging algorithm, providing consistent measurement results. Isolated power supply for reliable operation in industrial environment. Embedded powerful FPGAs and dedicated parallel processing hardware ensures the best performance. CORE series bi-telecentric lens. Internal thermal management system. High performance CMOS sensor. Preset detector holder and back flange distance adjustment system. USB 3.0 interface. Hirose 12 pin I/O connector. Compatible illumination CLOE-CORE metrology cameras are calibrated for use with green diffuse backlight illumination, positioned at a specific working distance from the object. This type of illumination allows the system to achieve consistent results with the widest variety of objects. Also, green is the most suitable wavelength to enhance the optical quality of the integrated bi-telecentric lens. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Green backlight LTBC series p. 138 CBUSB3001 Passive USB 3.0 cable CBGPIO001 I/O cable, HIROSE 12 pin p. 228 RT-SDR VDC DIN rail power supply p. 226 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Part FOV Resolution WD DOF µm/pixel Residual error Interface DC Voltage Power I/O Width Length Height number ratio Max (SD) consumption connector (mm x mm) (h x v) (mm) (mm) (µm) (µm) (V) (W) (mm) (mm) (mm) CLCR x x < 3.8 (0.7) USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLCR x x < 4.4 (0.8) USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLCR x x < 5.0 (0.9) USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLCR x x < 6.3 (1.1) USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLCR x x < 7.4 (1.3) USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin Number of pixels of the pre-processed image (horizontal and vertical). 2 Measured from the mechanical housing of the lens to the surface of the object. 3 At the borders of the field depth the image can be still used for measurement but, to get a perfectly sharp image, only half of the nominal field depth should be considered. Pixel size used for calculation is 3.45 μm. 4 Size of a pixel projected in the object space. 5 Residual error after automatic on-board distortion and magnification correction. Maximum values and standard deviations are listed. 6 Standard industrial circular connector, for I/O and power connections. All product specifications and data are subject to change without notice to improve reliability, functionality, design or other. Check our website for the most up-to-date information. 173

175 SMART CAMERAS CLOE-360 OUT series Optical cameras for 360 pericentric imaging KEY ADVANTAGES The perfect device for pericentric imaging Camera, optics and image pre-processing hardware bundled in a single pre-assembled and pre-calibrated unit. 360 top and side inspection with just one camera No need for multiple cameras around and over the object. Automatic image unwrapping Embedded software instantly performs automatic image unwrapping. Off-axis distortion correction CLOE-360 OUT corrects off-axis distortion also when samples are slightly off-centered. Constant FOV for every model Every camera model can image objects within a specific range of diameters and heights, with excellent consistency between units. This makes them easy to swap out or to integrate in multiple production lines. CLOE-360 OUT is a family of optical cameras designed for 360 outer surface inspection. The image of the object produced by the optical camera is an unwrapped representation of the top and side walls of the object. Image unwrapping is instantly performed by the camera s preprocessing firmware on the basis of factory calibration data, which determines the most suitable type of image transformation. The camera s pre-processing firmware incorporates the optical model of the lens and determines how the light rays in 3D space are mapped onto the 2D image. This allows the camera to unwrap the object s image even if the object is slightly off-centered. The embedded image pre-processing functions greatly simplify software programming for image analysis, thus making CLOE- 360 OUT cameras ready for use even with vision softwares and systems that have limited image correction tools. Raw image: object is well centered under the lens. Raw image: object is slightly decentered under the lens. WD Height Height Diameter WD Diameter Height Height Diameter Diameter Unwrapped image: a single continuous image of the top and lateral surfaces of the object is automatically generated. The optical camera s firmware automatically corrects distortion and unwraps the image even when the object is slightly off-centered. The lateral and top surfaces of the objects are captured within the same image. 174

176 TRADITIONAL VISION SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE CAMERAS VISION SYSTEM WITH A CLOE-360 OUT OPTICAL CAMERA Since the position of the surface defect is unknown, a traditional machine vision system usually requires up to 5 cameras (4 on the side and 1 on top) to inspect cylindrical objects. Each camera may require a dedicated illumination set. The multi-camera system produces 5 separate images for each object. A complex synchronization and alignment of the cameras is required, along with intensive data processing. NUMBER OF MV COMPONENTS EMPLOYED COMPLEXITY OF IMAGE PROCESSING CLOE-360 OUT produces a single complete 360 image thus the defects or features of interest will always be visible regardless of their location. A single illumination set is usually sufficient. CLOE-360 OUT produces a unwrapped continuous image of the top and lateral surfaces of the object in a single camera shot, which is easy to process with common machine vision software. Every camera and lighting set has to be individually adjusted, making the set-up procedure very time-consuming. DIFFICULTY LEVEL OF INTEGRATION Easy setup and configuration of just one camera-lighting set makes the integration job fast and hassle-free. With several production lines the same configuration and time efforts are multiplied by the number of vision stations to be installed. REPEATEABILITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY Every model images objects within a specific range of diameters and heights with excellent consistency between units, making them easy to swap out or to be integrated into multiple production lines. Compatible illumination CLOE-360 OUT optical cameras for pericentric imaging are calibrated to be used with a diffused ringlight illumination. This type of illumination allows the system to achieve consistent results with the widest variety of objects. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS LTRN210W20 p. 124 CBUSB3001 Passive USB 3.0 cable CBGPIO001 I/O cable, HIROSE 12 pin p. 228 CMHO080 p. 200 RT-SDR VDC DIN rail power supply p. 226 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Part FOV F/# Resolution Resolution WD Interface DC Voltage Power I/O Width Length Height number (raw image) (unwrapped image) consumption connector (diam. x height) (h x v) (h x v) (mm) (V) (W) (mm) (mm) (mm) CLT x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLT x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLT x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLT x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLT x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin Each part number of CLOE-360 OUT includes the FOV of the object that can be inspected : CLT-[D]-[H]. For example CLT stands for = CLOE-360 OUT, D=15 mm, H=15 mm 2 FOV is given as diameter and height of the outer surface of a convex cylindrical object imaged in focus. 3 Number of pixels of the raw unprocessed image (horizontal and vertical). 4 Number of pixels of the processed unwrapped image (horizontal and vertica). 5 Measured from the mechanical housing of the lens to the top surface of the object. 6 Standard industrial circular connector, for I/O and power connections. All product specifications and data are subject to change without notice to improve reliability, functionality, design or other. Check our website for the most up-to-date information. 175

177 SMART CAMERAS CLOE-360 IN series Optical cameras for 360 inner surface inspection KEY ADVANTAGES The perfect device for inner surface inspection Camera, optics and image pre-processing hardware bundled in a single pre-assembled and pre-calibrated unit. Inner surfaces imaged in perfect focus in a single image No need to rotate the part or to use multi-camera systems to perform your inspection. Embedded firmware delivers automatic image unwrapping The undistorted image makes additional software processing easy. Distortion correction of slightly off-centered images Slight variations in the object s position are compensated by CLOE-360 IN pre-processing algorithms. Constant FOV for every model Every camera model is pre-set for a specific range of diameters and heights, allowing for quick and easy integration with consistent results. CLOE-360 IN is a family of optical cameras designed for 360 inner inspection of concave objects. The optical camera automatically produces an unwrapped and perfectly focused image of the inside of an object with a single image. CLOE-360 IN optical cameras make the inspection of concave parts quick and easy compared to traditional methods, such as rotating and line scanning the object or using multi-camera systems. Factory calibration data, including information about the lens design and light path, are stored in the camera in order to determine the most suitable type of tranformation fo each image. Although the object s position on the conveyer belt may not always be accurate, CLOE-360 IN cameras are programmed to successfully pre-process the image of an object even when it is slightly offcentered. The pre-processed image can be further analyzed with any type of vision software, making CLOE-360 IN cameras ready for use even with vision softwares and systems that have limited image correction tools. Raw image: bottle cap is well centered under the lens. Raw image: bottle cap is slightly decentered under the lens. Height Height Diameter Height WD Diameter Diameter Height WD Diameter Unwrapped image: a single continuous image of the side walls and bottom of the object is automatically generated. CLOE-360 IN camera is programmed to pre-process and generate unwrapped images of both centered and slightly decentered objects. The inner and bottom surfaces of the part are imaged in focus within the same image. 176

178 TRADITIONAL VISION SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE CAMERAS VISION SYSTEM WITH CLOE-360 IN OPTICAL CAMERA Vision inspection of side walls and bottom of the object is typically performed using 4 cameras: 1 top and 3 side cameras positioned at an inclined angle. Each camera may require a dedicated illumination set. The multi-camera system produces 4 separate images for each object. In case of small objects, side images may present defocusing. A complex synchronization and alignment the cameras is required, along with intensive data processing. QUANTITY OF VISION COMPONENTS COMPLEXITY OF SOFTWARE PROCESSING CLOE-360 IN automatically produces an «unwrapped» image of inner walls and bottom of the object in perfect focus in a single image. This setup usually requires a single llumination set. CLOE-360 IN produces a unwrapped continuous image of the bottom and lateral surfaces of the object, which is easy to process with common machine vision software. Set-up proceduce is time consuming since every camera and lighting set required individual adjustment. INTEGRATION DIFFICULTY LEVEL Just one camera-lighting set has to be integrated, making the job fast and easy. With multiple production lines the same configuration and time efforts are multiplied by the number of vision stations to be installed. REPEATEABILITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY Thanks to excellent consistency between CLOE-360 IN units, they are easy to swap out or to be integrated into multiple production lines. Compatible illumination CLOE-360 IN optical cameras for concave objects are calibrated to be used with diffuse circular illumination. This type of illumination allows the system to achieve consistent results with the widest variety of objects. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS LTRN075W45 p. 124 LTLAB2-W p. 120 CBUSB3001 Passive USB 3.0 cable CBGPIO001 I/O cable, HIROSE 12 pin p. 228 RT-SDR VDC DIN rail power supply p. 226 Optical specifications Electrical specifications Dimensions Part FOV wf/# Resolution Resolution WD Interface DC Voltage Power I/O Width Length Height number (raw image) (unwrapped image) consumption connector (diam. x height) (h x v) (h x v) (mm) (V) (W) (mm) (mm) (mm) CLN x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLN x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLN x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLN x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin CLN x x x USB < 40 Hirose 12 pin For each part number of CLOE-360 IN includes the FOV of the object that can be inspected : CLN-[D]-[H]. For example CLN stands for = CLOE-360 IN, D=30 mm, H=40 mm 2 FOV is given as diameter and height of the inner surface of a concave cylindrical object imaged in focus. 3 Number of pixels of a raw unprocessed image (horizontal and vertical). 4 Number of pixels of the processed unwrapped image (horizontal and vertical). 5 Measured from the mechanical housing of the lens to the top surface of the object. 6 Standard industrial circular connector, for I/O and power connections. All product specifications and data are subject to change without notice to improve reliability, functionality, design or other. Check our website for the most up-to-date information. 177

179 SMART CAMERAS ymir Smart uncooled LWIR camera AVANT-PREMIÈRE KEY ADVANTAGES Real time smart thermal image analysis and action. Motion detection on IR wavelength. Totally configurable. Easy integration. Wide range of available optics. ymir is designed for automatic recognition of thermal anomalies in the observed scene. The camera can register the thermal scene under normal conditions and then start monitoring. During the monitoring phase, when an object in the thermal scene starts to have an abnormal heating situation, the camera can react by sending output signals, thus activating alarms or stopping the machine based the chosen configuration. It can also record videos and take pictures based on the configuration. ymir can be used in a wide variety of applications, including IT systems surveillance, predictive maintenance, flame detection, monitoring of high value machines and server farms, in order to prevent high cost damage and downtime or detect intrusions. Camera specifications Resolution 384 x 288 pixels Frame rate 9-30 Hz Detector pitch 17 µm Minimum in focus distance 20x Focal length Focal Plane Array (FPA) Uncooled a-si Microbolometer Spectral Range 8-14 µm Detector time constant Typical 10 ms Accuracy ± 5 C o ± 5% of reading Size (without lenses) 114 mm x 87 mm x 52 mm Inputs 2 Outputs 4 Connection Ethernet Thanks to the plug and play design, the camera operates live by just connecting the power and ethernet cables. At any moment, it is possible to view the streaming video coming from the camera. The user interface of this smart LWIR camera is all-graphic and intuitive, thus shortening system integration time. The configuration of ymir can be exported and imported from one camera to another, which can accelerate large system integration. Wide range of lens systems are available to fit your application need. 178

180 Application examples Thermal analysis of PCBs. Identification of overheat in automated work processes. Man and car DRI (detection/recognition/identification) distance Optical specifications Man (1.8 x 0.5) Car (1.8 x 4.0) Focal length Focus type FOV ( ) Detection Recognition Identification Detection Recognition Identification (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) 8 mm Fixed 44.3 x mm Manual 36.1 x mm Manual 24.5 x mm Manual 10.6 x mm Manual (electric optional) 7.40 x mm Manual (electric optional) 4.90 x Other type of lenses will be available on request. 179

181 AREA SCAN CAMERAS High quality image cameras with smart features. Area scan cameras are the most commonly used cameras in machine vision. They are ideal for fast inspection applications. With many years of experience in the machine vision industry, Opto Engineering selected a series of high performance cameras to answer your needs. Thanks to the improvement of camera technologies in the recent years, various types of cameras are now available in the market to answer different challenges. Following our principles, we have selected robust, compact, high image quality cameras for industrial applications including measurement, high-speed inspection, security and much more. The right camera features can make your vision system smarter, simpler and more efficient. REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

182 AREA SCAN CAMERAS mvbluefox3-2 series USB3 Vision camera with Sony Pregius CMOS sensors KEY ADVANTAGES High quality sensors New SONY Pregius CMOS Global shutter sensors provide high quality images. Frame Rate up to 164 Hz High frame rate ideal for high speed applications. 256 MB RAM Internal memory up to 256 MB guarantees no image loss. Large FPGA on board Reduces CPU load and allows more features to be added. Full GenICam compliance User friendly GenICam compliant SDK package provides more flexibility to Vision Systems. mvbluefox3-2 series includes USB3 Vision cameras equipped with the latest SONY Pregius Global Shutter CMOS Sensors, which deliver high resolution, high frame rate, low noise and excellent Price / Quality Ratio. Opto Engineering selected a set of cameras that are tailored for industrial applications, based on high image quality, compactness, robustness and ease of use. Large RAM and FPGA on board provide quick and reliable image data processing without overloading your CPU, also giving you the opportunity to easily implement custom features. Extra features like Burst Mode, Counter/Timers, and Color Processing can simplify your multi-function vision system configuration in a snap! The fully GenICam compliant mvimpact SDK allows the vision system to be more flexible. Complete documentation of the SDK gives you access to many special camera features that could simplify your vision system development. The driver of the mvbluefox3-w cameras is supported by a wide range of third-party software packages, e.g. Halcon, Matlab, Labview, etc. Sensor specifications Camera specifications Sensor details Compatibility Part Sensor size Resolution Mpixel Pixel size Frame rate Interface Shutter type Sensor name Sensor type Compatible product series number pixel µm Hz 3 RT-mvBF3-2032aG RT-mvBF3-2032G 1/1.8" 1/1.8" 2064 x x / USB 3.0 USB 3.0 Global Shutter Global Shutter IMX265 IMX252 CMOS CMOS TC, TCCR, TCSM, TCLWD, TCCX, TCCXQ, TCZR, TCBENCH, TCCRBENCH, TCEDGEVIS, PC, RT-mvBF3-2051aG 2/3" 2464 x USB 3.0 Global Shutter IMX264 CMOS PCCD, PCHI, PCBP, PCPW, PCMP, TCCAGE, MC, MC3-03X, MCSM, RT-mvBF3-2051G 2/3" 2464 x / 75 2 USB 3.0 Global Shutter IMX250 CMOS MCZR, MZMT12X, ENMT, ENMP, ENHR, ENVF RT-mvBF3-2024aG 1/1.2" 1936 x USB 3.0 Global Shutter IMX249 CMOS RT-mvBF3-2024G 1/1.2" 1936 x / USB 3.0 Global Shutter IMX174 CMOS RT-mvBF3-2089aG x USB 3.0 Global Shutter IMX267 CMOS RT-mvBF3-2089G 1 1" 4112 x / 42 2 USB 3.0 Global Shutter IMX255 CMOS RT-mvBF3-2124aG x USB 3.0 Global Shutter IMX304 CMOS TC2MHR, TC4MHR, TCCR2M, TCCR4M, TCDP Plus, TCCX2M, MZMT5X, EN2M, ENUV2M, EN4K RT-mvBF3-2124G 1 1.1" 4112 x / 30 2 USB 3.0 Global Shutter IMX253 CMOS 1 Available in Q1/ Burst mode / streaming. Burst mode buffers the acquired images and decouples the acqusition from the image output. That way, you can use the sensor s maximum frame rate independently of the available bandwidth. 3 EMVA1288 measurement data of gray scale version. Ordering information All cameras are available in monochrome or color version at no extra cost. IR cut filter integrated by default. Other filters can be integrated on request at no extra cost. I/O port available on request. Cameras are available in OEM board version. 181

183 AREA SCAN CAMERAS mvbluefox3-2 series USB3 Vision camera with Sony Pregius CMOS sensors Suitable filters for your lighting situation or environmental condition. Choose between daylight cut (Cold Mirror), IR cut (Hot Mirror) or glass (without filter). Large camera FPGA reduces CPU load of your host system. Extra FPGA space allows more features and modifications to be implemented. Custom features can also be supplied. For counting and triggering events, counters are a handy feature for many applications. The counter allows you to generate variable output signals, control illumination systems, synchronize multiple cameras, and a lot more. With the internal image memory, no image will be lost again. The internal memory buffers images and enables useful features like Record / Playback, Pre-trigger as well as sequence recordings. Mechanical specifications Dimension (mm) 39.8 x 39.8 x 37.7 Weight (g) 94 Mount C Electrical specifications Interface USB 3.0 (5 GB/s) USB 3.0 Micro-B, lockable Connectors Hirose Type 12 Pin, lockable (optional) RAM 256 MB 2 inputs (opto-isolated) 3-24V +/-1V I/O interface (optional) 4 outputs (opto-isolated) up to 24V, 7mA Power consumption (W) < 4.5 Operating temperature ( C) 0 to 45 Operating humidity (%RH) 30 to 80 Storage temperature ( C) -20 to 60 Storage humidity (%RH) 20 to 90 SPECIAL FEATURES - Burst mode - On board color processing - Additional information via data stream - Sequence recording using parameter sets - Event notifications FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CBUSB3001 CBGPIO001 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 228 p

184 AREA SCAN CAMERAS mvbluecougar series GigE & Dual GigE Vision cameras mvbluecougar series includes Gigabit Ethernet cameras, compliant to the GigE Vision and GenICam image processing standards. The latest building blocks are used in one of the smallest, yet rock solid housing in the industry. These cameras are optimized for machine vision applications, relying on high frame rates combined with low latency image transport. Also, the images can be precisely optimized for viewing applications in the life science and medical industries, where it is required to have the utmost realistic images in terms of gray scale shades and color fidelity, combined with optimum sensitivity and signal-to-noise ratio, are required. Opto Engineering selected a number of cameras that are tailored for industrial applications, based on high image quality, compactness, robustness and ease of use. A large FPGA and extra RAM on board provide quick and reliable image data processing without overloading your CPU, also giving you the opportunity to easily implement custom features. Extra features like Burst Mode, Counter/Timers and Color Processing can simplify your vision system configuration. KEY ADVANTAGES High quality sensors available New SONY Pregius CMOS Global shutter sensors are available for GigE vision cameras. High speed performance up to 164 Hz High frame rate ideal for high speed inspection. RAM up to 256 MB Internal memory guarantees no image loss. Large FPGA on board Reduces CPU load and allows more features to be added. GenICam fully compliance User friendly GenICam compliant SDK package provides more flexibility to Vision System. The fully GenICam compliant SDK package, mvimpact SDK, allows the vision system to be more flexible. Complete documentation of the SDK gives you access to many special camera features that can simplify your life when developing your vision system development. The driver of mvbluecougar is supported by a wide range of third-party softwares, e.g. Halcon, COGNEX, Matlab, Labview etc. 183

185 AREA SCAN CAMERAS mvbluecougar series GigE & Dual GigE Vision cameras Suitable filters for your lighting situation or environmental condition. Choose between daylight cut (Cold Mirror), IR cut (Hot Mirror) or glass (without filter). Large camera FPGA reduces CPU load of your host system. Extra FPGA space allows more features and modifications to be implemented. Custom features can also be supplied. For counting and triggering events, counters are a handy feature for many applications. The counter allows you to generate variable output signals, control illumination systems, synchronize multiple cameras, and a lot more. With the internal image memory, no image will be lost again. The internal memory buffers images and enables useful features like Record / Playback, Pre-trigger as well as sequence recordings. Sensor specifications Camera specifications Sensor details Compatibility Part Sensor size Resolution Mpixel Pixel size Frame rate Interface Shutter type Sensor name Sensor type Compatible product series number pixel µm Hz 3 RT-mvBC-X120aG 1/3" 640 x GigE Global Shutter ICX424AL/AQ CCD RT-mvBC-X122G 1/3" 1280 x GigE Global Shutter ICX445AL/AQ CCD RT-mvBC-X102eG 1/1.8" 1280 x Hz GigE Pipelined / Global EV76C560 CMOS RT-mvBC-X104eG 1/1.8" 1600 x GigE Pipelined / Global EV76C570 CMOS RT-mvBC-X104iG 1/1.8" 2064 x / 37 2 GigE Global Shutter IMX265 CMOS RT-mvBC-XD104hG 1/1.8" 2064 x / 75 2 Dual GigE Global Shutter IMX252 CMOS RT-mvBC-X125aG 2/3" 2448 x GigE Global Shutter ICX655AL/AQ CCD RT-mvBC-X225G 2/3" 2448 x GigE Global Shutter ICX625AL/AQ CCD RT-mvBC-X105bG 2/3" 2464 x / GigE Global Shutter IMX264 CMOS RT-mvBC-XD105aG 2/3" 2464 x / 46 2 Dual GigE Global Shutter IMX250 CMOS RT-mvBC-X104fG 1/1.2" 1936 x GigE Global Shutter IMX249 CMOS RT-mvBC-XD104dG 1/1.2" 1936 x / Dual GigE Global Shutter IMX174 CMOS RT-mvBC-XD129aG 1" 3384 x Dual GigE Global Shutter ICX815ALG CCD RT-mvBC-X109b x / GigE Global Shutter IMX267 CMOS RT-mvBC-XD109b 1 1" 4112 x / Dual GigE Global Shutter IMX267 CMOS RT-mvBC-X1012b x / GigE Global Shutter IMX304 CMOS RT-mvBC-XD1012b 1 1.1" 4112 x / Dual GigE Global Shutter IMX304 CMOS 1 Available in Q1/ Burst mode / streaming. Burst mode buffers the acquired images and decouples the acquisition from the image output. That way you can use the sensor s maximum frame rate independently of the available bandwidth. 3 EMVA1288 measurement data of gray scale version are available. TC, TCCR, TCSM, TCLWD, TCCX, TCCXQ, TCZR, TCBENCH, TCCRBENCH, TCEDGEVIS, PC, PCCD, PCHI, PCBP, PCPW, PCMP, TCCAGE, MC, MC3-03X, MCSM, MCZR, MZMT12X, ENMT, ENMP, ENHR, ENVF TC2MHR, TC4MHR, TCCR2M, TCCR4M, TCDP Plus, TCCX2M, MZMT5X, EN2M, ENUV2M, EN4K Ordering information All cameras are available in Monochrome or Color Version at no extra cost. IR cut filter integrated by default. Other filters can be integrated on request at no extra cost. Cameras are available in OEM board version. Most cameras are also available in GigE POE version. Extended Temperature range -40 C to +65 C optional. Industrial connection concept (POE-I) is supported. PLC inputs available. WiFi function optional. 184

186 SPECIAL FEATURES MORE FEATURES AVAILABLE FOR MVBLUECOUGAR-XD CAMERAS - Electronic mirror functionality: horizontal / vertical (available for CMOS sensor) - Internal readable temperature sensor with programmable alarm threshold - Enhanced color and I/O functionality - Frame Average - Binning - Pre-trigger recording - Trigger Overlap - Burst mode - Storable user configurations (5 config.) and user parameters (512 bytes on EEPROM) FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ACCESSORIES CBETH003 CBGPIO001 p. 228 RT-MV-DC1201-BCSXIO-REV2 p. 228 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 Mechanical specifications mvbluecougar-x series mvbluecougar-xd series Dimension (mm) 39.8 x 39.8 x x 50 x 32 Weight (g) Adjustable C-mount Adjustable C-mount Lens Mount CS-mount (optional) CS-mount (optional) S-mount (optional) Electronical specifications mvbluecougar-x series mvbluecougar-xd series Interface Gigabit Ethernet Dual Gigabit Ethernet RAM 64 MB 256 MB Connectors RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet, lockable 2x RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet, lockable Hirose type 12-pin, lockabe 2x Hirose type 12-pin, lockable I/O interface 2 inputs (opto-isolated) 3-24V +/-1V 4 inputs (opto-isolated) 3-24V +/-1V 4 outputs (high-side) 10-24V, 700 ma 4 outputs (high-side) 10-24V, 700 ma POE (optional) / POE-I (optional) Power Supply (VDC) Power comsumption (W) < 5.5 < 8.5 Operating temperature ( C) 0 to 45 0 to 45 Operating humidity (%RH) 30 to to 80 Storage temperature ( C) -20 to to 60 C Storage humidity (%RH) 20 to to

187 Software Software is a fundamental tool to design, build and operate a vision system. During the initial design process, software can support mechanical modeling and simulate the expected behavior of optics and lighting, allowing you to identify potential flaws in the system at an early development stage. In the installation phase, software verifies that all imaging components work smoothly together, also enabling perfect sync with other parts of the system such as conveyers, robotic arms and motion devices. Lastly, software is essential to correct, process and analyze images, ensuring that the output of the vision system satisfies the inspection requirements. Opto Engineering products are the foundational elements of any vision systems and software is the final piece of the puzzle, making all parts of the system work together cohesively, reliably and efficiently

188 COMPETENCE SOFTWARE LIBRARY

189 COMPETENCE Machine vision software competence Software skills of the Opto Engineering group for machine vision product design KEY ADVANTAGES Multiple software competencies in one group Extensive know how in imaging components and vision system design for manufacturability. Innovator s mindset Out of the box mentality to create and offer groundbreaking technologies and solutions. Simple works better User friendly products that require little or no effort to install and use. Nowadays, a wide range of design activities are done or supported by task-specific software. Mechanical engineers use CAD software, optical designers use optical modeling software and so do many other engineers with different specialties. When talking about software in the machine vision industry, the first thought goes to image processing software. However, solving machine vision applications requires multiple software competencies as well as skilled professionals capable of developing products and solutions with the aid of dedicated software tools. From optical and mechanical design to FPGA or driver programming, going through image processing libraries and GUI development, rarely has a single organization had all these competencies internally. GUI development Computer vision Optical design INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS Image processing Mechanical design Embedded system programming Our software competencies for machine vision product design are: Optical Design: we are able to design and optimize many types of lenses for industrial use, with accurate manufacturing tolerance analysis and specific test protocols. Mechanical Design: we can do to the full mechanical design of any machine vision component such as optics, illuminators, cameras, and even of complete vision systems. Embedded system programming: our team can program different types of FPGAs and microcontrollers and develop specific firmware and drivers for custom electronic boards. Image Processing: we are competent in traditional image processing techniques and we utilize the most current computer science/mathematical technologies to highlight the features of interest in an image. Computer Vision: we can develop algorithms to train a machine to understand what it sees through one or more cameras, converting features extracted from an image into output information - I.e. the compliance of a product. GUI Development: we are able to develop standalone graphic interfaces, web-based programs and entire HMI packages for machine vision systems. 188

190 OUR PRODUCTS INCLUDES: A vision system is a computer based system that can see and provide analytical feedback on what it sees. To be able to do that, it requires the most various types of software. Opto Engineering ALBERT is a self-learning machine that learns the characteristics of a product directly from the production line and autonomously determines its quality for sorting purposes. This advanced system was developed thanks to our group s multidisciplinary expertise in optomechanical design, embedded system programming, artificial intelligence, computer vision, image processing and GUI development. GUI development Computer vision Optical design Mechanical design VISION SYSTEMS Embedded system programming Image processing The design of a motorized optical system needs to consider the harsh industrial environment where the product may be deployed as well as customers expectations for long service life. Many zoom lenses on the market integrate motion mechanisms that fail prematurely or end up being inaccurate after a number of cycles. Optical design In order to make robust and repeatable zoom systems with easy to use functions, we gathered our experts in optical modeling, mechanical design, driver development. The result is our TCZR, MCZR, MZMT5X, MZMT12X, ENMT motorized zoom lens series which guarantee very stable, flexible and precise performance. Embedded system programming MOTION Mechanical design CLOE, the advanced camera-lens system designed by Opto Engineering, focuses not only on the performance of the camera but, most important, on the performance of the cameralens assembly as a whole product. With smart features and self correction functions on board, no adjustments are needed after plugging in the camera-lens system. Optical design Mechanical design Conceiving and realizing this idea required extensive know-how in opto-mechanical design, FPGA programming as well as image processing and image calibration tools. CAMERA DEVELOPMENT Image processing Embedded system programming The list of software we use and we are proficient in includes: 189

191 Improving is a never-ending process and a continuous path towards excellence 190

192 191

193 SOFTWARE Vision system designer Software for planning and evaluation of vision system applications KEY ADVANTAGES Digital engineering Perfect for early planning, creating proposals and system documentation. Virtual machine vision laboratory Experiment with virtual components from the catalog. Overcome limitations with demo unit availability. Work with models of large and expensive lenses. Machine vision system documentation Ideal for creating reports and easy to understand 3D system previews with annotations and relevant dimensions. Performance analysis Visualize and optimize key system performance parameters. Increase your design accuracy and reduce project risk. The Vision system designer software is a user friendly virtual imaging laboratory for modeling machine vision applications in a 3D framework. Users can select imaging components from a catalog or model sensors, lenses and lights. The software can simulate sensor images and is designed for early and accurate project planning, evaluation, optimization, verification and for documenting and presenting imaging applications. Modeling brings design ideas to life where hardware costs and required time prevent a fast test. Early modeling and planning reduces project risk and saves valuable time when creating proposals and documentation. The simulation helps identifying suitable imaging components and balancing conflicting requirements. Automatic performance analysis increases planning accuracy for each system configuration. The 3D visualizations and system reports can be used to communicate designs choices and to convince customers to buy in! Additional service for modeling required components is available. Service and training Support installation and verification Design and plan projects VISION SYSTEM DESIGNER SOFTWARE Performance analysis and optimization Machine vision project life cycle. Create and present proposals System requirements Software platform Windows XP, Vista and 7, 8, 10 Graphic card Medium graphic card with 1GB RAM is recommended Memory Dependencies Language Recommended is 1 GB disk space and at least 6 GB RAM.Net 3.5, DirectX 9.0c (DirectX is included in the Vision system designer software installation) English 192

194 DON T RISK TO LOSE MACHINE VISION PROJECTS BECAUSE: - it is difficult to conceptualize and plan out your solution - creating a better proposal takes too much time - you don t explore a potentially better design because you are missing a sensor, lens or light in the lab - your customer is not confident about the vision system but needs to make a quick buy decision - validation is difficult because access to the target hardware is restricted - there is not enough time to prepare detailed documentation and do a thorough performance analysis. No time to bring your idea to life? Worried to spend too much time and money on the proposal? No laboratory to test and evaluate system performance? Missing vision components cause delay in the evaluation? In just 4 steps, you can build and test your system and convince your customer! MODEL A MACHINE VISION SYSTEM IN 4 STEPS Reduce planning uncertainties, identify suitable components and visualize your solutions. 1 - Specify and model the inspection application Import a 3D model of your target object and the relevant data about the working environment. Select diffuse and specular surface reflectance properties of your object. Then specify requirements for the inspection task. 2 - Select imaging components Start with a default sensor configuration or, select cameras, lenses and lights for the requested application. Place machine vision components in the 3D scene and activate the camera to view images. 3 - Optimize parameters Based on simulated images and system performance analysis provided by the software, you can adjust and optimize parameters such as working distance, view angles, focus, aperture, integration time, lighting level in order to find the best set up, balancing conflicting requirements for your application. 4 - Documentation and evaluation After defining the system configuration, Vision system designer software provides the opportunity to select view points for creating the system documentation. A PDF report includes 3D views, a list of vision components used, the simulated image acquired by the camera, system performance characteristics and component parameters. 193

195 SOFTWARE Vision system designer Software for planning and evaluation of vision system applications Virtual 3D imaging laboratory Many different machine vision components are available in the Vision system designer. Generic cameras and optics are also available to support building and evaluating the system set up. The Vision system designer provides access to expensive or special vision components so that users can build applications even when limited resources prevent a fast test. Up to 6 vision components (camera, lenses, illuminators) can be modeled for your projects on request for free. ADVANTAGES - a virtual vision laboratory allows you to run experiments anywhere - demonstrate system to get customer buy in - Increase planning accuracy - quickly identify inadequate system configurations - use image simulation and motion - do a thorough system performance analysis - resolve spatial integration conflicts at an early design stage A wide range of lenses, lights and cameras is accessible for system planning. Simulate image sequences: Use 3D dimensions and annotations to visualize the imaging geometry. 194

196 Project documentation Document your vision system design with 3D views and detailed PDF report. The PDF report includes: What setup was used The fundamental imaging parameters Relevant dimensions and annotations The simulated image System performance characteristics List of parts and parameters ADVANTAGES - create comprehensive project documentation with a few mouse clicks - document and compare alternative configurations in a short time - present your proposal professionally - demonstrate systems to get customers to buy in Application examples Dimensional measurement Specify and plan dimensional measurement applications and predict measurement errors. B Example: Evaluate dimensional measurement errors at WD ADVANTAGES - identify the required lens type, camera configuration and lighting for your application A A - Normal lenses B - Telecentric lens TC12024 Error in (mm) Measurement error breakdown Normal lens - predict dimensional measurement errors and compare alternative design configurations - plan your system with expensive or large telecentric lens models from the catalog - document your designs and create PDF reports A: % error at WD Maximum = μm B: % error at WD Maximum = μm Error in (mm) Calibration Edge direction Object shift Object tilt Image shift Telecentric lens TC12024 Image tilt Axis tilt Distortion Error sources 195

197 SOFTWARE Vision system designer Software for planning and evaluation of vision system applications Quality inspection Ideal for system integration when a CAD model of the target machine is available. ADVANTAGES - generic vision components help to identify the required lens, camera and lighting to fulfill the application requirements - simulation images can predict whether the defect can be detected - try and compare alternative designs to optimized system capacity - optimize space conflicts in restricted work cells Laser triangulation sensor (LTS) Plan and simulate your next laser triangulation application with the Vision system designer software. Evaluate the feasibility of using a 3D line scanner and identify the optimal sensor requirements. Create simulated depth images Modify the sensor geometry and sensor parameters in the simulation Identify sensitivity, measurement range and self occlusion Verify the sensor placement using CAD models from the host machine ADVANTAGES - identify the required LTS sensor configuration - create simulated depth images without hardware Increase your design and planning accuracy - reduce risk early by identifying sensor performance from the simulation - spend less time preparing proposals - document and share your designs 196

198 LIBRARY CVTOOLS Software library for machine vision KEY ADVANTAGES Specific calibration tools for telecentric measurement systems. Correction of residual lens distortion. Fast subpixel edge detection and labelling. Image processing for 360 lens images and 3D applications. CVTOOLS is a C++ computer vision library designed for metrology, special 360 inspection and 3D applications. It provides many functionalities to: Calibrate optical system Retrieve object position Perform accurate measurements Telecentric lens calibration The distortion of Telecentric Lenses is usually very low, but can still cause measurement errors. CVTOOLS implements algorithms for extremely accurate calibration of the system by minimizing residual distortion, thus making the most demanding applications possible. 360 lens image processing A new library for 360 lens image processing is also available. It offers some basic functions to define the ROI and warp images for Polyview lens systems. The library is optimized with internally computed look-up tables. 3D lens image processing CVTOOLS includes software tools to calibrate and use a 3D profilometer system based on a light plane (such as a laser or a LED projector - i.e. the LTPRHP3W line pattern projector). Application examples Fixed focal length lens calibration CVTOOLS provides the tools to calibrate a fixed-focal length lens based system, in order to compensate for aberrations and correct measurement and image data. A working plane can also be calibrated in order to get undistorted and warped images of it. Image processing The software library has some very useful images processing functions: Edge detection with sub-pixel precision, essential for highaccuracy measurement applications. Sub-pixel precision chessboard corner location and detection functions, for calibration purposes. Morphological operations in order to preprocess noisy images. Labeling of connected components, for image blob analysis. These functions have been optimized, so that their execution is remarkably fast. Measurement In CVTOOLS you can find functions for Robust fitting of geometrical models (lines, circles, ellipses). Matrix operations Model intersections These functions provide the necessary tools for reliable measurement. Pattern matching The software library contains several pattern matching tools, such as edge-based pattern matching and grayscale pattern matching, designed for ease of use. The pattern matching library can learn the model geometry and recognize the model position in the following images. Basic Function Advance Functions CVIP CVTC CVPH CVPM CVMETRIC CV360 CV3D Basic image processing functions, such as image filtering, morphological operations, edge detection, blob analysis, image transformations, etc. Telecentric calibration and diagnostic functions. Fixed-focal length lens calibration functions. Working plane calibration functions. Pattern-matching functions, including edge-based and gray levels. Functions for fitting of geometrical models (lines, circles, ellipses) on edges, model intersections, etc. Functions for polyview and micro-polyview image rectification. Functions for calibration of light plane + camera systems (es. laser profilometers) and 3d points computation. Ordering information The software package can be personalized based on your needs. Multiple functions can be ordered. The CVIP basic function is included in all packages. i.e. When ordering the CVTC module, the CVIP module is also included. 197

199 Accessories REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels. 198

200 MOUNTING MECHANICS 200 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES 204 PATTERNS 217 CONTROLLERS & POWER SUPPLIES 222 CABLES & ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 228 Although accessories are often considered optional, they are in fact essential in many applications to efficiently use a product or even to enhance its performance. Opto Engineering extensive range of accessories has been designed and selected to ensure hassle-free and quick integration of our imaging components into your vision system. Our accessories perfectly complement our product range and have been specifically tested in combination with our products to maximize performance. Our selection includes mounting mechanics, filters, protective windows, first surface mirrors and beam splitters, calibration patterns, projection patterns, in addition to strobe controllers and stepper motor controllers. Please check our website to view the entire range and get the most updated information

201 MOUNTING MECHANICS CMHO series Clamping mechanics The accurate alignment of optical components is crucial to the accuracy of a measurement system. In addition to the stability of the optical components, the system mechanical design must ensure that the optical axis is orthonormal to the measurement plane. For this purpose Opto Engineering supplies CMHO series clamping mechanics, compatible with our telecentric lenses and collimated illuminators. Three-point mounting grants very precise and stable alignment of the optical components, also making the assembly process quick and simple. Assembling a TC lens on a CMHO clamping support 200

202 Compatibility Mechanical specifications Part Optics and robotics CMPT Length Width Height Optical axis number plates height (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) CMHO 023 TC2300y, TC23012, TC4M00y-x, LTCLHP023-x CMHO 016 TCxx016, TCxMHR016-x, LTCLHP016-x, LTPRUP-x, TCLWD series CMHO 024 TCxx024, TCxMHR024-x, LTCLHP024-x CMHO 036 TCxx036, TCxMHR036-x, TC16M036-x, LTCLHP036-x CMHO 048 TCxx048, TCxMHR048-x, TC16M048-x, LTCLHP048-x CMHO 056 TCxx056, TCxMHR056-x, TC16M056-x, LTCLHP056-x CMHO 064 TCxx064, TCxMHR064-x, TC16M064-x, LTCLHP064-x CMHO 080 TC23072, TCxx080, TCxMHR080-x, TC16M080-x, LTCLHP080-x, PCxx030XS CMHO 096 TC23085, TCxx096, TCxMHR096-x, TC16M096-x, LTCLHP096-x CMHO 120 TC23110, TCxx120, TCxMHR120-x, TC16M120-x, LTCLHP120-x CMHO 144 TC23130, TCxx144, TCxMHR144-x, TC16M144-x, LTCLHP144-x CMHO 192 TC23172, TCxx192, TCxMHR192-x, TC16M192-x, TC12K192, LTCLHP192-x CMHO 240 TC23200, TC23240, TCxMHR240-x, TC16M240-x, LTCLHP240-x, TC12K TC12K CMHO TC12K 064 TC12K CMHO TC12K 080 TC12K TC16M CMHO TC16M 009 TC16M009-x CMHO TC16M 012 TC16M012-x CMHO TC16M 018 TC16M018-x MC12K CMHO MC12K 025 MC12K CMHO MC12K 067 MC12K CMHO MC12K 200 MC12K TCZR CMHO TCZR TCZR036, TCZR PCCD CMHO PCCD PCCDxxx Robotics CMHO RBCR 048 TCCRxx048, TCCRxM048-x, LTCLCR048-x

203 MOUNTING MECHANICS CMPT series Mounting plates CMPT plates are mechanical components designed to build optical benches for measurement applications. Most Opto Engineering telecentric lenses and illuminators can be mounted on these plates using CMHO clamping mechanics. For very accurate measurement applications, calibration patterns can be precisely mounted in front of the lens with the CMPH pattern holders, enabling perfect calibration of the optical system. Compatibility Mechanical specifications Part Clamping mechanics Pattern holders Length Width Thickness Weight number CMHO CMPH (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) CMPT CMPT , CMPT CMPT CMPT CMPT CMPT CMPT CMPH series Pattern holders Software calibration is accurate if pattern placement is accurate too. To achieve that, Opto Engineering offers specific CMPH pattern holders to easily and precisely mount each calibration pattern on its holding mechanics. The pattern is assembled on a frame held by three magnets: this floating system allows pattern phase adjustment and proper centering. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE CALIBRATION PATTERNS PTTC series p. 217 Compatibility Mechanical specifications Part Patterns Width Height Thickness Weight number PTTC (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) CMPH , CMPH CMPH

204 MOUNTING MECHANICS CMHOCR series CORE series clamping mechanics CMHOCR series are special mounting clamps for CORE telecentric lenses and illuminators. CMHOCR mounting clamps have been designed to give even more flexibility to the integration of CORE lenses and illuminators. Compatibility Mechanical specifications Part Opto Engineering optics Compatible Depth Width Height Optical axis Weight number Illuminator height (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) CMHOCR 048 TCCR12048, TCCR23048, TCCR2M048-x, TCCR4M048-x, LTCLCR048-x LTRN048-x CMHOCR 056 TCCR12056, TCCR23056, TCCR2M056-x, TCCR4M056-x, LTCLCR056-x LTRN056-x CMHOCR 064 TCCR12064, TCCR23064, TCCR2M064-x, TCCR4M064-x, LTCLCR064-x LTRN064-x CMHOCR 080 TCCR12080, TCCR23080, TCCR2M080-x, TCCR4M080-x, LTCLCR080-x LTRN080-x CMHOCR 096 TCCR12096, TCCR23096, TCCR2M096-x, TCCR4M096-x, LTCLCR096-x LTRN096-x CMPTCR series CORE series mounting plates CMPTCR series are mechanical components designed for CORE Series telecentric lenses and illuminators. The specific design allows the user to precisely mount CORE series telecentric lenses and illuminators directly onto the plates without mounting clamps. Compatible products Mechanical specifications Part Clamping mechanics Length Width Thickness Weight number CMHO (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) CMPTCR 048 TCCR12048, TCCR23048, TCCR2M048-x, TCCR4M048-x, LTCLCR048-x CMPTCR 056 TCCR12056, TCCR23056, TCCR2M056-x, TCCR4M056-x, LTCLCR056-x CMPTCR 064 TCCR12064, TCCR23064, TCCR2M064-x, TCCR4M064-x, LTCLCR064-x CMPTCR 080 TCCR12080, TCCR23080, TCCR2M080-x, TCCR4M080-x, LTCLCR080-x CMPTCR 096 TCCR12096, TCCR23096, TCCR2M096-x, TCCR4M096-x, LTCLCR096-x

205 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES CMBS series 45 beam splitter KEY ADVANTAGES Ready to use and easy to setup. Ideal to create coaxial illumination solutions. 50% transmission and 50% reflection. Easy and secure clamping system. Compatible with telecentric lenses and illuminators. CMBS series is a collection of 50/50 plate beam splitter modules designed to create highly efficient coaxial illumination solutions with Opto Engineering telecentric lenses and collimated illuminators. This particular configuration allows for almost perfect coaxial illumination of shiny or matte surfaces, with no stray light or hot spots. CMBS series is designed for 45 angle of incidence in the nm waveband: one surface is beam-splitter coated while the other side features anti-reflective VIS coating. With the CMBS series, building the perfect coaxial illumination telecentric setup is extremely easy: simply mount the telecentric lens and the collimated illuminator into the appropriate ports, then rotate the knobs to tighten the compression rings and secure the lenses. Compatible protective windows are also available. Coaxial illumination is especially useful to illuminate plain reflective objects and effectively highlight flaws or dents, which appear in the image as dark features. Whenever you are looking for a precise and easy way to setup a coaxial illumination solution, CMBS series is the ideal choice. d CMBS object distances (d) in mm Compatible products TC series TCLWD series TC2MHR-4MHR series TC16M series TC12K series xxx CMBS CMBS CMBS CMBS CMBS CMBS

206 Product combinations examples TC CMBS LTCLHP 036-G. TC2MHR 036-F + CMBS LTCLHP 036-G. SETUP Refer to the mechanical layouts available online to check compatibility with CMHO and other mount systems. TCLWD CMBS LTCLHP 016-G. Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Compatible products Part Coating Coating Deviation Clamping Clamping Length Width Height Telecentric lenses Telecentric number (front) (back) angle diameter system illuminators CMBS 016 CMBS 036 CMBS 048 CMBS 056 CMBS 064 CMBS VIS Coating: Beam splitter 45 VIS Coating: Beam splitter 45 VIS Coating: Beam splitter 45 VIS Coating: Beam splitter 45 VIS Coating: Beam splitter 45 VIS Coating: Beam splitter 45 AR Vis Coating: normal reflectance <0.5% bandwidth AR Vis Coating: normal reflectance <0.5% bandwidth AR Vis Coating: normal reflectance <0.5% bandwidth AR Vis Coating: normal reflectance <0.5% bandwidth AR Vis Coating: normal reflectance <0.5% bandwidth AR Vis Coating: normal reflectance <0.5% bandwidth (deg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) lockring TCLWD series LTCLHP016-x lockring lockring lockring lockring lockring TCxx036, TC2MHR036-x, TC4MHR036-x, TC16M036-x TCxx048, TC2MHR048-x, TC4MHR048-x, TC16M048-x TCxx056, TC2MHR056-x, TC4MHR056-x, TC16M056-x TCxx064, TC2MHR064-x, TC4MHR064-x, TC16M064-x, TC12K064 TC23072, TCxx080, TC2MHR080-x, TC4MHR080-x, TC16080-x, TC12K080 LTCLHP036-x LTCLHP048-x LTCLHP056-x LTCLHP064-x LTCLHP080-x 1 Tolerance +/- 5% 2 Bandwidth: nm. 205

207 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES CMMR series 45 first surface mirrors KEY ADVANTAGES Reflect light at 90. Ideal for limited spaces. Easy and secure clamping system. Compatible with telecentric lenses and illuminators. Optional protective windows available. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Protective windows WI series p. 210 Production environments often present size constraints, limiting the choice of optics and causing the user to trade optical performance for size. CMMR series is the Opto Engineering answer to tight space integration issues, opening new installation options for your application. CMMR series is a family of first surface mirrors designed for our telecentric lenses and illuminators which enable the lens to image the sample at 90 with respect to the optical axis. These right-angle mirrors can also be used together with collimated illuminators, reflecting incident rays coming from the light source at 90 angle. CMMR series features a precise locking knob that allows for easy and secure clamping. In addition, compatible protective windows are available. Whenever overall system dimension and precision alignment are critical factors for your application, CMMR series is the ideal choice. d d CMMR first surface mirror combined with a telecentric lens. CMMR first surface mirror combined with a telecentric illuminator. CMMR object distances (d) in mm* Compatible products TC series TC2MHR-4MHR series TC16M series TC12K series xx CMMR CMMR CMMR CMMR CMMR CMMR (*) When placing WI0xx protective windows in front of CMMR 45 mirrors, working distance increases of approximately one third of the window thickness (t) WD new WD lens + t/3. 206

208 SETUP Refer to the mechanical layouts available online to check compatibility with CMHO and other mount systems. Application example LTCLHP080-x + CMMR080 and TC CMMR080 imaging a screw in a collimated setup. Product combination examples CMMR080 combined with TC23080 CMMR056 combined with LTCLHP056-G Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Compatible products Optional accessories Part Coating Deviation Clamping Clamping Length Width Height Weight Telecentric lenses Telecentric Protective number angle diameter system illuminators windows CMMR 036 CMMR 048 CMMR 056 CMMR 064 CMMR 080 (deg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) 1 2 Aluminum reflective coating Aluminum reflective coating Aluminum reflective coating Aluminum reflective coating Aluminum reflective coating lockring lockring lockring lockring lockring TCxx036, TC2MHR036-x, TC4MHR036-x, TC16M036-x TCxx048, TC2MHR048-x, TC4MHR048-x, TC16M048-x TCxx056, TC2MHR056-x, TC4MHR056-x, TC16M056-x TCxx064, TC2MHR064-x, TC4MHR064-x, TC16M064-x, TC12K064 TC23072, TCxx080, TC2MHR080-x, TC4MHR080-x, TC16M080-x, TC12K080 LTCLHP036-x WI 036 LTCLHP048-x WI 048 LTCLHP056-x WI 056 LTCLHP064-x WI 064 LTCLHP080-x WI Normal reflectance > 98% - bandwidth: nm. 2 To be ordered separately. 207

209 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES CMMR series CMMR4K models CMMR4K-L CMMR4K-V CMMR4K are 45 first surface mirrors that produce a right angle bend of the light path. CMMR4K are available in two versions: -V and -L, respectively bending the light rays vertically (either upwards or downwards) or laterally (either to the left or the right). Additionally, the design of the CMMR4K series allows the user to flexibly adjust the distance between the mirror and the front end of TC4K/LTCL4K optics. Refer to the schematics for further details. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE IMAGING TELECENTRIC LENSES TC4K series p. 46 FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE ILLUMINATORS LTCL4K series p. 114 Application examples A LTCL4K illuminator coupled to a TC4K lens with CMMR4K deflecting mirrors to scan samples on a glass surface. Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Compatible products Part Coating Deviation Clamping Length Width Height Weight Telecentric Telecentric number angle system lenses illuminators (deg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) 1 2 CMMR4K 060-V Aluminum reflective coating 90 mounting screws TC4K060-x LTCL4K060-x CMMR4K 060-L Aluminum reflective coating 90 mounting screws TC4K060-x LTCL4K060-x CMMR4K 090-V Aluminum reflective coating 90 mounting screws TC4K090-x LTCL4K090-x CMMR4K 090-L Aluminum reflective coating 90 mounting screws TC4K090-x LTCL4K090-x CMMR4K 120-V Aluminum reflective coating 90 mounting screws TC4K120-x LTCL4K120-x CMMR4K 120-L Aluminum reflective coating 90 mounting screws TC4K120-x LTCL4K120-x CMMR4K 180-V Aluminum reflective coating 90 mounting screws TC4K180-x LTCL4K180-x CMMR4K 180-L Aluminum reflective coating 90 mounting screws TC4K180-x LTCL4K180-x 1 -V stands for Vertical bend, -L stands for Lateral bend. See drawings for details about deviation axis orientation. 2 Normal reflectance > 98% - bandwidth: nm. 208

210 CMMR4K-V schematics CMMR4K-V bends the light rays vertically. CMMR4K-L schematics CMMR4K-L bends the light rays laterally. UPWARD BEND LEFT BEND clamping side Configuration with CMMR4K at maximum extension. Configuration with CMMR4K at maximum extension. Configuration with CMMR4K at minimum extension. 133 mm extension range clamping side Configuration with CMMR4K at minimum extension. 28 mm extension range DOWNWARD BEND RIGHT BEND clamping side Configuration with CMMR4K at maximum extension. Configuration with CMMR4K at minimum extension. Configuration with CMMR4K at minimum extension. clamping side Configuration with CMMR4K at maximum extension. 209

211 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES WI series Protective windows KEY ADVANTAGES Protection from dust / debris or other hazardous particles. No change in optical magnification. Compatible with telecentric lenses, LTCLHP illuminators and CMMR mirrors. WI series is a range of optical windows designed to protect telecentric lenses and collimated illuminators. Material spatter and other hazards such as dust or debris might in fact damage the lens or degrade the optical performance. These plano-plano windows effectively shield telecentric lenses from the outside environment, preserving the quality of your imaging system without changing the optical magnification. WI series is also compatible with CMMR mirrors, preserving their delicate optical surfaces from dust or other hazardous particles. Each window is complemented by its own CMWF holder which features a precise locking knob that allows for easy and secure clamping. CMWF holders are required to mount WI protective windows in front of telecentric lenses and must be ordered separately. Product combination examples WI080 + CMWF080 + TC WI056 + CMWF056 + LTCLHP056-G. 210

212 WI windows Optical specifications Mechanical specifications Compatible products Part number Transmittance band Substrate Diameter Thickness Telecentric lenses Telecentric CMMR (nm) (mm) (mm) illuminators 1 1 WI N-BK TCxx036, TC2MHR036-x, TC4MHR036-x, TC16M036-x LTCLHP036-x CMMR036 WI N-BK TCxx048, TC2MHR048-x, TC4MHR048-x, TC16M048-x LTCLHP048-x CMMR048 WI N-BK TCxx056, TC2MHR056-x, TC4MHR056-x, TC16M056-x LTCLHP056-x CMMR056 WI N-BK TCxx064, TC2MHR064-x; TC4MHR064-x, TC16M064-x LTCLHP064-x CMMR064 WI N-BK TC23072, TCxx080; TC2MHR080-x, TC4MHR080-x, TC16M080-x LTCLHP080-x CMMR080 WI N-BK TC23085, TCxx096, TC2MHR096-x, TC4MHR096-x, TC16M096-x LTCLHP096-x CMMR096 1 CMWF0xx mounting mechanics required. When WI0xx is placed in front of a lens, its working distance increases of approximately 1 / 3 of the window thickness. CMWF holders Technical details Optical spec Mechanical specifications Compatibility Part number Description Active area Clamping Height Weight WI series diameter diameter (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) CMWF 036 Holder for WI series, clamping diameter = 61 mm WI036 CMWF 048 Holder for WI series, clamping diameter = 75 mm WI048 CMWF 056 Holder for WI series, clamping diameter = 80 mm WI056 CMWF 064 Holder for WI series, clamping diameter = 100 mm WI064 CMWF 080 Holder for WI series, clamping diameter = 116 mm WI080 CMWF 096 Holder for WI series, clamping diameter = 143 mm WI096 Ordering information When ordering, include the following two items: - WIxxx protective window - CMWFxxx holder For example, if you need a protective window for a TC12036 telecentric lens, you have to order both the following items: - WI036 protective window - CMWF036 holder The CMWF holder is not required when interfacing WI windows with CMMR. 211

213 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES Optical filters Filters for telecentric lenses and fixed focal lenses Light filtering is a typical need in machine vision applications. Together with LED illuminators, filters can improve image contrast by blocking unwanted light and increase the accuracy and repeatability of the vision system. Ambient light is very frequently causing errors in imaging systems due to unwanted reflections off the surface of the parts being measured. In these cases, a band pass or long pass filter that matches the emission wavelength of the illuminator is usually integrated in front of the imaging lens: this way, only the light coming from the illuminator is collected while the rest of the spectrum is cut out. Furthermore, many machine vision applications require monochrome illumination in order to enhance or suppress particular object features: under these conditions, only the features with a certain color are imaged and inspected. KEY ADVANTAGES High and precise transmission. Wide range selection. Available for fixed focal lenses and telecentric lenses. Increase resolution. Block unwanted light. Tolerate high temperature environment. Application examples PCB Inspection: The layout of the printed circuit would be difficult to distinguish without the filter. A high transmission green band pass filter increases contrast and improves system accuracy. FTBP525 Green filter 212

214 FULL RANGE OF FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Megapixel and 5 Megapixel lenses ENMP and ENHR series p. 92 Band pass filters for fixed focal lenses Part number Description Useful wavelength range FWHM Peak transmission Tolerence Compatible LED wavelength (nm) (nm) (nm) (nm) 1 FTBP470 Blue (470 nm) band pass filter > 90% +/ , 465, 470 FTBP525 Green (525 nm) band pass filter > 90% +/ , 525, 530 FTBP635 Red (635 nm) band pass filter > 90% +/ , 635 FTBP660 Red (660 nm) band pass filter > 90% +/ , 670 FTBP830 IR (830 nm) band pass filter > 90% +/ FWHM: Full width at half maximum. Short pass filters and long pass filters for fixed focal lenses Part number Description Useful wavelength range Peak transmission Tolerence (nm) (nm) FTSP450 Dark blue (450 nm) short pass filter > 90% +/- 10 FTSP500 Blue (500 nm) short pass filter > 90% +/- 10 FTSP570 Cyan (570 nm) shortpass filter > 90% +/- 10 FTSP700 UV + NIR cut off filter > 90% +/- 10 FTLP510 Yellow (510 nm) longpass filter > 90% +/- 10 FTLP550 Orange (550 nm) longpass filter > 90% +/- 10 FTLP590 Orange (590 nm) longpass filter > 90% +/- 10 FTLP640 Red (640 nm) longpass filter > 90% +/- 10 Filter thread compatible to fixed focal lenses Mount name Description Diameter Aperture (mm) (MM) C25.4 C-mount industrial camera M27 Filter thread M27 x P M30.5 Filter thread M30.5 x P M35.5 Filter thread M35.5 x P M43 Filter thread M43 x P M52 Filter thread M52 x P Ordering information When ordering a filter for a C-mount fixed focal lens, the part number must include the filter name and the mount name. For example: if you need a green filter for a lens with M27 x P 0.5 filter thread, the part number would be FTBP525M27: - FTBP525 - Green (525 nm) bandpass interference filter - M27 - Filter thread M27 x P Customized products are available 213

215 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES Optical filters Filters for telecentric lenses and fixed focal lenses Band pass filters for telecentric lenses (filter mount included) * Part number Description Useful wavelength range FWHM Peak transmission Tolerence Matching LED wavelength Matching products (nm) (nm) (nm) (nm) OE Telecentric lenses 1 FTBP470TC FTBP525TC FTBP635TC Blue (470 nm) band pass filter for TC lenses Green (525 nm) band pass filter for TC lenses Red (635 nm) band pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/ , 465, > 90% +/ , 525, > 90% +/ , 635 TC 12yyy, TCCR 12yyy, TCCR 23yyy FTBP660TC Red (660 nm) band pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/ , 670 TC 23yyy 2 FTBP830TC FTBP850TC FTBP880TC IR (830 nm) band pass filter for TC lenses IR (850 nm) band pass filter for TC lenses IR (880 nm) band pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/ > 90% +/ , > 90% +/ TC2MHRyyy-C, TC4MHRyyy-C, 3 TCCR2Myyy-C, TCCR4Myyy-C 1 FWHM: Full width at half maximum. 2 Except TC , TC , TC , TC Some vignetting may occur, depending on sensor size. * Filters for TC lens without TC filter mount can be ordered separately on request. Optical filters for telecentric lenses (filter mount included) * Part number Description Useful wavelength range Peak transmission Tolerence Matching products (nm) (nm) OE Telecentric lenses FTSP450TC Dark Blue (450 nm) short pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/- 10 FTSP500TC Blue (500 nm) short pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/- 10 FTSP570TC Cyan (570 nm) short pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/- 10 FTSP700TC UV + NIR cut off filter > 90% +/- 10 FTLP510TC Yellow (510 nm) long pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/- 10 FTLP550TC Orange (550 nm) long pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/- 10 FTLP590TC Orange (590 nm) long pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/- 10 FTLP640TC Red (640 nm) long pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/- 10 FTLP920TC IR (920 nm) long pass filter for TC lenses > 90% +/- 10 FTPR032TC Linear polarizer for TC lenses TC 12yyy, TCCR 12yyy, TCCR 23yyy TC 23yyy 1 TC2MHRyyy-C, TC4MHRyyy-C, 2 TCCR2Myyy-C, TCCR4Myyy-C 1 Except TC , TC , TC , TC Some vignetting may occur, depending on sensor size. * Filters for TC lens without TC filter mount can be ordered separately on request. 214

216 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES PCCDLFAT Interchangeable attachment for extra-wide PCCD field of view Height Height WD WD Diameter PCCD optics Diameter PCCD optics with PCCDFLAT Schematics showing the FOVs of PCCD Optics with and without PCCDLFAT. PCCDLFAT extends the central field of view of PCCD optics to image objects with even larger diameters (beyond 25 mm). PCCDLFAT is an accessory designed to increase the central field of view of PCCD optics. By replacing the pre-assembled protective window with the PCCDLFAT attachment, PCCD optics can inspect the TOP and SIDES of objects with even larger diameters (beyond 25 mm). Field of view selection chart PCCD PCCDLFAT Diameter Height WD F/# c (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) PCCD PCCDLFAT Diameter Height WD F/# c (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) PCCD PCCDLFAT Diameter Height WD F/# c (mm) (mm) (mm) (%) CPDPH01 Diffuser cap for LTCLHP illuminators In certain cases telecentric illuminators projecting a quasimonochromatic light source (such as an LED) can give rise to diffraction effects. CPDPH01 is an optional diffuser cap designed to be positioned in front of LTSCHP1W modules and into any LTCLHP telecentric illuminator (CPDPH01 is not compatible with LTCLHP023-x) to effectively minimize such diffraction effects; note that CPDPH01 may affect the level of LTCLHP illumination homogeneity. 215

217 ACCESSORIES FOR LENSES EXT series Extenders and adapters Part number RT-VM100 RT-VM400 RT-EX15CS RT-EX15C RT-EX2CS RT-EX2C Description Extension tube kit 40, 20, 10, 5, 1, 0.5 mm C- to CS-mount 5 mm adapter ring 1.5X extender for CS-mount 1.5X extender for C-mount 2X extender for CS-mount 2X extender for C-mount 216

218 PATTERNS PTTC series Calibration patterns Any machine vision lens (either telecentric or not) shows some amount of distortion. In addition to barrel or pincushion distortion, changes in the view angle or misaligned components will affect the image symmetry and generate the so-called thin prism or keystone effect. Imaging and metrology applications often require to minimize distortion, which can be software-corrected by analyzing the image of a precision pattern whose geometrical features are well known. For this reason Opto Engineering offers chrome-on-glass patterns optimized for software calibration, featuring extremely high geometrical accuracy thanks to photolithography techniques. The range of available chessboard patterns is compatible with most Opto Engineering telecentric lenses. FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PATTERN HOLDERS CMPH series p. 202 Compatibility Mechanical specifications Part Telecentric lenses Pattern mounts Dimensions Thickness Active area Squares Dimensional number CMPH W x H T W a x H a W s accuracy (Part numbers ending in) (mm x mm) (mm) (mm x mm) (mm) (μm) PT , 007, x x PT , x x PT , 048, x x PT , 072, 080, 085, x x PT , 120, 130, 144, 172, 192, 200, 240 n.a x x

219 PATTERNS PTPR series Projection patterns for machine vision Custom-made pattern Custom-made patterns can be supplied on request. A drawing with accurate geometrical information must be submitted (please refer to the instructions here below). active area Fill-in the opaque features Ø = 11 mm glass substrate Ø = /-0.3 mm Keep white the light-transmitting features thickness: min: 1 mm max: 2.5 mm Opto Engineering supplies a comprehensive range of projection patterns compatible with our LED pattern projectors. PT projection patterns can be either laser-engraved, with 50 µm geometrical accuracy, or photolitography-engraved for more demanding applications (2 µm accuracy). Custom geometry patterns can also be provided upon request. Project aperture Active area Pattern specifications Photolithography patterns Substrate Coating Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Soda lime grass Chrome 2 μm 1.4 μm Base pattern Pattern mounted on projector with circular aperture Pattern mounted on projector with square aperture Laser engraved patterns Substrate Coating Geometrical accuracy Edge sharpness Borofloat glass Dichroic mirror 50 μm 50 μm With LTPRHP, LTPRXP and LTPRUP projectors With LTPRSMHP projectors (circular aperture) (square aperture) Part Format Process Substrate Coating Line Thickness Geometrical Edge Active Number Max line Active Number Line number spacing accuracy sharpness area of lines length area of lines length (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (µm) (µm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) PT P Line Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PT L Line Laser engraving Borofloat glass Dichroic mirror x PT P Line Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x 8-8 PT L Line Laser engraving Borofloat glass Dichroic mirror x 8-8 PT P Stripes Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PT L Stripes Laser engraving Borofloat glass Dichroic mirror x PT P Grid Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x x 8 8 x PT L Grid Laser engraving Borofloat glass Dichroic mirror x x 8 8 x PT P Edge Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PT L Edge Laser engraving Borofloat glass Dichroic mirror x PTST P Stripes Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PTST P Stripes Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PTST P Stripes Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PTST P Stripes Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PTST P Stripes Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PTST P Stripes Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x PTGR P Grid Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x x 8 16 x 16 8 PTGR P Grid Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x x 8 32 x 32 8 PTGR P Grid Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x x 8 53 x 53 8 PTGR P Grid Photolitography Soda lime glass Chrome x x 8 80 x

220 Patterns suggested for LTPRHP3W, LTPRXP, LTPRUP active area Photolithography patterns Laser engraved patterns 11 mm line thickness line gap PT P format: line line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: line line thickness 0.5 mm Active area for LTPRHP3W, LTPRXP, LTPRUP (circular aperture) PT P format: cross line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: cross line thickness 0.5 mm PT P format: stripe line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT L format: stripe line gap 0.5 mm line thickness 0.5 mm line length 7.78 mm PT P format: grid line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm PT L format: grid line gap 0.8 mm line thickness 0.2 mm line length 7.78 mm PT P format: edge line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PT L format: edge line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.5 mm Compatible pattern projector for machine vision (LTPRHP3W, LTPRXP, LTPRUP). Patterns suggested for LTPRSMHP3W active area line thickness Photolithography stripe patterns Photolithography grid patterns 8 mm line gap PT P 8 lines in projection area PT P 8 x 8 lines in projection area line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm line gap 0.95 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line length 7.78 mm 8 mm Active area for LTPRSMHP3W (square aperture) PTST P 16 lines in projection area PTGR P 16 x 16 lines in projection area line gap 0.45 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line gap 0.45 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PTST P 32 lines in projection area PTGR P 32 x 32 lines in projection area line gap 0.20 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line gap 0.20 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PTST P 53 lines in projection area PTGR P 53 x 53 lines in projection area line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line gap 0.10 mm line thickness 0.05 mm PTST P 80 lines in projection area PTGR P 80 x 80 lines in projection area line gap 0.05 mm line thickness 0.05 mm line gap 0.05 mm line thickness 0.05 mm LTPRSMHP3W pattern projector for machine vision. 219

221 PATTERNS RC series Resolution and calibration targets Part number RT-T-20-P-CG RT-T-21-P-CG RT-T-50-2-P-TM RT-T-62-1-P-CG RT-AP-D50-P-CG RT-AP-DD100-P-CG Description USAF 1951 Resolution test chart USAF 1951 Resolution test chart (inches) Star sector test target Linear test pattern Calibration dot grid Multi-zone calibration dot grid 220

222 221

223 CONTROLLERS & POWER SUPPLIES LTDV series Strobe controllers KEY ADVANTAGES Compatible with most Opto Engineering LT series lighting solutions. 6 output channels or 1 output channel. Max output current up 17.0 A. Original design Small, compact unit with DIN rail mounting. NEW LTDV1CH-17V Strobe controller 1 channel featuring variable current range from 5 ma to 17A. LTDV series are accurate strobe controllers designed to easily power and control LT series illuminators, including LTDM, LTLA, LTDMLA, LTPRUP, LTBP series and View-through system. To get the very best out of Opto Engineering LED lighting solutions, in terms of both brightness stability and control, lights should be driven from a current source, not from a constant voltage supply. This is because small variations in temperature or voltage can cause a large change in th brightness of an LED. Since brightness changes almost linearly with current, using a current controller allows for linear adjustment of the light intensity. LTDV series comprises LTDV6CH six channel programmable strobe controllers and LTDV1CH-xx one channel strobe controllers. Additionally, the LTDV6CH controller can be quickly set up with easyto-use configuration software downloadable from our website. Wiring examples LD6 LD5 LD4 LD3 LD2 LD1 0V 0V SAFETY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY + - SAFETY SWITCH 0V 0V TR1+ TR1- TR2+ TR2- TRIGGER SOURCE 1 TRIGGER SOURCE 2 POWER SUPPLY - + TLO+ TRG- SH+ SH- TRIGGER SOURCE TRIGGER TO CAMERA SH1+ SH1- TRIGGER TO CAMERA 1 SH2+ SH2- TRIGGER TO CAMERA 2 Wiring example for LTDV6CH. Wiring example for LTDV1CH-xx. 222

224 Easily configure and manage strobe, trigger and camera signals LTDV6CH LTDV1CH-xx Use LTSW software (included) to configure and set-up any combination of illuminators from LTDM, LTLA, LTDMLA series and View Through system (up to 6 illuminators) using a single PC. With LTSW software you can: Easily set the output current intensity of each connected illuminator in steps of 100 ma Set the pulse duration and pulse delay of each illuminator in steps of 1µs Control the connected illuminators with up to 4 synchronization inputs Control up to 2 synchronization outputs (e.g. up to 2 cameras) Write and save different configurations depending on your application PC must have a native RS485 communication interface or a suitable S485/USB converter must be used (product code ADPT001 can be optionally purchased and shipped with LTDV6CH strobe controller). Simply set the parameters via DIP switches. Part number LTDV6CH LTDV1CH-17V LTDV1CH-7 LTDV1CH-17 Electrical specifications User interface RS way DIP switch 4-way DIP switch 4-way DIP switch Configuration software LTSW included n.a. n.a. n.a. Output channels n 6 independent constant current outputs 1 constant current output Output current range (A) 3.5A A 2 Low 5 ma ma (in steps of 5 ma) 9 Medium 100 ma A (in steps of 100 ma) 7.5 (fixed) 17.0 (fixed) High 1.5 A A (in steps of 500 ma) Max dissipable thermal power per channel (W) Synchronization inputs n 4 opto-isolated digital inputs 3 1 opto-isolated digital input Synchronization outputs n 2 opto-isolated digital outputs 1 opto-isolated digital output Pulse delay (μs) n.a. n.a. n.a. Pulse width (μs) n.a. n.a. n.a. Timing repeatability for pulse delay (μs) 0.1 n.a. n.a. n.a. for pulse width (μs) 0.5 n.a. n.a. n.a. Supply voltage (V, DC) Output voltage (V) (with step-up disabled) 0-36 (with step-up enabled) 0-12 (with 24V supply) 0-36 (with 48V supply) Max startup/inrush current (A) Mechanical specifications Dimensions 6 Mounting length (mm) heigth (mm) width (mm) Accessories ADPT001 7 n.a. n.a. n.a. Compatible products LTDM series, LTLA series, LTDMLA series, View through system, LTPRUP-x, LTSW DIN rail LTDMB2-W, LTDMB2-G, LTDMB2-R, LTDMC2-W, LTDMC2-G, LTDMC2-R, LTLAB2-W, LTLAB2-G, LTLAB2-R, LTLAC2-W, LTLAC2-G, LTLAC2-R, LTDMLAB2-WW, LTDMLAC2-WW, LTPRUP-x 8 LTDMA1-W, LTDMA1-G, LTDMA1-R, LTDMC1-W, LTLAC1-W, LTDMLAC1-WW 8 LTDMB2-W, LTDMB2-G, LTDMB2-R, LTDMC2-W, LTDMC2-G, LTDMC2-R, LTLAB2-W, LTLAB2-G, LTLAB2-R, LTLAC2-W, LTLAC2-G, LTLAC2-R, LTDMLAB2-WW, LTDMLAC2-WW, LTPRUP-x 8 1 With Modbus RTU slave protocol. 2 In steps of 98 ma. 3 Opto Isolated. Operate from 3V to 24V. 4 In steps of 1 μs. 5 Regulated ± 10%. 6 Including DIN fixing. 7 To be ordered separately. ADPT001 consists of - one RS485-USB adapter and - one cable with 3 elements for connection with LTDV6CH. In order to configure LTDV6CH via software ADPT001 must be used. Refer to our website for further info. 8 LTDMLA series require two LTDV1CH strobe controllers to power and control both the two integrated illumination units (dome + ring light). 9 Continuous mode option is also available for the low current range. 223

225 CONTROLLERS & POWER SUPPLIES MTDV Motion controller for bipolar stepper motors KEY ADVANTAGES Lens control via RS485 / USB or manual interface. Designed to drive motorized ENMT and MZMT12X/5X series with specific configuration file for F-number, focus and/or zoom settings. Compact aluminum housing with DIN rail mounting. Demo software included. MTDV3CH-00A1 is a motion controller for bipolar stepper motors with a winding current of 0.5 A up to 24 V DC. MTDV can drive up to three stepper motors and has been developed to control aperture, focus and zoom of motorized lenses via RS485/USB interface of a PC/PLC system or manually. The controller is compatible with ENMT fixed focal length lenses with motorized focus and aperture control and MZMT12X and MZMT5X series, 12X and 5X continuous macro zoom lenses with motorized control. MTDV3CH-00A1 is an open loop controller: motion modes are operated either manually or via PC/PLC and include relative/ absolute position, move to a specific F-number, magnification or working distance. The controller is supplied with a software package including demo software, dll and code examples to be downloaded from the Opto Engineering website. MTDV controller lets you easily set specific F-number, focus and/ or zoom settings when used in combination with any compatible lens model from MZMT12X/5X and ENMT series by downloading a specific configuration file from our website. Specific configurations can be saved in the controller non-volatile memory. In order to connect MTDV3CH-00A1 to ENMT and MZMT12X/5X series, CBMT001 cable (from circular standard DIN 12Pos Female to DB15F connector) must be ordered. MTDV features a solid aluminum housing and can be easily mounted on a DIN rail for easy integration in any industrial automation environment. Product combinations * MZMT12X lens + CBMT001 cable + MTDV controller. MZMT5X lens + CBMT001 cable + MTDV controller. DO YOU KNOW? Download MTDV instruction manual from ENMT lens + CBMT001 cable + MTDV controller. * To be ordered separately. 224

226 COMPATIBLE MOTORIZED LENSES MZMT12X series p. 78 MZMT5X series p. 82 ENMT series p. 90 CABLE FOR CONNECTION WITH MZMT AND ENMT CBMT001 p. 228 Part number MTDV3CH-00A1 Description Motion controller for three bipolar stepper motors, manual, RS485/USB interface Electrical specifications Manual: push buttons, slider User interface type PC/PLC: RS485 1 / USB 2 Supply voltage, DC (V, DC) 24 Connector type DB15F LED indication power, motion, motors limit switch, fault (overtemperature, overcurrent) Non volatile memory yes Automatic position saving yes 3 Protections ESD protection, Output overcurrent protection, wrong power polarity protection, Voltage overload protection, External power supply current limitation, Thermal shutdown protection Software Windows demo software, dll, code examples Manual: CW/CCW constant speed move Motion modes PC/PLC: move relative, move absolute move to F-number, move to magnification, move to working distance WD 4 Control type open loop Motor parameters Number of motors up to 3 Supported motor type Bipolar stepper Winding current (A) 0.5 fixed Max speed steps/s 1000 Mechanical specifications Length mm 185 Height mm 64.0 Width mm 85.0 Mounting DIN rail Compatibility 5 Lenses ENMT series, MZMT12X series, MZMT5X series Cable 6 CBMT001 (circular standard DIN 12Pos Female to DB15M connector cable, 2 m) Accessories ADPT001 (adapter RS485-USB + cable with 3 elements) 1 With Modbus RTU slave protocol. 2 Mini-B plug. 3 Automatic position saving can be disabled. 4 Download configuration file from Opto Engineering website. 5 All compatible products must be ordered separately 6 Cable is required to connect MTDV3CH-00A1 controller to ENMT/MZMT series. 225

227 CONTROLLERS & POWER SUPPLIES PS series Power supplies and light intensity controllers Part number POWER SUPPLIES Electrical specifications Dimensions Compatibility 2 Input Output Lighting Cameras Vision systems Supply Ch Voltage Max Power Length Width Height Controllers 1 LED LED LED illuminators pattern sources/ voltage current projectors modules (V, AC) (V, DC) (W) (mm) (mm) (mm) RT-SDR VDC DIN rail power supply LTCLHP, LTCLHP CORE, LTCL4K, TCCX, TCCXQ, TCBENCH, LDTV1CH-17V, TCBENCH CORE, LTDV6CH, LTDMC, MTDV3CH-00A1 LTRNST, LTRNOB, LTLAIC, LTLADC, LTRNDC, LTBC, LTBFC, LTBDC, LTTNC, LTCXC LTPRHP3W, LTPRSMHP3W, LTPRXP LTSCHP CLOE-CORE, CLOE-360 OUT, CLOE-360 IN RT-SDR VDC DIN rail power supply LTDV1CH-7, LTDV1CH-17 RT-DRP VDC DIN rail power supply VAC VDC ALBERT-01 RT-DRP DIN rail power supply 240V ac - 24V dc 480 W VAC VDC ALBERT-01 RT-DRT DIN rail power supply 400V ac three phase - 24V dc 240 W Three-Phase VAC (Dual phase operation possible) VDC ALBERT-01 RT-DRT DIN rail power supply 400V ac three phase - 24V dc 480 W Three-Phase VAC VDC ALBERT-01 RT-MV-DC1201-BCSXIO-REV2 Power Supply 12V with digital I/O on separate cable 100, mvbluecougar-x, mvbluecougar-xd 1 Additional wires (not supplied) are required to connect the controllers with the power supply units. 2 Do not exceed lighting/controllers maximum ratings specified in the product datasheet. Refer to specific product documentation for detailed instructions. 226

228 Part number Electrical specifications Dimensions Compatibility 3 Input Output Lighting LED LED LED Supply Power Ch Voltage Max Power Length Width Height Controllers 1 illuminators pattern sources/ voltage cord current projectors modules (V, AC) (V, DC) (W) (mm) (mm) (mm) LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROLLERS DIN RAIL RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx 2 Lighting controller unit, power cord, power adaptor 24V plug 24 included (EU, UK or US) LTDMC, LTLAIC, LTLADC, LTRNDC, LTBC, LTBFC, LTBDC, LTTNC, LTCXC RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx-TB 2 Lighting controller unit, power cord, power adaptor 24V plug, EXT-24V-F-3M-TB cable 24 included (EU, UK or US) LTRNST, LTRNOB ANALOG BENCHTOP RT-ANGX1000CH1-24V-xx-TB 2 24VDC analog lighting controller 1 channel, power cord, EXT-24V-F-3M-TB cable included (EU, UK or US) LTDMC, LTRNST, LTRNOB, LTLAIC, LTLADC, LTRNDC, LTBC, LTBFC, LTBDC, LTTNC, LTCXC RT-ANG2000CH2-24VA1-xx-TB 2 24VDC analog lighting controller 2 channels, power cord, EXT-24V-F-3M-TB cable included (EU, UK or US) V LTDMC, LTRNST, LTRNOB, LTLAIC, LTLADC, LTRNDC, LTBC, LTBFC, LTBDC, LTTNC, LTCXC LED illuminators with continuous current <1 A RT-PSP LV-xx 2 12VDC analog power supply for LVx LED spot light, power cord included (EU, UK or US) LDSC (RT-LVW-00614, RT-LVG-00614) 1 Additional wires (not supplied) are required to connect the controllers with the power supply units. 2 xx = UK (240VAC) / EU (220VAC) / US (110VAC). 3 Do not exceed lighting/controllers maximum ratings specified in the product datasheet. Refer to specific product documentation for detailed instructions. 227

229 CABLES & ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS CB series - Cables Part number Description Compatibility Power cables CBLT001 CBLT002 CBLT003 CBLT004 CBLT005 CBLT006 CB244P1500 CB244P1500L CB244P1501 CB244P1501L RT-EXT-24V-F-3M-TB RT-EXT-24V-F-3M Illumination cable, side 1 M12 connector straight, side 2 cable end - 5 m - for single stage systems Illumination cable, side 1 M12 connector right angled, side 2 cable end - 5 m - for single stage systems Illumination cable, side 1 M8 connector straight, side 2 cable end - 5 m - for single stage systems Illumination cable, side 1 M8 connector right angled, side 2 cable end - 5 m - for single stage systems Illumination cable, side 1 M12 connector straight, side 2 cable end - 5 m - for double stage systems Illumination cable, side 1 M12 connector right angled, side 2 cable end - 5 m - for double stage systems Power cable, side 1 M8 connector straight, side 2 cable end - 2 m - type 1 labels Power cable, side 1 M8 connector angled, side 2 cable end - 2 m - type 1 labels Power cable, side 1 M8 connector straight, side 2 cable end - 2 m - type 2 labels Power cable, side 1 M8 connector angled, side 2 cable end - 2 m - type 2 labels Power cable, side 1 SM 2 PIN male connector side 2 terminal blocks connector - 3 m Power cable, side 1 SM 2 PIN male connector side 2 flying leads - 3 m LTDMB2-x, LTDMCX-x, LTLAB2-x, LTLACx-x, LTPRUP-x, LTBP B/W, LTBP B/W, LTBP B/W, LTBP B/W LTDMB2-x, LTDMCX-x, LTLAB2-x, LTLACX-x, LTPRUP-x, LTBP B/W, LTBP B/W, LTBP B/W, LTBP B/W LTDMA1-x, LTBP series 1, LTLNCxxx-x LTDMA1-x, LTBP series 1, LTLNCxxx-x LTDMLAB2-WW, LTDMLACx-WW, LTBP R/G, LTBP R/G, LTBP R/G, LTBP R/G LTDMLAB2-WW, LTDMLACx-WW, LTBP R/G, LTBP R/G, LTBP R/G, LTBP R/G LTCLHP series, LTCLHP CORE series, LTCL4K series, TCCX series, LTPR series, LTPRHP3W series, LTPRSMHP3W series, LTSCHP series LTCLHP series, LTCLHP CORE series, LTCL4K series, TCCX series, LTPR series, LTPRHP3W series, LTPRSMHP3W series, LTSCHP series LTPRXP series, TCCAGExx096 LTPRXP series, TCCAGExx096 LTRNST series, LTRNOB series, RT-ANGX1000CH1-24V-xx-TB, RT-ANG2000CH2-24VA1-xx-TB RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-xx, LTDMC series, LTLAIC series, LTLADC series, LTRNDC series, LTBFC series, LTBRDC series, LTTNC series, LTCXC series COCB243P0600 Power cable for TCZR and MCZR products, 0.6 m TCZR series, MCZR series CBPWALB01 ALBERT power cable, 5 m, IP65 ALBERT-01 RT CBMT001 USB cables Power cord with schuko plug - open end cable, 3 m 10A 250V, single-phase 12 wires PVC grey cable, circular standard DIN 12Pos Female to DB15M connector cable, 2 m RT-SDR , RT-SDR , RT-DRP , RT-DRP , RT-DRT , RT-DRT MTDV3CH-00A1, ENMT series, MZMT12X series, MZMT5X series COCBUSB20 Passive USB 2.0, standard A plug mini-b plug cable, 2 m TCZR series, MCZR series, MTDV3CH-00A1 CBUSB3001 Passive USB 3.0 cable, industrial level, horizontal screw locking, 3 m mvbluefox3-2, CLOE-CORE, CLOE-360 OUT, CLOE-360 IN Ethernet cables CBETH001 Ethernet cable for Panel PC, 5 m, IP65 ALBERT-01, RT-KWP5170 CBETH002 Ethernet cable, general purpose, 5 m, IP65 ALBERT-01 Ethernet cable, CAT6, industrial level, CBETH003 high flexible cable with screw, 5 m Cables for control and I/O mvbluecougar-x, mvbluecougar-xd CBGPO001 Output cable, 5 m, IP65 ALBERT-01 CBGPIO001 I/O cable, side 1 HIROSE 12 pin, side 2 cable end, 3 m mvbluefox3-2, mvbluecougar-x, mvbluecougar-xd, CLOE-CORE, CLOE-360 OUT, CLOE-360 IN CBPH001 Photoelectric sensor cable with M12 connector, 5 m, IP65 RT-WTB9-3P2461, ALBERT-01 CBPH002 Photoelectric sensor cable with flying leads, 5 m, IP65 ALBERT-01 CBTL001 Tower light cable with M12 connector, 5 m, IP68 RT , ALBERT-01 CBTL002 Tower light cable with flying leads, 5 m, IP68 ALBERT-01 Other ADPT001 Adapter RS485-USB + cable with 3 elements for LTDV6CH connection LTDV6CH, MTDV3CH-00A1 1 Except LTBP z, LTBP z, LTBP z, LTBP z ADPT001 Product combination example Part number Description Compatibility ADPT001 Adapter RS485-USB + cable with 3 elements for LTDV6CH connection LTDV6CH, MTDV3CH-00A1 LTDV6CH ADPT

230 CABLES & ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS LTSCHP series High-performance replacement LED modules LTSCHP modules power many series of Opto Engineering LED illuminators and feature excellent current stability. They are available in four colors (red, green, blue and white) and can be ordered as replacements: LTSCHP1W modules are compatible with LTCLHP, LTCL4K, TCCXQ, TCCX, TCBENCH series, TCBENCH CORE series; LTLCHP CORE and TCBENCH CORE series (only red, green and white), while LTSCHP3W modules are compatible with LTPRHP3W and LTPRSMHP3W pattern projectors. Device power ratings LED power ratings Compatibility Part Light color, DC voltage 1 Power Max LED forward Forward voltage Max pulse current number Wavelength peak consumption current Minimum Maximum Typical Maximum (V) (V) (W) (ma) (V) (V) (ma) W power sources 6 LTSCHP 1W-R red, 630 nm < LTSCHP 1W-G green, 520 nm < LTSCHP 1W-B blue, 460 nm < LTSCHP 1W-W white < LTCLHP, LTCLHP CORE, LTCL4K, TCCX, TCCXQ, TCBENCH, TCBENCH CORE, MZMT12X 7 3W power sources LTSCHP 3W-R red, 630 nm < LTSCHP 3W-G green, 520 nm < LTSCHP 3W-B blue, 460 nm < LTSCHP 3W-W white < LTPRHP3W, LTPRSMHP3W 1 Tolerance ±10%. 2 Used in continuous (not pulsed) mode. 3 At max forward current. 4 Tolerance is ±0.06V on forward voltage measurements. 5 At pulse width <= 10 ms, duty cycle <= 10% condition. Built-in electronics board must be bypassed (see tech info). 6 Shipped not assembled. See LTCLHP instructions manual. 7 Some part numbers are not available in all color options (-R, -G, -B and -W). See page of each product series for available colors. CABLES & ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS LDSC series LED sources Part number Description Compatibility FULL RANGE OF COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS RT-LVW Light source for Optart telecentric lenses with built-in coaxial illumination, white RT-PSP LV-xx TCCXHM series p. 31 RT-LVG Light source for Optart telecentric lenses with built-in coaxial illumination, green RT-PSP LV-xx TCCXLM series p. 31 TCCX2M series p

231 Vision systems REACH COMPLIANT RoHS Refer to specific datasheets available at for product compliancy with regulations, certifications and safety labels

232 ALBERT 232 Nowadays vision systems come in all shapes and sizes in order to suit the largest number of applications. At their core, all vision systems share the same building blocks: cameras and optics to capture images of the object under inspection, lighting devices to optimally illuminate the part, specific imaging software and a processing unit. Through the years, and thanks to its long time experience in manufacturing and marketing high quality imaging components, Opto Engineering has identified very specific needs concerning machine vision systems: as a general tendency, many industries require new vision systems to be adaptive, so that they can be quickly repurposed to inspect new products. They also have to be easy to use, so that an experienced engineer is not necessarily needed for programming and maintenance. What you will find in the new Opto Engineering product offering is unconventional vision solutions that are both smart and easy to use, based on the same principle that drives the development of all our products: simple works better

233 VISION SYSTEMS ALBERT Self-learning vision system based on artificial intelligence KEY ADVANTAGES Simple Learns and assesses the quality of your products directly from the production line without complicated settings. Intelligent Independently decides whether a product can be accepted and can control it in a more strict or tolerant way according to different production requirements. Self-learning Quickly learns the characteristics of a new product under inspection. Suitable to identify complex defects Is capable to understand the quality of products even with complex features and high variability. IP65 Rated APPLICATIONS Ideal to quality check a variety of baked goods such as croissants and cookies but also frozen products, chocolates and various other foods, even when presented in a disorderly manner and with different orientations. ALBERT is a complete and independent unit for visual inspection, based on the most advanced artificial intelligence techniques. ALBERT learns the characteristics of a product directly from the production line and autonomously assesses its quality. ALBERT is very simple to use and does not require complicated programming procedures by experienced users, so it is quickly ready to control new products with different characteristics. No traditional machine vision system is able to analyze complex objects or products with high variability as simply as a human operator would: ALBERT, on the other hand, interprets the concept of quality just like the fastest and most trained of your quality control operators. ALBERT is able to adapt to the production requirements of the moment since its severity level can be increased or decreased at the touch of a button, thus loosening or tightening the product acceptance criteria. Each time, ALBERT chooses autonomously which will be the features to monitor that best describe the quality of your products. At any time and with a simple click, ALBERT can learn how to sort a new product or adapt to changing production conditions. File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select Inspection of croissants. 232

234 HOW IT WORKS Installation ALBERT is extremely easy to install: just attach it to any mechanical fixture by means of the four threaded holes on top of the unit, making sure to respect the correct working distance from the conveyor belt. Once connected to a 24V power supply, simply press the ON button and wait less than a minute for ALBERT to be ready for use. The basic settings are extremely simple and fast: the process of adjusting the focus and identifying the product to be inspected is assisted by convenient software tools. The interaction with ALBERT is possible both through the physical interfaces on the product or by connecting the unit to a tablet or industrial PC. M6 holes for mounting Working distance Industrial tablet PC There are four M6 holes to mount ALBERT on the production line at the correct working distance. ALBERT can be configured using the buttons on the product or by tablet/pc. Learning The learning process is easily performed by presenting some products on your production line and activating ALBERT in LEARN mode during normal operation. File Edit Zoom Select Unlike traditional vision systems, ALBERT autonomously learns the characteristics of your production in a few minutes: it is normally sufficient to present a few tens or a few hundreds of products during production to allow ALBERT to learn their characteristics without complicated settings. ALBERT is able to tolerate up to 20% defective products during the learning phase, without affecting its ability to sort products correctly. ALBERT will be ready to check your production once the status bar is full. Moreover, whenever the goods on your production line change or anytime you want to adjust your quality control process to new production parameters, you can just press the LEARN button and ALBERT will adjust itself accordingly. Even during the learning phase, ALBERT continues to monitor production, quickly adapting to the new inspection criteria without having to stop the line: no other vision system is so flexible and easy to configure. ALBERT in LEARN mode. 233

235 HOW IT WORKS Sorting Once the learning process is complete, ALBERT is ready for the sorting phase or CHECK phase: the products deemed inconsistent with the desired level of quality are reported via an integrated light bar and can be rejected from the line by interfacing ALBERT with the most common ejection systems thanks to the preinstalled optoisolated outputs. ALBERT is able to store images of defective products also keeping track of the reasons for rejection: this data can then be analyzed to improve the production process. You can also adjust the severity level of the control parameters without having to stop the line: a dedicated slider bar allows the user to loosen or tighten the sorting criteria, quickly and easily adjusting ALBERT to new quality parameters. File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select ALBERT set to low (left) or high (right) severity level. Interface ALBERT communicates its status through a LED bar that turns red when defective products are detected. ALBERT is also preset to be interfaced with an industrial tower light already installed on your production line and reports defective products through appropriate output signals that can trigger up to six eject stations. If you wish to view the images that ALBERT is acquiring, you can do so wirelessly through an industrial tablet PC without losing IP65 rating or by connecting ALBERT to a monitor after removing the front protection panel. Connecting ALBERT to a monitor / tablet PC is also required to adjust the basic settings and to monitor rejection statistics on an external screen. Tower light Front protection panel PLC / Ejection Integrated LED bar Monitor Industrial tablet PC ALBERT interfaces. 234

236 APPLICATION EXAMPLES ALBERT is designed to also control products characterized by a high degree of variability and impossible to parameterize through a traditional vision system, specifically in the food industry, but not exclusively. The most typical areas of use are the inspection of baked goods, frozen products, sweets, fish or meat. ALBERT is also ideal for products that are presented in a disorderly manner or with different orientations (provided there s some spacing between them), or whose packaging cannot be represented by a predetermined pattern. In all of these cases, ALBERT makes it possible to control the products avoiding excess scrap or continued assistance by operators experienced in programming. ALBERT is suitable for use on food lines thanks to the IP65 protection, the adoption of materials compatible with the food industry and the engineering solutions adopted. Bakery products with variations in color, shape or other attributes ALBERT is the ideal inspection solution for production lines of bakery products, such as biscuits, where traditional vision systems fail because product acceptance is not determined by a single parameter but is rather a combination of multiple subjective variables. File Edit Zoom Select ALBERT learns to know your production Due to continuous and genuine changes in products such as chocolate or shortcrust pastry, no traditional on-line vision system is able to quickly learn and properly inspect this type of products like ALBERT does. In fact, ALBERT can learn the natural change in color of the ingredients of a new batch in less than 5 minutes without the need to adjust complicated parameters each time. File Edit Zoom Select 235

237 APPLICATION EXAMPLES Frozen products with variations in color, shape or ingredients The acceptance criterion for frozen products is often a complex combination of many parameters. Unlike traditional vision systems, ALBERT is flexible and quickly learns the characteristics of products such as frozen pizzas, semi-finished meat or fish products, allowing you to loosen or tighten the sorting parameters by simply adjusting a dedicated slider bar on the main interface. File Edit Zoom Select File Edit Zoom Select 236

238 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS L 311 mm W 330 mm H 171 mm mm mm 350 mm ALBERT s Field of View at 400 mm working distance. Model ALBERT-01 Description Self-Learning Vision system based on artificial intelligence Application In-line inspection Working distance (mm) Field of View mm x mm 260 x x x x 390 Minimum Working Distance mm 100 Optics 8 mm f1.4-f16 with manual focus adjustment Lighting system LED diffuse strobe illuminator, 5700 K white Line speed 1 m/s 1 Number of parts per second 2 20 LED indicators Yes (STATUS and SEVERITY LEVEL) N of storable images 3 800K Ports Input Synchronization input 1, opto-isolated (on top of the unit) Output for tower light 2 lights, 1 siren (on top) for ejector (s) 6, opto-isolated (on top) Synchronization output 1, opto-isolated (on top) Communication Ethernet 2 (on top) Wireless Wi-Fi (802.11n) USB (front of the unti) HDMI 1 (front) DVI 1 (front) Power Requirements Voltage V, DC 24 ± 5% Maximum power consumption W 150 Cable CBPWALB01 length 5 m IP68 (included) Mechanical specifications Width W 4 mm 330 Length L mm 311 Height H mm 171 Weight kg 10 Material AISI304 stainless steel, anodized aluminum, scratch resistant polycarbonate (Lexan Margard ) Mounting 4X M6 holes (optional mounting accessories available) Environment Operating temperature C Storage temperature C 0-50 Humidity 20-85% (with no condensation) IP class 65 Installation indoor use only 1 Approximate value. Higher speeds are possible. Please contact us to check compatibility with your production line. 2 Estimated value. The number of inspected parts per second may vary depending on their size and the speed of the line. 3 Estimated value based on 250 Kbytes images stored in 200 GB SSD memory. 4 Wireless antenna included. 237

239 ACCESSORIES AND COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Communication and visualization RT-KWP5170 Stainless steel PC Quad Core processor with fanless cooling system full IP65, 1 x GbE, 2 x USB 2.0, 1 x RS-232 CBETH001 Ethernet cable for Panel PC, 5 m, IP65 RT-JD-0700GB-2 USB Keyboard/Mouse desk set RT-UT10 UniqTablet Elcom UT10, Intel Atom, Touch screen, IP54 Mounting CMHOALB01 Support plate Power Supplies RT-DRP DIN rail power supply 240V ac - 24V dc 240 W RT-DRP DIN rail power supply 240V ac - 24V dc 480 W RT Power cord with schuko plug - open end cable, 3 m 10A 250V, single-phase RT-DRT DIN rail power supply 400V ac three-phase - 24V dc 240 W RT-DRT DIN rail power supply 400V ac three-phase - 24V dc 480 W Sensors and signal RT-WTB9-3P2461 Background suppression sick photoelectric sensor mm detection range, PNP output, block style RT LED signal tower with buzzer, 2 light elements, clear, green/red (LED colour), 24 V ac/dc Lighting Components Strobe LTBP W High-power strobe bar light, 288 x 36 mm illumination area, white LTBP W High-power strobe bar light, 216 x 48 mm illumination area, white LTDV6CH 6-channel strobe controller Continuous RT-LBL X-W-24V LED bar light, white RT-SD-1000-D1-PS-EU Light controller with 24V power adapter and Schuko plug RT-EXT-24V-F-3M Power cord, 2-pin SM male connector on one end, flying leads on other end - 3 m Cables CBETH002 CBGPO001 CBPH001 CBPH002 CBTL001 CBTL002 CBPWALB01 Ethernet cable, general purpose, 5 m, IP68 Output cable, 5 m, IP68 Photoelectric sensor cable with M12 connector, 5 m, IP65 Photoelectric sensor cable with flying leads, 5 m, IP65 Tower light cable with M12 connector, 5 m, IP68 Tower light cable with flying leads, 5 m, IP68 ALBERT power cable, 5 m, IP65 Other RT Set of 2 8 x10 white balance/exposure cards - 18% grey and 90% white for color calibration 238

240 239

241 240

242 Opto Engineering Basics

243 Summary Optics Introduction Optics basics Image quality Lens types IV VIII XVI Lighting Cameras Introduction Light in machine vision LED illumination Illumination geometries and techniques Wavelength and optical performance Structured illumination Illumination safety and class risks of LEDs according to EN62471 Introduction Camera types Sensor and camera features Digital camera interfaces XXVIII XXIX XXXII XXXVIII XL XL XLIV XLV XLVII Vision systems Introduction Applications Types of vision systems How a vision system works LII LIII LIII

244 Optics The basic purpose of a lens of any kind is to collect the light scattered by an object and recreate an image of the object on a light-sensitive sensor (usually CCD or CMOS based). A certain number of parameters must be considered when choosing optics, depending on the area that must be imaged (field of view), the thickness of the object or features of interest (depth of field), the lens to object distance (working distance), the intensity of light, the optics type (telecentric/entocentric/pericentric), etc. The following list includes the fundamental parameters that must be evaluated in optics Field of View (FoV): total area that can be viewed by the lens and imaged onto the camera sensor. Working distance (WD): object to lens distance where the image is at its sharpest focus. Depth of Field (DoF): maximum range where the object appears to be in acceptable focus. Sensor size: size of the camera sensor s active area. This can be easily calculated by multiplying the pixel size by the sensor resolution (number of active pixels in the x and y direction). Magnification: ratio between sensor size and FoV. Resolution: minimum distance between two points that can still be distinguished as separate points. Resolution is a complex parameter, which depends primarily on the lens and camera resolution.

245

246

247 Optics basics Lens approximations and equations The main features of most optical systems can be calculated with a few parameters, provided that some approximation is accepted. The paraxial approximation requires that only rays entering the optical system at small angles with respect to the optical axis are taken into account. The thin lens approximation requires the lens thickness to be considerably smaller than the radii of curvature of the lens surfaces: it is thus possible to ignore optical effects due to the real Working distance thickness of the lenses and to simplify s ray tracing calculations. Furthermore, s assuming that both object and image f f space are in the same medium (e.g. air), we get the fundamental equation: 1/s 1/s = 1/f h where s (s ) is the object (image) position with respect to the lens, customarily designated by a negative (positive) value, and f is the focal length of the optical system (cf. Fig. 1). The distance from the object to the front lens is called working distance, while the distance from the rear lens to the sensor is called back focal distance. Henceforth, we will be presenting some useful concepts and formulas based on this simplified model, unless otherwise stated. Object Fig. 1: Basic parameters of an optical system. h Camera mounts Different mechanical mounting systems are used to connect a lens to a camera, ensuring both good focus and image stability. The mount is defined by the mechanical depth of the mechanics (flange focal distance), along with its diameter and thread pitch (if present). It s important that the lens flange focal distance and the camera mount flange distance are exactly the same, or focusing issues may arise. The presence of a threaded mechanism allows some adjustment to the back focal distance, if needed. For example, in the Opto Engineering PCHI series lenses, the backfocal adjustment is needed to adjust the focus for a different field of view. C-mount is the most common optics mount in the industrial market. It is defined by a flange focal distance of mm, a diameter of 1 (25.4 mm) with 32 threads per inch. C-mount CS-mount is a less popular and 5 mm shorter version of the Cmount, with a flange focal distance of mm. A CS-mount camera presents various issues when used together with C-mount optics, especially if the latter is designed to work at a precise back focal distance. CS-mount Sensor mm Sensor mm 1 x 32 TPI 1 x 32 TPI Fig. 2: C-mount mechanical layout. Fig. 3: CS-mount mechanical layout. IV

248 Optics F-mount is a bayonet-style mount originally developed by Nikon for its 35 mm format cameras, and is still found in most of its digital SLR cameras. It is commonly used with bigger sensors, e.g. full-frame or line-scan cameras. Lenses can be easily swapped out thanks to the bayonet mount, but no back focal adjustment is possible. Mxx-mount are different types of camera mounts defined by their diameter (e.g. M72, M42), thread pitch (e.g. 1 mm, 0.75 mm) and flange focal distance. They are a common alternative to the F-mount for larger sensors. T-mount (T1 = M42x1.0; T2 = M42 x 0.75) Sensor undefined M42 F-mount M58-mount (M58 x 0.75) Sensor undefined 46.5 mm M58 x 0.75 M72-mount (M72 x 0.75) 44 mm Sensor undefined 48 mm M72 x 0.75 Fig. 4: F-mount mechanical layout. Fig. 5: Mxx mount mechanical layouts. Each camera mount is more commonly used with certain camera sensor formats. The most typical sensor formats are listed below. It is important to remember that these are not absolute values i.e. two cameras listed with the same sensor format may differ substantially from one another in terms of aspect ratio (even if they have the same sensor diagonal). For example, the Sony Pregius IMX250 sensor is listed as 2/3 and has an active area of 8.45 mm x 7.07 mm. The CMOSIS CMV2000 sensor is also listed as 2/3 format but has an active area of mm x 5.98 mm px x 10 µm 2048 px x 14 µm 4096 px x 7 µm 4096 px x 10 µm 7450 px x 4.7 µm 6144 px x 7 µm 8192 px x 7 µm px x 5 µm 20.5 mm 28.6 mm 28.6 mm 35 mm 41 mm 43 mm 57.3 mm 62 mm Fig. 6: Common line scan sensors formats. Sensor type Diagonal Width Height (mm) (mm) (mm) 1/ / / / / / Full frame - 35 mm /3 1 4/3 1/2.5 1/2 1/1.8 2/3 Full frame - 35 mm Fig. 7: Common area scan sensors format. Fig. 8: Area scan sensors relative sizes. V

249 Back focal length adjustment Many cameras are found not to respect the industrial standard for C-mount (17.52 mm), which defines the flange-to-detector distance (flange focal length). Besides all the issues involved with mechanical inaccuracy, many manufacturers don t take into the due account the thickness of the detector s protection glass which, no matter how thin, is still part of the actual flange to detector distance. This is why a spacer kit is supplied with Opto Engineering telecentric lenses including instructions on how to tune the back focal length at the optimal value. Focal Length The focal length of an optical system is a measure of how strongly the system converges or diverges rays of light. For common optical systems, it is the distance over which collimated rays coming from infinity converge to a point. If collimated rays converge to a physical point, the lens is said to be positive (convex), whereas if rays diverge the focus point is virtual and the lens is said to be negative (concave cf. Fig. 9). All optics used in machine vision application are overall positive, i.e. they focus incoming light onto the sensor plane. Fig. 9: Positive (left) and negative (right) lens. For optical systems used in machine vision, in which rays reflected from a faraway object are focused onto the sensor plane, the focal length can be also seen as a measure of how much area is imaged on the sensor (Field of View): the longer the focal length, the smaller the FoV and vice versa (this is not completely true for some particular optical systems, e.g. in astronomy and microscopy). f = 8 mm f = 25 mm f = 50 mm Fig. 10: Focal length and field of view. Magnification and field of view The magnification M of an optics describes the ratio between image (h ) and object size (h): M = h /h A useful relationship between working distance (s), magnification (M) and focal length (f) is the following: s = f(m-1)/m M FoV Macro and telecentric lenses are designed to work at a distance comparable to their focal length (finite conjugates), while fixed focal length lenses are designed to image objects located at a much greater distance than their focal length (infinite Fig. 11: Given a fixed sensor size, if magnification is increased the field of view decreases and viceversa. conjugates). It is thus convenient to classify the first group by their magnification, which makes it easier to choose the proper lens given the sensor and object size, and the latter by their focal length. Since fixed focal length lenses also follow the previous equation, it is possible to calculate the required focal length given the magnification and working distance, or the required working distance given the sensor size, field of view and focal length, etc. (some examples are given at the end of this section). For macro and telecentric lenses instead, the working distance and magnification are typically fixed. VI

250 Optics F/# and depth of field Every optical system is characterized by an aperture stop, that determines the amount of light that passes through it. For a given aperture diameter d and focal length f we can calculate the optics F-number: Lens Aperture Image sensor F/# = f / d Falling light Focal length f Fig. 12: Aperture of an optical system. Typical F-numbers are F/1.0, F/1.4, F/2, F/2.8, F/4, F/5.6, F/8, F/11, F/16, F/22 etc. Every increment in the F-number (smaller aperture) reduces incoming light by a factor of 2. The given definition of F-number applies to fixed focal length lenses where the object is located at infinity (i.e. a distance much greater than its focal length). For macro and telecentric lenses where objects are at closer distance, instead the working F/# (wf/#)is used. This is defined as: WF/# = (1 + M) F/# A common F-number value is F/8, since smaller apertures could give rise to diffraction limitations, while lenses with larger apertures are more affected by optical aberrations and distortion. APERTURE RANGE f 2.8 f 4 f 5.6 f 8 f 11 f 16 f 22 Large aperture Medium aperture Small aperture The F-number affects the optics depth of field (DoF), that is the range between the nearest and farthest location where an object is acceptably in focus. Depth of field is quite a misleading concept, because physically there is one and only one plane in object space that is conjugate to the sensor plane. However, being mindful of diffraction, aberration and pixel size, we can define an acceptable focusing distance from the image conjugate plane, based on subjective criteria. For example, for a given lens, the acceptable focusing distance for a precision gauging application requiring a very sharp image is smaller than for a coarse visual inspection application. Shallow DoF Depth of field Fig. 13: Relationship between aperture (F/#) and DoF. Greatest DoF A rough estimate of the field depth of telecentric and macro lenses (or fixed focal length lenses used in macro configuration) is given by the following formula: F/# Incoming light Resolution DoF DoF [mm] = WF/# p [µm] k / M 2 where p is the sensor pixel size (in microns), M is the lens magnification and k is a dimensionless parameter that depends on the application (reasonable values are for measurement applications and for defect inspection). For example, taking p = 5.5 µm and k = 0.015, a lens with 0.25X mag and WF/# = 8 has an approximate dof = 10.5 mm. Fig. 14: Relationship between F/# amount of incoming ligth, resolution and DoF. VII

251 Image quality When designing a machine vision system, it is important to consider its performance limitations, in terms of optical parametes (FOV, DoF, resolution), aberrations, distortion and mechanical features. Aberrations Aberrations is a general category including the principal factors that cause an optical system to perform differently than the ideal case. There are a number of factors that do not allow a lens to achieve its theoretical performance. Physical aberrations The homogeneity of optical materials and surfaces is the first requirement to achieve optimum focusing of light rays and proper image formation. Obviously, homogeneity of real materials has an upper limit determined by various factors (e.g. material inclusions), some of which cannot be eliminated. Dust and dirt are external factors that certainly degrade a lens performance and should thus be avoided as much as possible. Spherical aberration Spherical lenses (Fig. 15) are very common because they are relatively easy to manufacture. However, the spherical shape is not ideal for perfect imaging - in fact, collimated rays entering the lens at different distances from the optical axis will converge to different points, causing an overall loss of focus. Like many optical aberrations, the blur effect increases towards the edge of the lens. Lens rays Optical axis Best focus point To reduce the problem, aspherical lenses (Fig. 16) are often used - their surface profile is not a portion of a sphere or cylinder, but rather a more complex profile apt to minimize spherical aberrations. An alternative solution is working at high F/# s, so that rays entering the lens far from the optical axis and causing spherical aberration cannot reach the sensor. Fig. 15: Lens with spherical aberration. Lens rays Optical axis Best focus point Fig. 16: Aspherical lens. VIII

252 Optics Chromatic aberration The refractive index of a material is a number that describes the scattering angle of light passing through it essentially how much rays are bent or refracted - and it is function of the wavelength of light. As white light enters a lens, each wavelength takes a slightly different path. This phenomenon is called dispersion and produces the splitting of white light into its spectral components, causing chromatic aberration. The effect is minimal at the center of the optics, growing towards the edges. Chromatic aberration causes color fringes to appear across the image, resulting in blurred edges that make it impossible to correctly image object features. While an achromatic doublet can be used to reduce this kind of aberration, a simple solution when no color information is needed is using monochrome light. Chromatic aberration can be of two types: longitudinal (Fig. 17) and lateral (Fig. 18), depending on the direction of incoming parallel rays. RGB color rays Optical axis Best focus point Fig. 17: Longitudinal/axial chromatic aberration. RGB color rays Optical axis Best focus point Fig. 18: Lateral / transverse chromatic aberration. IX

253 Astigmatism Astigmatism (Fig. 19) is an optical aberration that occurs when rays lying in two perpendicular planes on the optical axis have different foci. This causes blur in one direction that is absent in the other direction. If we focus the sensor for the sagittal plane, we see circles become ellipses in the tangential direction and vice versa. Lens Fig. 19: Astigmatism aberration. Coma Coma aberration (Fig. 20) occurs when parallel rays entering the lens at a certain angle are brought to focus at different positions, depending on their distance from the optical axis. A circle in the object plane will appear in the image as a cometshaped element, which gives the name to this particular aberration effect. Lens Fig. 20: Coma aberration. X

254 Optics Field curvature Field curvature aberration (Fig. 21) describes the fact that parallel rays reaching the lens from different directions do not focus on a plane, but rather on a curved surface. This causes radial defocusing, i.e. for a given sensor sensor position, only a circular crown will be in focus. Fig. 21: Field curvature aberration. Distortion With a perfect lens, a squared element would only be transformed in size, without affecting its geometric properties. Conversely, a real lens always introduces some geometric distortion, mostly radially symmetric (as a reflection of the radial symmetry of the optics). This radial distortion can be of two kinds: barrel and pincushion distortion. With barrel distortion, image magnification decreases with the distance from the optical axis, giving the apparent effect of the image being wrapped around a sphere. With pincushion distortion image magnification increases with the distance from the optical axis. Lines that do not pass through the center of the image are bent inwards, like the edges of a pincushion. Pincushion Fig. 22: Distortion. Barrel What about distortion correction? Since telecentric lenses are a real world object, they show some residual distortion which can affect measurement accuracy. Distortion is calculated as the percent difference between the real and expected image height and can be approximated by a second order polynomial. If we define the radial distances from the image center as follows Ra = actual radius the distortion is computed as a function of Ra: Re = expected radius dist (Ra) = (Ra - Re)/Ra = c Ra 2 + b Ra + a where a, b and c are constant values that define the distortion curve behavior; note that a is usually zero as the distortion is usually zero at the image center. In some cases, a third order polynomial could be required to get a perfect fit of the curve. In addition to radial distortion, also trapezoidal distortion must be taken into account. This effect can be thought of as the perspective error due to the misalignment between optical and mechanical components, whose consequence is to transform parallel lines in object space into convergent (or divergent) lines in image space. Such effect, also known as keystone or thin prism, can be easily fixed by means of pretty common algorithms which compute the point where convergent bundles of lines cross each other. An interesting aspect is that radial and trapezoidal distortion are two completely different physical phenomena, hence they can be mathematically corrected by means of two independent space transform functions which can also be applied subsequently. An alternative (or additional) approach is to correct both distortions locally and at once: the image of a grid pattern is used to define the distortion error amount and its orientation zone by zone. The final result is a vector field where each vector associated to a specific image zone defines what correction has to be applied to the x,y coordinate measurements within the image range. XI

255 Why GREEN light is recommended for telecentric lenses? All lenses operating in the visible range, including OE Telecentric lenses, are achromatized through the whole VIS spectrum. However, parameters related to the lens distortion and telecentricity are typically optimized for the wavelengths at the center of the VIS range, that is green light. Moreover, the resolution tends to be better in the green light range, where the achromatization is almost perfect. Green is also better than Red because a shorter wavelength range increases the diffraction limit of the lens and the maximum achievable resolution. Contrast, resolution and diffraction Contrast Defects and optical aberrations, together with diffraction, contribute to image quality degradation. An efficient way to assess image quality is to calculate contrast, that is the difference in luminance that makes an object - its representation in the image or on a display - distinguishable. Mathematically, contrast is defined as C = [I max I min ]/[ I max + I min ] Fig. 23: Greyscale levels. where I max (I min ) is the highest (lowest) luminance. In a digital image, luminance is a value that goes from 0 (black) to a maximum value depending on color depth (number of bits used to describe the brightness of each color). For typical 8-bit images (in grayscale, for the sake of simplicity), this value is = 255, since this is the number of combinations (counting from the zero black string) one can achieve with 8 bits sequences, assuming 0-1 values for each. Lens resolving power: transfer function The image quality of an optical system is usually expressed by its transfer function (TF). TF describes the ability of a lens to resolve features, correlating the spatial information in object space (usually expressed in line pair per millimeter) to the contrast achieved in the image. Periodic grating Objective Image Periodic grating Objective Image Black White 100% Contrast 90% Contrast y x Black White White Black 100% Contrast 20% Contrast y x White Black Fig. 24: Modulation and contrast transfer function. What s the difference between MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) and CTF (Contrast Transfer Function)? CTF expresses the lens contrast response when a square pattern (chessboard style) is imaged; this parameter is the most useful in order to assess edge sharpness for measurement applications. On the other hand, MTF is the contrast response achieved when imaging a sinusoidal pattern in which the grey levels range from 0 and 255; this value is more difficult to convert into any useful parameter for machine vision applications. The resolution of a lens is typically expressed by its MTF (modulation transfer function), which shows the response of the lens when a sinusoidal pattern is imaged. XII

256 Optics However, the CTF (Contrast Transfer Function) is a more interesting parameter, because it describes the lens contrast when imaging a black and white stripe pattern, thus simulating how the lens would image the edge of an object. If t is the width of each stripe, the relative spatial frequency w will be w = 1/(2t) For example, a black and white stripe pattern with 5 µm wide stripes has a spatial frequency of 100 lp/mm. The cut-off frequency is defined as the value w for which CTF is zero, and it can be estimated as Modulus of the OTF TS diff. limit TS 0.00 mm TS 9.00 mm TS mm TS mm w cut-off = 1/[WF/# λ(mm)] For example, an Opto Engineering TC23036 lens (WF/#h F/8) operating in green light (λ = mm) has a cut-off spatial frequency of about w cut-off = [ mm ] = 210 lp/mm Spatial frequency in cycles per mm Fig. 25: MTF curves of TC green light. Optics and sensor resolution The cutoff spatial frequency is not an interesting parameter, since machine vision systems cannot reliably resolve features with very low contrast. It is thus convenient to choose a limit frequency corresponding to 20% contrast. Airy disks Resolved Rayleigh limit Not resolved A commonly accepted criterion to describe optical resolution is the Rayleigh criterion, which is connected to the concept of resolution limit. When a wave encounters an obstacle - e.g. it passes through an aperture - diffraction occurs. Diffraction in optics is a physical consequence of the wave-like nature of light, resulting in interference effects that modify the intensity pattern of the incoming wavefront. Since every lens is characterized by an aperture stop, the image quality will be affected by diffraction, depending on the lens aperture: a dot-like object will be correctly imaged on the sensor until its image reaches a limit size; anything smaller will appear to have the same image a disk with a certain diameter depending on the lens F/# and on the light wavelength. This circular area is called the Airy disk, having a radius of r A = 1.22 λ f / d where λ is the light wavelength, f is the lens focal length, d is the aperture diameter and f /d is the lens F-number. This also applies to distant objects that appear to be small. If we consider two neighboring objects, their relative distance can be considered the object that is subject to diffraction when it is imaged by the lens. The idea is that the diffraction of both objects images increases to the point that it is no longer possible to see them as separate. As an example, we could calculate the theoretical distance at which human eyes cannot distinguish that a car s lights are separated. The Rayleigh s criterion states that two objects are not distinguishable when the peaks of their diffraction patterns are closer than the radius of the Airy Disk r A (in image space). (a) (b) (c) Fig. 26: Airy disk separation and the Rayleigh criterion. The Opto Engineering TC12120 telecentric lens, for example, will not distinguish feature closer than r A = µm 8 = 5.7 µm in image space (e.g. on the sensor). The minimum resolvable size in image space is always 2 r A, regardless of the real world size of the object. Since the TC12120 lens has 0.052X magnification and 2r A = 11.4 µm, the minimum real-world size of the object that can be resolved is 11.4 µm /0.052 = 220 µm. For this reason, optics should be properly matched to the sensor and vice versa: in the previous example, there is no advantage to use a camera with 2 µm pixel size, since every dot like object will always cover more than one pixel. In this case, a higher resolution lens or a different sensor (with larger pixels) should be chosen. On the other hand, a system can be limited by the pixel size, where the optics would be able to see much smaller features. The Transfer Function of the whole system should then be considered, assessing the contribution from both the optics and the sensor. It is important to remember that the actual resolution limit is not only given by the lens F/# and the wavelength, but also depends on the lens aberrations: hence, the real spatial frequency to be taken into account is the one described by the MTF curves of the desired lens. XIII

257 Reflection, transmission and coatings When light encounters a surface, a fraction of the beam is reflected, another fraction is refracted (transmitted) and the rest is absorbed by the material. In lens design, we must achieve the best transmission while minimizing reflection and absorption. While absorption is usually negligible, reflection can be a real problem: the beam is in fact not only reflected when entering the lens (air-glass boundary) but also when it exits the lens (glass-air). Let s suppose that each surface reflects 3% of incoming light: in this case, a two lenses system has an overall loss of 3*3*3*3 % = 81%. Optical coatings one or more thin layers of material deposited on the lens surface are the typical solution: a few microns of material can dramatically improve image quality, lowering reflection and improving transmission. Transmission depends considerably on the light wavelength: different kind of glasses and coatings helps to improve performance in particular spectral regions, e.g. UV or IR. Generally, good transmission in the UV region is more difficult to achieve. Percent transmittance Tubing Fused silica Optical grade Commercial grade Commercial grade fused quartz Optical grade fused quartz Fused silica Tubing Wavelength, nanometers Fig. 27: Percent transmittence of different kind of glasses. Anti-reflective (AR) coatings are thin films applied to surfaces to reduce their reflectivity through optical interference. An AR coating typically consists of a carefully constructed stack of thin layers with different refractive indices. The internal reflections of these layers interfere with each other so that a wave peak and a wave trough come together and extinction occurs, leading to an overall reflectance that is lower than that of the bare substrate surface. Anti-reflection coatings are included on most refractive optics and are used to maximize throughput and reduce ghosting. Perhaps the simplest, most common anti-reflective coating consists of a single layer of Magnesium Fluoride (MgF 2 ), which has a very low refractive index (approx at 550 nm). Hard carbon anti-reflective HCAR coating: HCAR is an optical coating commonly applied to Silicon and Germanium designed to meet the needs of those applications where optical elements are exposed to harsh environments, such as military vehicles and outdoor thermal cameras. This coating offers highly protective properties coupled with good anti-reflective performance, protecting the outer optical surfaces from high velocity airborne particles, seawater, engine fuel and oils, high humidity, improper handling, etc.. It offers great resistance to abrasion, salts, acids, alkalis, and oil. XIV

258 Optics Vignetting Light that is focused on the sensor can be reduced by a number of internal factors, that do not depend on external factors. Mount vignetting occurs when light is physically blocked on its way to the sensor. Typically this happens when the lens image circle (cross section of the cone of light projected by the lens) is smaller than the sensor size, so that a number of pixels are not hit by light, thus appearing black in the image. This can be avoided by properly matching optics to sensors: for example, a typical 2/3 sensor (8.45 x 7.07 mm, 3.45 µm pixel size) with 11 mm diagonal would require a lens with a (minimum) image circle of 11 mm in diameter. Aperture vignetting is connected to the optics F/#: a lens with a higher F/# (narrower aperture) will receive the same light from most directions, while a lens with a lower F/# will not receive the same amount of light from wide angles, since light will be partially blocked by the edges of the physical aperture. Fig. 28: Example of an image showing vignetting. Fig. 29: Lens with low F/# (left) and high F/# (right) seen from the optical axis (top) and off-axis (button). Cos 4 vignetting describes the natural light falloff caused by light rays reaching the sensor at an angle. The light falloff is described by the cos^4(θ) function, where θ is the angle of incoming light with respect to the optical axis in image space. The drop in intensity is more significant at wide incidence angles, causing the image to appear brighter at the center and darker at the edges. Light intensity Fig. 30: Cos 4 vignetting. Light fall off coused by θ the angle with incoming light with respect to the optical axis. XV

259 Lens types Many different types of optics are available in the industry, each tailored for different uses and applications. Below is a brief overview of the most common lens types, along with their working principles and common applications. TELECENTRIC LENSES Telecentric lenses represent a special class of optics designed to only collect collimated light ray bundles (i.e. parallel to the optical axis, see Fig. 31), thus eliminating perspective errors. Since only rays parallel to the optical axis are accepted, the magnification of a telecentric lens is independent of the object location. This unique feature makes telecentric lenses perfectly suited for measurement applications, where perspective errors and changes in magnification can lead to inconsistent measurements. Because of its design, the front element of a telecentric lens must be at least as large as the desired FOV, making these lenses inadequate to image very large objects. Parallel rays infinity Entrance pupil infinity The following drawings (Fig. 32) show the difference between common optics (entocentric) and telecentric lenses. Fixed focal length lenses are entocentric lenses, meaning that they collect rays diverging from the optical axis. This allows them to cover large FoVs but since magnification is different at different working distances, these lenses are not suited to determine the true dimensions of an object. Fig. 31: Telecentric optics accepts only rays parallel to the optics axis. a) b) Fig. 32: a) The design of a telecentric lens is such that objects at different distances from the lens appear to have the same size. Fig. 32: b) With entocentric optics, a change in the working distance is seen on the sensor as perspective error. Benefits of bi-telecentric lenses Better Magnification Constancy Standard telecentric lenses accept ray cones whose axis is parallel to the main optical axis; if the lens is only telecentric in object space, ray cones passing through the optical system reach the detector from different angles depending upon the field position. Moreover the optical wavefront is completely asymmetric since incoming telecentric rays become non-telecentric in image space. As a consequence, the spots generated by ray cones on the detector plane change in shape and dimension from point to point in image space (the point-spread function becomes non-symmetrical and a small circular spot grows larger and turns elliptical as you move from the image center towards the borders). Even worse, when the object is displaced, rays coming from a certain field point generate a spot that moves back and forth over the image plane, thus causing a significant change in magnification. For this reason non bi-telecentric lenses show a lower magnification constancy although their telecentricity might be very good if measured only in the object space. XVI

260 Optics Bi-telecentric lenses are telecentric in both object and image space, which means that principal rays are parallel not only when entering but also when exiting the lens. This feature is essential to overcome all the accuracy issues concerned with mono-telecentric lenses such as point spread function inhomogeneity and lack of magnification constancy through the field depth. detector detector a) non bi-telecentric b) bi-telecentric Fig. 33: (a) In a non image space telecentric lens (left) ray cones strike the detector at different angles. Fig. 33: (b) In a bi-telecentric lens (right) ray cones are parallel and reach the image sensor in a way independent on the field position. Increased field depth Field depth is the maximum acceptable displacement of an object from its best focus position. Beyond this limit the image resolution becomes poor, because the rays coming from the object can t create sufficiently small spots on the detector: blurring effect occurs because geometrical information carried by the optical rays spread over too many image pixels. Depth of field basically depends upon the optics F/#, which is inversely proportional to the lens aperture diameter: the higher the f-number the larger the field depth, with a quasi-linear dependence. Increasing the F/# reduces ray cones divergence, allowing for smaller spots to form onto the detector; however raising the F/# over certain values introduces diffraction effects which limit the maximum achievable resolution. Bi-telecentricity is beneficial in maintaining a very good image contrast even when looking at very thick objects (see Fig. 34): the symmetry of the optical system and the rays parallelism help the image spots with staying symmetrical, which reduces the blur effect. This results in a field depth being perceived as 20-30% larger compared to non bi-telecentric optics. Fig. 34: Image of a thick object viewed throughout its entire depth by a bi-telecentric lens. Even detector illumination Bi-telecentric lenses boast a very even illumination of the detector, which comes useful in several applications such as LCD, textile and print quality control (Fig. 35). When dichroic filters have to be integrated in the optical path for photometric or radiometric measurements, bi-telecentricity assures that the ray fan axis strikes the filter normal to its surface, thus preserving the optical band-pass over the whole detector area. Fig. 35: A bi-telecentric lens is interfaced with a tunable filter in order to perform high resolution colour measurements. The image-side telecentricity ensures that the optical bandpass is homogeneous over the entire filter surface and delivers an even illumination of the detector, provided the object is evenly illuminated too. XVII

261 How to choose the right telecentric lens Having fixed working distance and aperture, telecentric lenses are classified by their magnification and image circle. Choosing the right telecentric lens is easy: we must find the magnification under which the image fit the sensor. Example. We need to measure the geometrical feature of a mechanical part (nut) using a telecentric lens and a 2048 x 2048, 5.5 µm sensor. The nut is inscribed in a 10 mm diameter circle with 2 mm uncertainty on the sample position. What is the best choice? Given the camera resolution and pixel size (2048 x 2048 pix, 5.5 µm), the sensor dimensions are calculated to be x mm. The FOV must contain a 12 mm diameter circle, hence the minimum magnification required is 0.938X. The Opto Engineering TC23009 telecentric lens (M=1.000X, image circle 11 mm) would give a FOV of mm x mm, but because of mechanical vignetting the actual FOV is only a 11 mm diameter circle. In this case, if a more accurate part placement cannot be guaranteed, a lens with lower mag or a larger image circle must be chosen. Using the Opto Engineering TC2MHR016-x lens (M=0.767X, image circle 16.0 mm) we find a FOV of x mm which is a very close match. UV TELECENTRIC OPTICS Since the diffraction limit allows higher resolution at shorter wavelengths (see Fig. 36), UV optics can reach superior results compared to standard lenses and can efficiently operate with pixels as small as 1.75 µm. For example, the Opto Engineering TCUV series telecentric lenses operate in the near UV range and deliver extremely high resolution for very demanding measurement applications. Contrast 100% 80% 60% 40% VIS lens UV lens cut-off frequency, VIS cut-off frequency, UV 20% 0% Spacial frequency (line pairs/mm) Fig. 36:The graph shows the limit performances (diffraction limit) of two lenses operating at working F/# 8. The standard lens operates at 587 nm (green light) while the UV lens operates at 365 nm. XVIII

262 Optics Why Opto Engineering telecentric lenses don t integrate an iris? Our TC lenses don t feature an iris, but we can easily adjust the aperture upon request prior to shipping the lens, without any additional costs or delays for the customer. The reasons why our lenses don t feature an iris are so many that the proper question would be why other manufacturers integrate irises? : adding an iris makes a lens more expensive because of a feature that would only be used once or twice throughout the product life iris insertion makes the mechanics less precise and the optical alignment much worse we would be unable to test the lenses at the same aperture that the customer would be using iris position is much less precise than a metal sheet aperture: this strongly affects telecentricity the iris geometry is polygonal, not circular: this changes the inclination of the main rays across the FOV, thus affecting the lens distortion and resolution irises cannot be as well centered as fixed, round, diaphragms: proper centering is essential to ensure a good telecentricity of the lens only a circular, fixed, aperture makes brightness the same for all lenses an adjustable iris is typically not flat and this causes uncertainty in the stop position, which is crucial when using telecentric lenses! iris is a moving part that can be dangerous in most industrial environments. Vibrations could easily disassemble the mechanics or change the lens aperture the iris setting can be accidentally changed by the user and that would change the original system configuration end users prefer having less options and only a few things that have to be tuned in a MV system apertures smaller than what is delivered by OE as a standard will not make sense as the resolution will decay because of diffraction limit; on the other hand, much wider apertures would cause a reduction of the field depth. The standard aperture of OE lenses is meant to optimize image resolution and field depth. Why OE Telecentric lenses don t feature a focusing mechanism? As with the iris, a focusing mechanism would generate a mechanical play in the moving part of the lens, thus making it worse the centering of the optical system and also causing trapezoidal distortion. Another issue is concerned with radial distortion: the distortion of a telecentric lens can be kept small only when the distances between optical components are set at certain values: displacing any element from the correct position would increase the lens distortion. A focusing mechanism makes the positioning of the lenses inside the optical system uncertain and the distortion value unknown: the distortion would then be different from the values obtained in our quality control process. XIX

263 360 OPTICS Many machine vision applications require a complete view of an object surface since many features to be inspected are located on the object sides rather than on top. Most cylindrical objects such as bottles and containers, as well as many kinds of mechanical parts require an inspection of the side surfaces to detect scratches and impurities or to read barcodes or, again, to ensure that a label has been printed correctly. In these cases, the most common approach is to use multiple cameras (usually 3 or 4) in order to achieve several side views of the part, in addition to the top view. This solution, besides increasing the cost of the system, often creates a bottleneck in the system performances, since the electronics or software must process different images from different cameras simultaneously. In other cases, vision engineers prefer to scan the outer surface with line scan camera systems. This approach also shows many technical and cost disadvantages: the object must be mechanically rotated in the FOV which also affects the inspection speed; moreover, line-scan cameras require very powerful illumination. Also, the large size of linear detectors increases the optical magnification of the system, thus reducing field depth. The 360 optics category encompasses different optical solutions that capture rays diverging from the object (see Fig. 37), thus imaging not only the object surface in front of the lens, but also the object s lateral surface (see optical diagram below). The following images illustrate the working principle applied to a pericentric lens (PC), a catadioptric lens (PCCD), a pinhole lens (PCHI) and a boroscope lens (PCPB). Other 360 optical solutions combine telecentric optics and mirror arrays, allowing you to get a complete view of a sample with just one camera (TCCAGE, PCPW and PCMP series). Convergent rays Entrance pupil Fig. 37: Pericentric lens type. The entrance pupil is located in front of the lens. diameter Fig. 38: Opto Engineering PC lens optical scheme, sample image and unwrapped image. Fig. 39: Opto Engineering PCCD optical scheme, sample image and unwrapped image. XX

264 Optics Fig. 40: Opto Engineering PCHI optical scheme, sample image and unwrapped image. Fig. 41: Opto Engineering PCPB optical scheme, sample image and unwrapped image. Fig. 42: Opto Engineering TCCAGE optical scheme and sample image. Fig. 43: Opto Engineering PCPW: optical scheme and sample image. Fig. 44: Opto Engineering PCMP : optical scheme and sample image. MACRO LENSES Macro lenses are fixed focal length lenses whose working distance is comparable to their focal length. The recommended working distance from the object is usually fixed, hence macro optics are usually described by their magnification. Since macro lenses are specifically designed to image small and fixed FoVs, they tend to have extremely low geometrical distortion. For example, the distortion of Opto Engineering MC series lenses range from <0.05% to <0.01%. XXI

265 FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES Fixed focal length lenses are entocentric lenses, meaning that they collect rays diverging from the optical axis (see Fig. 45). Fixed focal length lenses are commonly used optics in machine vision, being affordable products that are well suited for standard applications. Knowing the basic parameters - focal length and sensor size - it is easy to calculate the field of view and working distance; the focus can be adjusted from a minimum working distance to infinity; usually also the iris is controlled mechanically, allowing you to manually adjust the lens F/# and consequently the light intensity, field depth and resolution. Example. A ceramic tile (100 x 80 mm) must be inspected with a fixed focal length lens from 200 mm away. Which lens would you choose? The Camera sensor has 2592 x 1944 res, with 2.2 µm pixels. Recalling basic lens equations: we find: 1/s (+) 1/s (-) = 1/f(+) M = h /h = s /s 1/s ( h/h - 1 ) = 1/f Diverging rays thus or consequently: WD = - s = - f ( h/h - 1 ) Entrance pupil and also f = s / ( h/h - 1 ) h = h ( 1 + s/ f ) Fig. 45: Entocentric optics accept rays diverging from the lens. Fixed focal length lenses are inexpensive and versatile, but they are not suitable for all applications. They usually introduce significant perspective errors and geometric distortion that are incompatible with precision measurement applications. Also, the manually adjustable iris and focus introduce some mechanical play, which makes these lenses not ideal for applications requiring very consistent and repeatable settings. keeping in mind that s and h (object position with respect to the lens and image height) are customarily negative, while f and h (focal length and object height) are customarily positive. Also, in machine vision, we take h as the maximum value for the desired field of view and h as the short side of the sensor, to make sure the minimum requrested field of view is covered. Given the sensor resolution and pixel size, we can calculate the sensor dimensions. We set h = mm and h = 100 mm. Hence, setting s = mm we find f = 8.2 mm. With a standard 8 mm lens we would cover a slightly wider FOV (137 x 102 mm). Extension tubes For most standard lenses the working distance (WD) is not a fixed parameter. The focusing distance can be changed by adjusting a specific knob. Nevertheless, there is always a minimum object distance (MOD) below which focusing becomes impossible. Adding an extension tube (see Fig. 46) between the lens and the camera increases the back focal length, making it possible to reduce the MOD. This also increases the magnification of the lens or, in other words, reduces the FOV. While very common in the vision industry, this procedure should be avoided as much as possible, because it degrades the lens performance (resolution, distortion, aberrations, brightness, etc.). In these cases, it is recommended to use lenses natively designed to work at short working distances (macro lenses). Fig. 46: Extension tubes for fixed focal length lenses. XXII

266 Optics VARIFOCAL LENSES Varifocal lenses are lenses with variable focal length, which can be adjusted by moving groups of optical elements with respect to each other inside the lens. The variable focal length allows for multiple combinations of working distances and magnifications, offering several different configurations with a single lens. Varifocal lenses, though, have the same reliability issues of fixed focal length lenses, plus more uncertainty caused by the relative motion of lens groups inside the assembly. ZOOM LENSES Zoom lenses (parfocal lenses) are a special type of varifocal optics in which the working distance is kept constant when changing focal length (i.e. focus is maintained throughout the process). Actually, a zoom lens is generally defined as a lens that can change magnification without changing its working distance: in this category, we can also find macro zoom (e.g. Opto Engineering MCZR and MZMT) and telecentric zoom lenses (Opto Engineering TCZR). SCHEIMPFLUG OPTICS Schempflug optics are a special class of lenses, either of the fixed focal, macro or telecentric type, designed to meet the Scheimpflug criterion. Suppose that the object plane of an optical setup is not parallel to the image plane (e.g. a camera-lens system imaging a flat target at 45 ): this causes the image to be sharp only where the focus plane and the target plane intersect. Since the image and object planes are conjugated, tilting the first plane by a certain angle will also cause the latter to tilt by a corresponding angle. Once the focus plane is aligned to the target plane, focus across the image is restored. The angle at which the sensor plane must be tilted is given by the Scheimpflug criterion: tan(θ ) = M tan(θ) θ = atan(m tan(θ)) where M is the lens magnification, θ is the image plane tilt angle (i.e. on the sensor side) and θ is the object plane tilt angle. It is clear that at high magnifications this condition is impossible to meet, since an object plane tilted by 45 would require to tilt the sensor by 80, causing severe mechanical and vignetting issues (cf. Fig. 47, where M=5 black, M=1 blue, M=0.25 red) Sensor angle M=5 60 M= M=0.25 Object angle Fig. 47: Relationship between abject (θ) and sensor angle (θ ) at different magnification M. Image plane tilting is practically realized by changing the angle of the camera with respect to the optics by means of special tiltable mounts: the picture below illustrates an example of a Scheimpflug telecentric setup. Fig. 48: Example of Scheimpflug telecentric setup. XXIII

267 IR OPTICS In machine vision, we find a number of interesting and high tech applications of IR radiation: the imaging process in some regions of the spectrum requires specifically designed lenses called IR optics. All objects with an absolute temperature over 0 K emit infrared (IR) radiation. Infrared radiant energy is determined by the temperature and emissivity of an object and is characterized by wavelengths ranging from 0.76 μm (the red edge of the visible range) to 1000 μm (beginning of microwaves range). The higher the temperature of an object, the higher the spectral radiant energy, or emittance, at all wavelengths and the shorter the peak wavelength of the emissions. Due to limitations on detector range, IR radiation is often divided into three smaller regions based on the response of various detectors. SWIR ( μm) is also called the «reflected infrared» region since radiation coming from a light source is reflected by the object in a similar manner as in the visible range. SWIR imaging requires some sort of illumination in order to image an object and can be performed only if some light, such as ambient moon light or stars light is present. In fact the SWIR region is suitable for outdoor, night-time imaging. SWIR imaging lenses are specifically designed, optimized, and anti-reflection coated for SWIR wavelenghts. Indium Gallium Arsenide (InGaAs) sensors are the primary sensors used in SWIR, covering typical SWIR band, but can extend as low as µm to as high as 2.5 µm. A large number of applications that are difficult or impossible to perform using visible light are possible using SWIR InGaAs based cameras: nondestructive identification of materials, their composition, coatings and other characteristics, Electronic Board Inspection, Solar cell inspection, Identifying and Sorting, Surveillance, Anti-Counterfeiting, Process Quality Control, etc... When imaging in SWIR, water vapor, fog, and certain materials such as silicon are transparent. Additionally, colors that appear almost identical in the visible may be easily differentiated using SWIR. MWIR (3-5 μm) and LWIR (8-14 μm) regions are also referred to as thermal infrared because radiation is emitted from the object itself and no external light source is needed to image the object. Two major factors determine how bright an object appears to a thermal imager: the object s temperature and its emissivity (a physical property of materials that describes how efficiently it radiates). As an object gets hotter, it radiates more energy and appears brighter to a thermal imaging system. Atmospheric obscurants cause much less scattering in the MWIR and LWIR bands than in the SWIR band, so cameras sensitive to these longer wavelengths are highly tolerant of smoke, dust and fog. MWIR collects the light in the 3 μm to 5 μm spectral band. MWIR cameras are employed when the primary goal is to obtain high-quality images rather than focusing on temperature measurements and mobility. The MWIR band of the spectrum is the region where the thermal contrast is higher due to blackbody physics; while in the LWIR band there is quite more radiation emitted from terrestrial objects compared to the MWIR band, the amount of radiation varies less with temperature: this is why MWIR images generally provide better contrast than LWIR. For example, the emissive peak of hot engines and exhaust gasses occurs in the MWIR band, so these cameras are especially sensitive to vehicles and aircraft. The main detector materials in the MWIR are InSb (Indium antimonide) and HgCdTe (mercury cadmium telluride) also referred to as MCT and partially lead selenide (PbSe). LWIR collects the light in the 8 μm to 14 μm spectral band and is the wavelength range with the most available thermal imaging cameras. In fact, according to Planck s law, terrestrial targets emit mainly in the LWIR. LWIR systems applications include thermography/temperature control, predictive maintenance, gas leak detection, imaging of scenes which span a very wide temperature range (and require a broad dynamic range), imaging through thick smoke, etc... The two most commonly used materials for uncooled detectors in the LWIR are amorphous silicon (a-si) and vanadium oxide (VOx), while cooled detectors in this region are mainly HgCdTe. Athermalization. Any material is characterized by a certain temperature expansion coefficient and responds to temperature variations by either increasing or decreasing its physical dimensions. Thus, thermal expansion of optical elements might alter a system s optical performance causing defocusing due to a change of temperature. An optical system is athermalized if its critical performance parameters (such as Modulation Transfer Function, Back Focal Length, Effective Focal Length, ) do not change appreciably over the operating temperature range. Athermalization techniques can be either active or passive. Active athermalization involves motors or other active systems to mechanically adjust the lens elements position, while passive athermalization makes use of design techniques aimed at compensating for thermal defocusing, by combining suitably chosen lens materials and optical powers (optical compensation) or by using expansion rods with very different thermal expansion coefficients that mechanically displace a lens element so that the system stays in focus (mechanical compensation). XXIV

268 Lighting Illumination is one of the most critical components of a machine vision system. The selection of the appropriate lighting component for a specific application is very important to ensure that a machine vision system performs its tasks consistently and reliably. The main reason is that improper illumination results in loss of information which, in most cases, cannot be recovered via software. This is why the selection of quality lighting components is of primary importance: there is no software algorithm capable of revealing features that are not correctly illuminated. To make the most appropriate choice, one must consider many different parameters, including: Lighting geometry Light source type Wavelength Surface property of the material to be inspected or measured (e.g. color, reflectivity) Item shape Item speed (inline or offline application) Mechanical constraints Environment considerations Cost Since many parameters must be considered, the choice can be difficult and sometimes the wisest advice is to perform feasibility studies with different light types to reveal the features of interest. On the other hand, there are a number of simple rules and good practices that can help select the proper lights and improve the image quality. For every application, the main objectives are the following: 1. Maximizing the contrast of the features that must be inspected or measured 2. Minimizing the contrast of the features of no interest 3. Getting rid of unwanted variations caused by: a. Ambient light b. Differences between items that are non-relevant to the inspection task

269

270

271 Light in machine vision In machine vision, light is mostly characterized by its wavelength, which is generally expressed in nm (nanometers). Basically light is electromagnetic radiation within a certain portion of the electromagnetic spectrum (cf. Fig. 1): it can be quasi-monochromatic (which means that it is characterized by a narrow wavelength band, i.e. with a single color) or white (distributed across the visible spectrum, i.e. it contains all colors). Light visible to the human eye has wavelengths in the range of nm, between the infrared (with longer wavelengths) and the ultraviolet (with shorter wavelengths): special applications might require IR or UV light instead of visible light. UV VISIBLE INFRARED 1000 X-RAYS MICROWAVES SWIR MWIR LWIR Fig. 1: Electromagnetic specturm. XXVIII

272 Lighting Basically, light interacts with materials (Fig. 2) by being Reflected and/or Transmitted and/or Absorbed Additionally, when light travels across different media it refracts, i.e. it changes direction. The amount of refraction is inversely proportional to the light wavelength; i.e. violet light rays are bent more than red ones. Reflected Emitted Transmitted This means that light with short wavelengths gets scattered more easily than light with long wavelengths when hitting a surface and is therefore, generally speaking, more suited for surface inspection applications. In fact, if we ideally consider wavelength as the only parameter to be considered from the previous list, blue light is advised for applications such as scratch inspection while longer wavelengths such as red light are more suited for enhancing the silhouette of transparent materials. Incident Absorbed Fig. 2: Interaction of light with matter: reflection, adsorption and transmission. LED illumination There are many different types of light sources available (Fig. 3) including the following: Incandescent lamps Fluorescent lamps LED lights LED lights are by far the most commonly used in machine vision because they offer a number of advantages, including: Fast response Suitable for pulse and strobe operations Mechanical resistance Longer lifetime, higher output stability Ease of creating various lighting geometry Relative intensity (%) Mercury Quartz Halogen / Tungsten Daytime sunlight 0.8 Fluorescent 0.6 Xenon Wavelength (nm) White LED Red LED Fig. 3: Emission spectra of different light sources. Incandescent lamps are the well-known glass bulbs filled with low pressure, inert gas (usually argon) in which a thin metal wire (tungsten) is heated to high temperatures by passing an electric current through it. The glowing metal emits light on a broad spectrum that goes from 400 nm up to the IR. The result is a white, warm light (corresponding to a temperature of 2870 K) with a significant amount of heat being generated. Fluorescent lamps are vacuum tubes in which UV light is first produced (by interaction between mercury vapor and highly energetic electrons produced by a cathode) and then is adsorbed by the tube walls, coated with fluorescent and phosphorescent material. The walls then re-emit light over a spectrum that again covers the whole visible range, providing a colder white light source. LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) produce light via the annihilation of an electronhole pair in a positive/negative junction of a semiconductor chip. The light produced by an LED depends on the materials used in the chip and is characterized by a narrow spectrum, i.e. it is quasi-monochromatic. White light is produced as in the fluorescent lamps, but the blue light is absorbed and re-emitted in a broad spectrum slightly peaked in the blue region. XXIX

273 LED power supply and output An LED illuminator can be controlled by either setting the voltage V across the circuit or by directly feeding the circuit with electric current I. One important consideration is that the luminous flux produced by a single LED increases almost linearly with the current while it does not do so with respect to the voltage applied: 1% uncertainty on the driving current will translate into 1% luminance uncertainty, while 1% uncertainty on the input voltage can result in a several percentage points variation (Fig. 4). For this reason, it is suggested to directly regulate the current and not the voltage, so that the light output is stable, tightly controlled and highly repeatable. Forward current (ma) Forward voltage vs. Forward current Forward voltage (V) Forward current vs Relative luminous flux For example, in measurement applications, it is paramount to obtain images with a stable grey level background to ensure consistency of the results: this is achieved by avoiding light flickering and ensuring that the LED forward current of the telecentric light is precisely controlled: this is why Opto Engineering LTLCHP telecentric illuminators feature builtin electronics designed to have less than 1 variation in LED forward current intensity leading to very stable performances. Relative luminous flux (a.u.) Forward current (ma) LED pulsing and strobing Fig. 4: LED current, tension and light output graphs. LEDs can be easily driven in a pulsed (on/off) regime and can be switched on and off in sequence, turning them on only when necessary. Usage of LEDs in pulsed mode has many advantages including the extension of their lifespan. If the LED driving current (or voltage) is set to the nominal value declared by the LED manufacturer for continuous mode, we talk about pulsed mode: the LED is simply switched on and off. LEDs can also be driven at higher intensities (i.e. overdriven) than the nominal values, thus producing more light but only for a limited amount of time: in this case we say that the LED is operated in strobed mode. Strobing is needed whenever the application requires an increased amount of light to freeze the motion of fast moving objects, in order to eliminate the influence of ambient light, to preserve the LED lifetime and to synchronize the ON time of your light (ton) with the camera and item to be inspected. To properly strobe an LED light, a few parameters must be considered (Fig. 5 and 6): t on max Trigger signal T t off Fig. 5: Duty cycles parameters. Trigger signal Max pulse width or ON time (t on max ): the maximum amount of time for which the LED light can be switched on at the maximum forward current. Duty cycle D is defined as (usually expressed in %): Acquisition time Camera acquiring Acquisition time Camera acquiring D = t on /(t on +t off ) t on t on Where t off is the amount of time for which the LED light is off and T = t on +t off is the cycle period. The duty cycle gives the fraction in % of the cycle time during which the LEDs can be switched on. The period T can be also given as the cycle frequency f = 1/T, expressed in Hertz (Hz). Strobed LED light output t off LED constant light output Fig. 6: Triggering and strobing. Strobed LED light output Time XXX

274 Lighting LED lifetime The life of an LED is defined as the time that it takes for the LED luminance to decrease to 50% of its initial luminance at an ambient temperature of 25 C. Line speed, strobing and exposure time When dealing with online applications, there are some important parameters that have to be considered. Specifically, depending on the object speed and image sharpness that is required for the application, the camera exposure time must be always set to the minimum in order to freeze motion and avoid image blurring. Additionally, black and opaque objects that tend to absorb instead of reflecting light, are particularly critical. As an example, let s suppose to inspect an object moving with speed v o using a lens with magnification m and a camera with pixel size p. The speed of the object on the sensor will be m times v o : v i = m v o, Therefore the space travelled by the object x i during the exposure time t is x i = v i t. If this space is greater than the pixel size, the object will appear blurred over a certain number of pixels. Suppose that we can accept a 3 pixels blur: in other words, we require that so that the camera exposure time t is required to be x i = v i t = m v o t < 3 p t < 3 p / (m v o ) For example, using p = 5.5 µm, m = 0.66, v o = 300 mm/s (i.e. a line speed of 10,800 samples/hr on a 100 mm FoV) we find a maximum exposure time of t = 83 µs. At such speed, the amount of light emitted by LED illuminator used in continuous mode is hardly ever enough - so that strobing the illuminator for an equivalent amount of time is the best solution. Another parameter that we can adjust in order to get more light into the system is the lens F/#: by lowering the lens F/# we will gather more light; however, this will lower the depth of field of the system. Moreover, this might also lower the image quality since, in general, a lens performs better in the center and worse towards the edges due to lens aberrations, leading to an overall loss of sharpness. Increasing the camera gain is another way, however this always introduces a certain amount of noise, thus again leading to a degraded image where fewer details can be distinguished. As a result, it is always a good practice to choose sufficiently bright lighting components, allowing you to correctly reveal the features of interest the inspected of object when used in combination with lenses set at the optimum F/# and without the need to digitally increase the camera gain. XXXI

275 Illumination geometries and techniques How to determine the best illumination for a specific machine vision task? There are in fact several aspects that must be taken into account to help you choose the right illumination for your vision system with a certain degree of confidence. Application purpose This is by far the first point that must be clear. If we want to inspect the surface of an object to look for defects or features such as printed text, then front illumination is needed - i.e. light coming from the camera side. Selecting the proper light direction or angle of incidence on the target surface as well as other optical properties such as diffuse or direct light depends on the specific surface features that must be highlighted. If, on the other side, we plan to measure the diameter or the length of an object or we want to locate a through-hole, the best choice to maximize contrast at the edges is back illumination - i.e. light is blocked by the object on its way to the camera. The choice is not so obvious when dealing with more complex situations such as transparent materials and sometimes mixed solutions must be taken into account. Illumination angle Once we have established whether front or back illumination is more suitable, we must set the angle at which light hits the object surface. Although the angle may vary, there are two important subgroups of front and backlight illumination: bright field and dark field illumination. The four combinations that follow are described below (Fig. 7). FRONT LIGHTING FRONT bright field FRONT bright field FRONT dark field Front coaxial and collimated illumination FRONT dark field OBJECT BACK dark field BACK bright field Back coaxial and collimated illumination BACK bright field BACK dark field BACK LIGHTING Fig. 7: Illumination and directionality: the W rule. XXXII

276 Lighting In bright field, front light illumination, light reflected by a flat surface is collected by the optics. This is the most common situation, in which non-flat features (e.g. defects, scratches etc.) can scatter light outside the maximum acceptance angle of the lens, showing dark characteristics on a bright background (the bright field - see Fig. 8 and 10.a 10.b). Bright field, front light can be produced by LED barlights or ringlights, depending on the system symmetry (Fig. 9). In both cases LED light can be direct or diffused by a medium (sometimes the latter is to prefer to avoid uneven illumination on reflective surfaces). Fig. 8: Front bright field illumination scheme. a b Fig. 9: Ringlight (a) and barlight (b) geometry. Fig. 10. a: image of engraved sample with front brigth field illumination (ringlight). Fig. 10.b: image of a metal coin (featuring embossed parts) with front bright field illumination (ringlight). In dark field, front light illumination, reflected light is not collected by the optics. In this way, only scattered light is captured, enhancing the non-planar features of the surface as brighter characteristics on a dark background (the dark field - see Fig. 11 and 13.a - 13.b ). Again, this effect is commonly reproduced by means of low angle ringlights (Fig. 12). Fig. 11: Front dark field illumination scheme. Fig. 12: Low angle ringlight geometry. Fig. 13.a: image of engraved sample with front dark field illumination (ringlight). Fig.13.b: image of a metal coin (featuring embossed parts) with front dark field illumination (ringlight). XXXIII

277 In bright field, backlight illumination, light is either stopped or transmitted by the surface if the material is opaque (Fig. 14) or transparent. In the first case, we see the outline of the object (black object on white background - see Fig. 16 and 18). In the latter, the non-planar features of the transparent object show up dark on a white background; in this second case, contrast is usually low unless the transparent surfaces present sharp curvatures (e.g. air bubble inclusions in plastic). These lighting techniques can be achieved using diffuse backlights (Fig. 15a, 15b and 16) or telecentric illuminators, specifically designed for high accuracy applications (Fig. 17 and 18). Fig. 14: Bright field backlight illumination scheme. Fig. 15.a: Diffuse backlight geometry (back emitting). Fig. 16: image of a plastic cap with backlight illumination. Fig. 15.b: Diffuse backlight geometry (side-emitting). Fig. 17: Telecentric backlight geometry. Fig. 18: image of a precision mechanical component with telecentric backlight illumination. XXXIV

278 Lighting In dark field, backlight illumination, only light transmitted by the sample and scattered by non-flat features will be collected, enhancing such features as bright on the dark background (Fig. 19). This can be obtained by means of ringlights or bar lights positioned behind a transparent sample. Fig. 19: Dark field back light illumination scheme. Coaxial illumination. When front light hits the object surface perpendicular to the object plane, we speak of coaxial illumination. Coaxial illumination can additionally be collimated, i.e. rays are parallel to the optical axis (within a certain degree). To obtain this illumination set up, coaxial boxes are available for use in combination with any type of lens (either fixed focal, macro or telecentric) or telecentric lenses with built-in coaxial illumination can be used (such as Opto Engineering TCCX series). The difference lies in the degree of collimation which results in the amount of contrast that is possible to achieve searching for defects on highly reflective surfaces. See Fig. 21 and 22. Diffuser Fig. 20: Coaxial illumination scheme (non collimated). Fig. 21: Coaxial illumination geometry (standard and collimated). Fig. 22: image of engraved sample with coaxial illumination. XXXV

279 Dome lights and tunnel lights. If an object with a complex curved geometry must be inspected to detect specific surface features, front light illumination coming from different angles is the most appropriate choice in order to get rid of reflections that can lead to uneven illumination: Dome lights are the ideal solution for these type of applications because they are designed to provide illumination coming from virtually any direction (Fig. 23 e 24). In fact, dome lights are sometimes also referred to as cloudy day illuminators because they provide uniform light as on a cloudy day. Another type of lighting geometry is tunnel illumination: these lights are designed to provide uniform illumination on long and thin cylindrical objects and they feature a circular aperture on top (as dome lights). Fig. 23: Dome illumination geometry. Fig. 24: Image of a metal coin (featuring embossed parts) with dome light illumiantion. Combined and advanced illumination solutions. Sometimes in order to inspect very complex object geometries it is necessary to combine different types of lights to effectively reveal surface defects. For example, the combination of a dome and a low angle light is very effective in providing uniform illumination over the entire field of view. An example of combined lighting is the Opto Engineering LTDMLA series, featuring all-in-one dome and low angle ring lights which can be operated simultaneously or independently of each other (see Fig. 25). Fig. 25: Combined light (dome + low angle ringlight) illumination geometry. XXXVI

280 Lighting Telecentric illumination Telecentric illumination is needed in a wide variety of applications including: High speed inspection and sorting: in fact, when coupled with a telecentric lens, the high throughput allows for extremely short exposure times Silhouette imaging for accurate edge detection and defect analysis Measurement of reflective cylindrical objects: diffuse backlights can generate undesired reflections from the edges of shiny round objects, making them look smaller than they are and leading to inaccurate measurements. Since collimated rays are typically much less reflected, telecentric illuminators can effectively eliminate this border effect ensuring accurate and consistent readings (see Fig. 26) Any precision measurement application where accuracy, repeatability and high throughput are key factors Non-collimated back illumination Light coming from a variety of angles Collimated back illumination Parallel rays Fig. 26: Collimated vs diffuse backlight illumination. The use of a collimated light in combination with a telecentric lens increases the natural depth of field of the telecentric lens itself by approximately +20/30% (this however also depends on other factors such as the lens type, light wavelength and pixel size). Additionally, thanks to the excellent light coupling, the distance between the object and the light source can be increased where needed without affecting image quality. This happens because the illuminator s numerical aperture (NA) is lower than the telecentric lens NA. Therefore, the optical system behaves as if the lens had the same NA as the illuminator in terms of field depth, while maintaining the same image resolution given by the actual telecentric lens NA. Collimated light is the best choice if you need to inspect objects with curved edges; for this reason, this illumination technique is widely used in measurement systems for shafts, tubes, screws, springs, o-rings and similar samples. XXXVII

281 Wavelength and optical performance Many machine vision applications require a very specific light wavelength that can be generated with quasi-monochromatic light sources or with the aid of optical filters. In the field of image processing, the choice of the proper light wavelength is key to emphasize only certain colored features of the object being imaged. The relationship between wavelength (i.e. the light color) and the object color is shown in Fig. 27. Using a wavelength that matches the color of the feature of interest will highlight this specific feature and viceversa, i.e. using opposite colors to darken non relevant features (see Fig. 28). For example green light makes green features appear brighter on the image sensor while red light makes green features appear darker on the sensor. On the other hand, white light will contrast all colors, however this solution might be a compromise. Additionally it must be considered that there is a big difference in terms of sensitivity between the human eye and a CMOS or CCD sensor. Therefore it is important to do an initial assessment of the vision system to determine how it perceives the object, in fact what human eyes see might be misleading. Monochromatic light can be obtained in two ways: we can prevent extraneous wavelengths from reaching the sensor by means of optical filters, or we can use monochromatic sources. Optical filters allow only certain wavelengths of light to be transmitted. They can be used either to allow light of a specified wavelength to pass through (band-pass filters) or to block desired wavelengths (e.g. low-pass filters for UV light only). Color filters can block other non-monochromatic light sources often present in industrial environments (e.g. sunlight, ceiling lights etc.), however they also limit the amount of light that actually reaches the sensor. V B G Y O R V B G Y O R R Blue object R Red object R White object B Appears blue Appears red Appears red On the other hand, quasi-monochromatic sources only produce light of a certain wavelength within a usually small bandwidth. Either way, if we select monochromatic (e.g. green) light, every non-green feature will appear dark grey or black on the sensor, depending on the filter bandwidth and the color of the feature. This gives us a simple way to enhance contrast by using monochromatic light with respect to the use of white light (Fig ). WARM COOL V B G Y O R Black object Appears black R V Fig. 27: Relationship between object color and light color. O Y Fig. 28: One way to maximize contrast is to select the light color that is on the opposite side of the wheel of the feature color. In such case, features will appear dark on the image sensor. G B Additionally, in some cases a specific wavelength might be preferred for other reasons: for example, Opto Engineering telecentric lenses are usually optimized to work in the visible range and they offer the best performance in terms of telecentricity and distortion when used with green light. Furthermore, green light is a good tradeoff between the resolution limit (which improves with shorter wavelengths) and the transmission characteristics of common glasses (which in fact have low transmission at short wavelengths). In cases where any wavelength will fit the application, one might choose a specific LED color just based on cost considerations. XXXVIII

282 Lighting Red filter Blue filter Object Object Image Red light is reflected off the red background, but is absorbed by the blue circle. Image Blue light is reflected off the blue circle, but is absortbd by the red background. Fig. 29: Filtering and coloured samples: concept scheme and monochromatic result. Fig. 30: Color camera. Fig. 31: Mono camera. Fig. 32: Red filter. Fig.33: Green filter. Fig. 34: Blue filter. Polarizing filters consist of special materials characterized by a distinctive optical direction: all light oscillating in this direction passes through, while the other components of the wave are suppressed. Since light reflected by a surface is polarized in the direction parallel to the surface itself, such reflection can be significantly reduced or blocked by means of two polarization filters - one on the light and one on the lens. Polarizing filters are used to eliminate glare effects occurring when imaging reflective materials, such as glass, plastic etc. XXXIX

283 Structured illumination Projected pattern Fig. 35: Structured light technique. Seen pattern The projection of a light pattern on a surface can easily give information on its 3D dimensional features (Fig. 35). For example, if we observe a line projected from the vertical direction with a camera looking from a known angle, we can determine the height of the object where the line is projected. This concept can be extended using various different patterns, such as grids, crosses, dots etc. Although both LED and laser sources are commonly used for pattern projection, the latter present several disadvantages (Fig. 36). The laser light profile of the line has a Gaussian shape, being higher at the center and decreasing at the edges of the stripe. Additionally, projecting a laser onto a surface produces the so called speckle effect, i.e. an interference phenomenon that causes loss of edge sharpness of the laser line, due to the high coherent nature of the laser light. With laser emitters the illumination decays both across the line cross section and along the line width. Additionally, lines from laser emitters show blurred edges and diffraction/speckle effects. On the other hand, using LED light for structured illumination will eliminate these issues. Opto Engineering LED pattern projectors feature thinner lines, sharper edges and more homogeneous illumination than lasers. Since light is produced by a finite-size source, it can be stopped by a physical pattern with the desired features, collected by a common lens and projected on the surface. Light intensity is constant through the projected pattern with no visible speckle, since LED light is much less coherent than laser light. Additionally, white light can be easily produced and used in the projection process. LED LASER LED pattern projectors ensure thinner lines, sharper edges and more homogeneous illumination than lasers. With laser emitters the illumination decays both across the line cross section and along the line width. Laser emitters lines are thicker and show blurred edges; diffraction and speckle effects are also present. Fig. 36: LASER vs LED in structured light illumination. Illumination safety and class risks of LEDs according to EN62471 IEC/EN gives guidance for evaluating the photobiological safety of lamps including incoherent broadband sources of optical radiation such as LEDs (but excluding lasers) in the wavelength range from 200 nm through 3000 nm. According to EN light sources are classified into risk groups according to their potential photobiological hazard. Exempt Group Ia Group II Group III No photobiological hazard Risk Group No photobiological hazard under normal behavioral limitations Does not pose hazard due to aversion response to bright light or thermal discomfort Hazardous even for momentary exposure XL

284 Cameras camera is a remote sensing device that can capture and store or transmit images. Light is A collected and focused through an optical system on a sensitive surface (sensor) that converts intensity and frequency of the electromagnetic radiation to information, through chemical or electronic processes. The simplest system of this kind consists of a dark room or box in which light enters only from a small hole and is focused on the opposite wall, where it can be seen by the eye or captured on a light sensitive material (i.e. photographic film). This imaging method, which dates back centuries, is called camera obscura (latin for dark room ), and gave the name to modern cameras. Fig. 1: Working principle of a camera obscura. Fig. 2: Camera obscura View of Hotel de Ville, Paris, France, 2015 Photo by Abelardo Morell. Camera technology has hugely improved in the last decades, since the development of Charge Coupled Device (CCD) and, more recently, of CMOS technology. Previous standard systems, such as vacuum tube cameras, have been discontinued. The improvements in image resolution and acquisition speed obviously also improved the quality and speed of machine vision cameras.

285

286

287 Camera types Matrix and Line scan cameras Cameras used in machine vision applications can be divided in two groups: area scan cameras (also called matrix cameras) and line scan cameras. The first are simpler and less technically demanding, while the latter are preferred in some situations where matrix cameras are not suitable. Area scan cameras capture 2-D images using a certain number of active elements (pixels), while line scan cameras sensors are characterized by a single array of pixels. Sensor sizes and resolution Sensor sizes (or formats) are usually designated with an imperial fraction value i.e. 1/2, 2/3. However, the actual dimensions of a sensor are different from the fraction value, which often causes confusion among users. This practice dates back to the 50 s at the time of TV camera tubes and is still the standard these days. Also, it is always wise to check the sensor specifications, since even two sensors with the same format may have slightly different dimensions and aspect ratios. Spatial resolution is the number of active elements (pixels) contained in the sensor area: the higher the resolution, the smaller the detail we can detect on the image. Suppose we need to inspect a 30 x 40 mm FoV, looking for 40*40 μm defects that must be viewed on at least three pixels. There can be 30*40/(0.04*0.04) = 0.75x10^6 defects. Assuming a minimum of 3 pixels are required to see a defect, we need a camera with at least 2.25 MP pixels. This gives the minimum resolution required for the sensor, although the whole system resolution (also including the lens resolution) must always be assessed. Table 1 gives a brief overview of some common sensor dimensions and resolutions. It is important to underline that sensors can have the same dimensions but different resolution, since the pixel size can vary. Although for a given sensor format smaller pixels lead to higher resolution, smaller pixels are not always ideal since they are less sensitive to light and generate higher noise; also, the lens resolution and pixel size must always be properly matched to ensure optimal system performances. Sensor type 1/3 1/2 2/3 1 4/3 4 K (linear) 8 K (linear) 12 K (linear) Sensor size (mm) 4.80 x x x x x Pixel size (μm) Resolution (mm) 960 x x x x x Resolution (Pixel) 0.6 M 1.2 M 2.5 M 5 M 10 M 4 K 8 K 12 K Table 1: Examples of common sensor sizes and resolutions. Sensor types: CCD and CMOS The most popular sensor technologies for digital cameras are CCD and CMOS. CCD (charged-couple device) sensors consist of a complex electronic board in which photosensitive semiconductor elements convert photons (light) into electrons. The charge accumulated is proportional to the exposure time. Frame transfer (FT) Full frame (FF) Interline (IL) = Progressive scan Light is collected in a potential well and is then released and read out in different ways (cf. Fig. 3). All architectures basically shift the information to a register, sometimes passing through a passive area for storage. The charge is then amplified to a voltage signal that can be read and quantified. Active & exposed pixel area Passive area for storage and transfer Register pixels for read-out Fig. 3: CCD architectures. XLIV

288 Cameras CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) sensors are conceptually different from CCD sensors, since the readout can be done pixel by pixel rather than in sequential mode. In fact, signal is amplified at each pixel position, allowing you to achieve much higher frame rates and to define custom regions of interest (ROIs) for the readout. CMOS and CCD sensors were invented around the same time and, although historically CCD technology was regarded as superior, in recent years CMOS sensors have caught up in terms of performance. Global and rolling shutter (CMOS). In rolling shutter CMOS sensors, the acquisition is progressive from the upper to the last row of pixels, with up to 1/frame rate time difference between the first and the last row. Once the readout is complete, the progressive acquisition process can start again. If the object is moving, the time difference between pixels is clearly visible on the image, resulting in distorted objects (see Fig. 4). Global shutter is the acquisition method in which all pixels are activated simultaneously, thus avoiding this issue. Sensor and camera features Fig. 4: Rolling shutter effect. Sensor characteristics Pixel defects can be of three kinds: hot, warm and dead pixels. Hot pixels are elements that always saturate (give maximum signal, e.g. full white) whichever the light intensity is. Dead pixels behave the opposite, always giving zero (black) signal. Warm pixels produce random signal. These kinds of defects are independent of the intensity and exposure time, so they can be easily removed e.g. by digitally substituting them with the average value of the surrounding pixels. Noise. There are several types of noise that can affect the actual pixel readout. They can be caused by either geometric, physical and electronic factors, and they can be randomly distributed as well as constant. Some of them are presented below: Shot noise is a consequence of the discrete nature of light. When light intensity is very low - as it is considering the small surface of a single pixel the relative fluctuation of the number of photons in time will be significant, in the same way as the heads or tails probability is significantly far from 50% when tossing a coin just a few times. This fluctuation is the shot noise. Dark current noise is caused by the electrons that can be randomly produced by thermal effect. The number of thermal electrons, as well as the related noise, grows with temperature and exposure time. Quantization noise is related to the conversion of the continuous value of the original (analog) voltage value to the discrete value of the processed (digital) voltage. Gain noise is caused by the difference in behavior of different pixels (in terms of sensitivity and gain). This is an example of constant noise that can be measured and eliminated. Sensitivity is a parameter that quantifies how the sensor responds to light. Sensitivity is strictly connected to quantum efficiency, that is the fraction of photons effectively converted into electrons. Dynamic range is the ratio between the maximum and minimum signal that is acquired by the sensor. At the upper limit, pixels appear to be white for every higher value of intensity (saturation), while pixels appear black at the lower limit and below. The dynamic range is usually expressed by the logarithm of the min-max ratio, either in base-10 (decibel) or base-2 (doublings or stops), as shown in table 2. Human eyes, for example, can distinguish objects both under starlight and on a bright sunny day, corresponding to a 90 db difference in intensity. This range, though, cannot be used simultaneously, since the eye needs time to adjust to different light conditions. A good quality LCD has a dynamic range of around 1000:1, and some of the latest CMOS sensors have measured dynamic ranges of about :1 (reported as 14.5 stops). Factor Decibels Stops Table 2: Dynamic range D, Decibels ( 10 log D ) and Stops ( log2 D ). XLV

289 SNR (signal-to-noise ratio) considers the presence of noise, so that the theoretical lowest grey value as defined by the dynamic range is often impossible to achieve. SNR is the ratio between the maximum signal and the overall noise, measured in db. The maximum value for SNR is limited by shot noise (that depends on the physical nature of light, and is this inevitable) and can be approximated as SNR max = sqrt [ maximum saturation capacity in electrons of a single pixel ] SRN gives a limit on the grey levels that are meaningful in the conversion between the analog signal (continuous) and the digital one (discrete). For example, if the maximum SNR is 50 db, a good choice is a 8 bit sensor, in which the 256 grey levels corresponds to 48 db. Using a sensor with higher grey levels would mean registering a certain degree of pure noise. Spectral sensitivity is the parameter describing how efficiently light intensity is registered at different wavelengths. Human eyes have three different kinds of photoreceptors that differ in sensitivity to visible wavelengths, so that the overall sensitivity curve is the combination of all three. Machine vision systems, usually based on CCD or CMOS cameras, detect light from 350 to 900 nm, with the peak zone being between 400 and 650 nm. Different kinds of sensor can also cover the UV spectrum or, on the opposite side, near infrared light, before going to drastically different technology for far wavelengths such as SWIR or LWIR. EMVA Standard 1288 The different parameters that describe the characteristics and quality of a sensor are gathered and coherently described in the EMVA standard This standard illustrates the fundamental parameters that must be given to fully describe the real behavior of a sensor, together with the well-defined measurement methods to get these parameters. The standard parameters are: Sensitivity, linearity of signal versus light intensity and noise Dark current (temperature dependence: optional) Sensor non-uniformity and defect pixels Spectral sensitivity (optional) Sensitivity, linearity and noise Dark current Sensor non-uniformity and defect pixel Spectral sensitivity Measuring procedure Test measuring amount of light at increasing exposure time, from closed shutter to saturation. Quantity of light is measured (e.g. photometer) Measured from dark images taken at increasing exposure times. Since dark current is temperature dependent, behavior at different T can be given A number of images are taken without light (to see hot pixels) and at 50% saturation. Parameters of spatial distortion are calculated using Fourier algorithms Images taken at different wavelengths Quantum efficiency (photons converted over total incoming photons ratio in %) Dark and bright signal non-uniformity Temporal dark noise, in electrons (e-) Dark and bright spectrograms and (logarithmic) histograms Result Absolute sensitivity threshold (minimum number of photons to generate a signal) Dynamic range, in stops Signal registered in absence of light, in electrons per second Spectral sensitivity curve SNR, in stops Saturation capacity (maximum number of electrons at saturation) Camera Parameters Exposure time is the amount of time in which light is allowed to reach the sensor. The higher this value, the higher the quantity of light represented on the resulting image. Increasing the exposure time is the first and easiest solution when light is not enough but it is not free from issues: first, noise always increases with the exposure time; also, blur effects can appear when dealing with moving objects. In fact, if the exposure time is too high, the object will be impressed on a number of different pixels, causing the well-known motion blur effect (see Fig. 5). On the opposite side, too long exposure times can lead to overexposure namely, when a number of pixels reach maximum capacity and thus appear to be white, even if the light intensity on each pixel is actually different Fig. 5: Motion blur effect. XLVI

290 Cameras Frame rate. This is the frequency at which a complete image is captured by the sensor, usually expressed in frames per second (fps). It is clear that the frame rate must be adjusted to the application: a line inspecting 1000 bottles per minute must be able to take images with a minimum frame rate of 1000/60 = 17 fps. Triggering. Most cameras give the possibility to control the beginning of the acquisition process, adjusting it to the application. A typical triggering system is one in which light is activated together with the image acquisition after receiving an input from an external device (e.g. position sensor). This technique is essential when taking images of moving objects, in order to ensure that the features of interest are in the field of view of the imaging system. Gain in a digital camera represents the relationship between the number of electrons acquired and the analog-to-digital units (ADUs) generated, i.e. the image signal. Increasing the gain means increasing the ratio between ADUs and electrons acquired, resulting in an apparent higher brightness of the image. Obviously, this process increases the image noise as well, so that the overall SNR will be unchanged. Binning is the camera feature that combines the readout of adjacent pixels on the sensor, usually in rows/columns, more often in 2 x 2 or 4 x 4 squares (see Fig. 6). Although resolution obviously decreases, there are a number of other features improving. For example, with 2x2 binning, resolution is halved, but sensitivity and dynamic range are increased by a factor of 4 (since the capacitiec of each potential well are summed), readout time is halved (frame rate doubled) and noise is quartered. Horizontal binging Charges from two adjacent pixels in the line are summed and reported out as a single pixel. Vertical binging Charges from adjacent pixels in two lines are summed and reported out as a single pixel. Full binging Charges from groups of four pixels are summed and reported out as a single pixel. Fig. 6: Sensor binning. Digital camera interfaces Camera Link The Automated Imaging Association (AIA) standard, commonly known as Camera Link, is a standard for high-speed transmission of digital video. AIA standard defines cable, connector and camera functionality between camera and frame grabber. Speed. Camera Link offers very high performance in terms of speed. It usually has different bandwidth configurations available, e.g. 255 MB/s, 510 MB/s and 680 MB/s. The bandwidth determines the ratio between image resolution and frame rate: a typical basic-configuration camera can acquire 1 Mpixel image at 50 frames/s or more; a full-configuration camera can acquire 4 Mpixel at more than 100 frames/s. Camera Link HS is the newer standard that can reach 300 MB/s on a single line, and up to 6 GB/s on 20 lines. Costs. Camera Link offers medium- to high-performance acquisition, thus usually requiring more expensive cameras. Also, this standard requires a frame grabber in order to manage the hefty data load, not needed with other standards. Cables. Camera Link standard defines a maximum length of 10 m for the cables; one cable is needed for basic configuration, where two are needed for full configuration cameras. Power over cable. Camera Link offers a PoCL module (Power over Camera Link) that provides power to the camera. Also, several grabbers work with this feature. CPU usage. Since Camera Link uses frame grabbers, which transfer images to a computer as stand-alone modules, this standard does not consume a lot of the system CPU. XLVII

291 CoaXPress CoaXPress is the second standard, developed after Camera Link. It basically consists in power, data and control for the device sent through a coaxial cable. Speed. A single cable can transmit up to MB/s from the device to the frame grabber and 20 Mbit/s of control data from the frame grabber to the remote device, that is 5-6 times the GigE bandwidth. Some models can run also at half speed ( MB/s). At present, up to 4 cables can be connected in parallel to the frame grabber, reaching a maximum bandwidth of approx MB/s. Costs. In the simplest case, CoaXPress uses a single coaxial line to transmit data, and coaxial cables are a simple and low-cost solution. On the other hand, a frame grabber is needed, i.e. an additional card must be installed, resulting in an additional cost on the system. Cables. Maximum cable length is 40 m at full bandwidth, or 100 m at half bandwidth. Power over cable. Voltage supply provided goes up to 13 W at 24 V, that is enough for many cameras. CPU usage. CoaXPress, just like Camera Link, uses frame grabbers, which transfer images to computer as stand-alone modules, i.e. this standard is very light on consuming the system CPU. GiG-E Gig-E Vision is a camera bus technology that standardizes the Gigabit Ethernet, adding a plug and play behavior (such as device discovery) to the latter. For its relatively high bandwidth, long cable length and diffused usage it is a good solution for industrial applications. Speed. Gigabit Ethernet has a theoretical maximum bandwidth of 125 MB/s, that goes down to 100 MB/s when considering practical limitations. This bandwidth is comparable to FireWire standard and is second only to Camera Link. Costs. System cost of GigE vision is moderate; cabling is cheap and it doesn t require a frame grabber. Cables. Cabling length is the keystone of GigE standard, going up to 100 m. This is the only digital solution comparable to analog visioning in terms of cable length, and this feature has helped GigE Vision to replace analog e.g. in monitoring applications. Power over cable. Power over Ethernet (PoE) is often available on GigE cameras. Nevertheless, some Ethernet cards cannot supply enough power, so that powered switch, hub, or a PoE injector must be used. CPU usage. CPU loads of a GigE system can be different depending on drivers used. Filtered drivers are more generic and easer to create and use, but operate on data packets at high level, affecting the system CPU. Optimized drivers are specifically written for a dedicated network interface card, that working at lower lever affects poorly the system CPU load. USB 3.0 The USB (Universal Serial Bus) 3.0 standard is the second revision of USB standard, developed for computer communication. Building on USB 2.0 standard, it provides a higher bandwidth and up to 4.5 W of power. Speed. While USB 2.0 goes up to 60 MB/s, USB 3.0 speed can reach 400 MB/s, similar to the Camera Link standard used in medium configuration. Costs. USB cameras are usually low cost; also, no frame grabber is required. For this reason, USB is the cheaper camera bus in the market. Cables. Passive USB 3.0 cable has a maximum length of about 7 meters, and active USB 3.0 cable can reach up to 50 m with repeaters. Power over cable. USB 3.0 offers power up to 4.5 W that allows to get rid of a separate power cable. CPU usage. USB 3.0 Vision permits image transfer directly into PC memory, without CPU usage. GenIcam Standard The GenICam standard (GENeric Interface for CAMeras) is meant to provide a generic software interface for all cameras, independently from cameras hardware. Some of the new technology standard, anyway, are based on GenICam (es. Camera Link HS, CoaXPress, USB3 Vision). GenICam standard purpose is to provide a plug and play feature for every image system. In consists in three modules that help solving main tasks in machine vision filed in a generic way: GenApi: using a description file (XML), camera configuration and access-control is possible Standard Feature Naming Convention (SFNC): these are recommended names for common features in cameras to reach the goal of interoperability GenTL: describes the transport layer interface for enumerating cameras, grabbing images and transporting them to the user interface XLVIII

292 Vision systems Machine Vision is is the discipline that encompasses imaging technologies and methods to perform automatic inspection and analysis in various applications, such as verification, measurement, process control. A very common approach in machine vision is to provide turnkey vision solutions, i.e. complete systems that can be rapidly and easily configured for use in the field. A vision system is usually made up of every component needed to perform the intended task, such as optics, lighting, cameras and software. When designing and building a vision system, it is important to find the right balance between performance and cost to achieve the best result for the desired application. Usually vision systems are designed to work in on-line applications, where they have an immediate impact on the manufacturing process (real-time systems). A classic example of this on-line concept is the possibility to instantly reject a product deemed non-compliant: the way this decision is made, as well as the object features being evaluated, defines different classes of vision systems.

293

294

295 Applications Vision systems can do many different things: measurement, identification, sorting, code reading, character recognition, robot guidance etc. They can easily interact with other machinery through different communication standards. Here below are some of the main application categories for a vision system: Measurement. One of the most important uses of vision technology is to measure, at various degrees of accuracy, the critical dimensions of an object within predetermined tolerances. Optics, lighting and cameras must be coupled to effective software tools, since only robust subpixeling algorithms will allow to reach the accuracy often required in measurement applications (e.g. even down to 1 um). Defect detection. Here various types of product defects have to be detected for cosmetic and/or safety reasons. Examples of cosmetic flaws are stains, spots, color clumps, scratches, tone variations, etc. while other surface and/or structural defects, such as cracks, dents, but also print errors etc. can have more severe consequences. Verification. The third major aim of a vision system is checking that a product has been correctly manufactured, in a more general sense that goes beyond what previously described; i.e. checking the presence/absence of pills in a blister pack, the correct placement of a seal or the integrity of a printed label. LII

296 Vision systems Types of vision systems Several types of vision systems are available on the market, each being characterized by a different level of flexibility, performance and cost. Vision systems can usually be divided into three classes: PC based, compact and smart camera based. PC based. The classic machine vision system consists of an industrial computer that manages and communicates with all the peripheral devices, such as cameras and lighting, quickly analyzing the information via software. This solution provides high computing power and flexibility, but size and cost can be significant. PC based systems are recommended for very complex applications, where multiple inspection tasks must be carried out at a fast rate with high-performance hardware. Compact. A lighter version of a PC based system is called a Compact vision system. Although it may require some tradeoff between performance and cost, it is often enough for less demanding applications. Compact vision systems usually include a graphics card that acquires and transfers the information to a separate peripheral (e.g. an industrial tablet or an external monitor). Sometimes, compact vision systems not only manage the first level input - lightning, camera and trigger inputs - but also have embedded first level inputs. Photo by Tim Coffey Photography. Source: Integro Technologies Corp. Smart Cameras based. The simplest and most affordable vision systems are based on smart or intelligent cameras, normally used in combination with standard optics (typically a fixed focal length lens) and lighting. Although typically recommended for simpler applications, they are very easy to set up and provide similar functionalities to classic vision systems in a very compact form factor. How a vision system works The architecture of a vision system is strongly related to the application it is meant to solve. Some systems are stand-alone machines designed to solve specific problems (e.g. measurement/identification), while others are integrated into a more complex framework that can include e.g. mechanical actuators, sensors etc. Nevertheless, all vision systems operate are characterized by these fundamental operations: Image acquisition. The first and most important task of a vision system is to acquire an image, usually by means of light-sensitive sensor. This image can be a traditional 2-D image, or a 3-D points set, or an image sequence. A number of parameters can be configured in this phase, such as image triggering, camera exposure time, lens aperture, lighting geometry, and so on. Feature extraction. In this phase, specific characteristics can be extrapolated from the image: lines, edges, angles, regions of interest (ROIs), as well as more complex features, such as motion tracking, shapes and textures. Detection/segmentation. at this point of the process, the system must decide which information previously collected will be passed on up the chain for further elaboration. High-level processing. The input at this point usually consists of a narrow set of data. The purpose of this last step can be to: Classify objects or object s feature in a particular class Verify that the input has the specifications required by the model or class Measure/estimate/calculate specifics parameters as position or dimensions of object or object s features LIII

297

298 Application notes Vision inspection with robotic guidance opens up new opportunities in the quality control process. Opto Engineering machine vision components can be bundled as special optical probes and integrated on a robotic arm, allowing to successfully perform challenging measurements and inspections of parts of different shapes, sizes, materials and colors. 297

299 APPLICATION NOTES Robotics application note This application note presents a wide range of components that can be integrated on a robot arm to create special optical probes for precision measurement, surface inspection or cavity inspection. You can easily build a robot-based system. Just select the suitable optical probe matching your application task (camera + lens + lighting + accessories), add a robot, NI Vision or third-party software along with DigiMetrix Robotics Software libraries: Cavity inspection probe with a boroscopic lens. OPTO ENGINEERING OPTICAL PROBE ROBOT ARM DigiMetrix Robotics Libraries for NI LabVIEW Opto Engineering optical probes DigiMetrix Robotics Libraries Opto Engineering offers a wide range of machine vision lenses, illuminators, cameras and accessories that can be successfully bundled together to create special optical probes for robotic applications. The following application examples present demanding tasks such as precision non contact measurement, cavity inspection and other applications that require adjustments to FOV, working distance, lens focus and aperture. Opto Engineering offers many other components that may be used instead of the ones suggested here, and can also develop custom mounting mechanics to fit specific application requirements. The DigiMetrix Robotics Libraries for National Instruments LabVIEW allow to easily control and guide a robot arm without being experts in advanced robot programming, enabling users to achieve better results in less time. Tight integration with NI Vision libraries opens opportunities for fast and productive Machine Vision based application development. The LabVIEW Real-Time or MS Windows execution platform is connected to a brand-specific robot controller through Ethernet network. The robot controller software provides path kinematics calculation, motion precision and safety, while the LabVIEW program dictates where to go and what to do based on sensors and vision information. As a result just one powerful software development tool is used for entire robot base application programming including Motion, Vision, Sensors, Tests Management and HMI. Robot brands DigiMetrix Libraries support Denso, Epson, Fanuc, Kawasaki, KUKA, Mitsubishi, Yaskawa Motoman and Toshiba Machines 298

300 PRECISION MEASUREMENT PROBES CORE telecentric lenses and illuminators deliver excellent optical performance in a package that is up to 70% smaller than other solutions on the market. Thanks to the unique opto-mechanical design, these innovative optics open up possibilities for new applications with maximum flexibility. They can be mounted not only in tight spaces but also on robotic arms, thus expanding the range of use of this precision measurement setup. CORE robotic optical measurement probe acquiring an image of a shaft. Image of the shaft presents very sharp edges and no reflections, allowing precise 2D measurement. USB 3.0 2/3 camera USB 3.0 1/1.8 camera USB 3.0 1/1.2 camera USB camera RT-mvBF3-2051aG RT-mvBF3-2032aG RT-mvBF3-2024aG RT-mvBF3-2124G 2464 x 2056, 3.45 μm 2064 x 1544, 3.45 μm 1936 x 1216, 5.86 μm 4112 x 3008, 3.45 μm p. 181 p. 181 p. 181 p. 181 Bi-telecentric lens Bi-telecentric lens Telecentric lens Telecentric lens TCCR23048 TCCR12048 TCCR2M048-C TCCR4M048-C FOV: 46.2 x mm FOV: x mm FOV: x mm FOV: x mm p. 10 p. 10 p. 34 p. 34 Telecentric light LTCLCR048-G Green collimated illuminator p. 110 Robot holder clamp USB 3.0 camera cable LED power supply CMHORBCR048 CBUSB3001 RT-SDR Compatible with a ISO /5 robot flange type (4xM5 holes on 31.5 mm diameter) Passive USB 3.0 cable, industrial level, horizontal screw locking, 3 m 24VDC DIN rail power supply p. 200 p. 228 p. 226 Compatible with a 6-axis and SCARA robot arm with 4kg+ payload Ø 31.5 Ø 10 Ø 5.3 CMHORBCR048 metrology probe clamp is designed to mount TCCRxx048 lenses and LTCLCR048-x illuminators on 4 kg+ payload robots. It is compatible with a ISO /5 robot flange type (4xM5 holes on 31.5 mm diameter). This flange type is popular on small/medium robots like Mitsubishi, Epson, KUKA, Denso, Fanuc and others. Ø 5 H Custom mounting clamps can be developed on request to fit larger CORE telecentric optics for up to 97 mm FOV or supplied with a different gripper flange type. CMHORBCR048 gripper flange close-up. Robotic CORE optical probes can be used in a wide variety of measurement and inspection applications where telecentric optics are greatly beneficial but traditionally difficult to integrate because of their size. For example, measuring reflective metal parts with non-telecentric optics is very challenging, due to reflections bouncing off the metal surface that cause inaccurate readings. Often times, fragile or complex-shaped parts cannot be inspected on a conveyor belt and must be checked by a robotic arm moving in tight areas. CORE optical measurement probes overcome the size issue of classic telecentric benches, allowing you to combine robotic motion and telecentric optics to inspect and precisely measure complex parts. 299

301 APPLICATION NOTE Robotics application note SURFACE INSPECTION PROBES In robot guided vision inspection, it is often necessary to both locate an object over a large area and to image small details on it. Inspecting complex objects like a car engine or the car itself requires a robot arm with a probe that can be moved to any desired position. In order to optimize image quality accounting for all variables, such as changing lighting conditions, flexiblle working distances or even different inspection tasks, focus and aperture adjustments are typically required. ENMT series are high resolution fixed focal length lenses with motorized focus and aperture control, allowing for precise and repeatable adjustments of the lens settings. They are ideal for fully automated systems and for installations that require remote control of the optical parameters. Motorized iris and focus allow the user to optimize image capture in different working environments and to accurately perform multiple point inspection of parts of various sizes, shapes and complexity. ENMT lens. USB 3.0 2/3 camera RT-mvBF3-2051aG 2464 x 2056, 3.45 μm p mm motorized lens 16 mm motorized lens 25 mm motorized lens 35 mm motorized lens 50 mm motorized lens ENMT-M1224-MPW2-MM ENMT-M1620-MPW2-MM ENMT-M2518-MPW2-MM ENMT-M3520-MPW2-MM ENMT-M5028-MPW2-MM 5 Mpix, 12 mm lens, motorized focus and aperture 5 Mpix, 12 mm lens, motorized focus and aperture 5 Mpix, 12 mm lens, motorized focus and aperture 5 Mpix, 12 mm lens, motorized focus and aperture 5 Mpix, 12 mm lens, motorized focus and aperture p. 90 p. 90 p. 90 p. 90 p. 90 USB 3.0 camera cable Lens cable Lens motion controller CBUSB3001 CBMT001 MTDV3CH 00A1 Passive USB 3.0 cable, horizontal screw locking, 3 m 12 wires PVC grey cable, circular standard DIN 13Pos Female to DB15M connector cable - 2 m 24VDC DIN rail power supply p. 228 p. 228 p. 224 Compatible with a 6-axis and SCARA robot arm with 2 kg + payload 300

302 CAVITY INSPECTION PROBES Inspecting holes and cavities is a difficult task, that can be further complicated by the complex shape of the part or hard to reach features of interest. Many components for the automotive industry - i.e. engine cylinder blocks - have bores of various sizes located at different positions that need to be checked thoroughly. Boroscopic probes and hole inspection lenses allow to image the inner surface of cavities in perfect focus. They can be mounted on robotic arms to increase the system flexibility, allowing you to perform deep surface scan and to check holes on multiple areas. Inner cavity inspection with a hole inspection lens. Engine block inspection with a boroscopic probe. USB 3.0 2/3 camera USB 3.0 1/1.8 camera RT-mvBF3-2051aG RT-mvBF3-2032aG 2464 x 2056, 3.45 μm 2064 x 1544, 3.45 μm p. 181 p. 181 Hole inspection optics Boroscopic probe PCHI023 PCBP012 Hole inspection optics for 2/3 Boroscopic probe for 1/2 FOV Ø = 10 mm mm FOV Ø = 25 mm mm p. 58 p. 58 Ring illuminator LTRN075W45 Ringlight, ID 28 mm, oblique type, white p. 124 USB 3.0 camera cable LED power supply CBUSB3001 RT-SDR Passive USB 3.0 cable, industrial level, horizontal screw locking, 3m 24VDC DIN rail power supply p. 228 p. 226 Compatible with a 6-axis and SCARA robot arm with 2 kg + payload 301

303 302

304 Sensor size chart telecentric Sensor size chart entrocentric Selection chart illuminators Filter thread compatibility table

305 FOV 1/3 w x h 4.8 x 3.6 mm 1/2.5 w x h 5.70 x 4.28 mm 1/2 w x h 6.4 x 4.8 mm 1/1.8 w x h 7.13 x 5.37 mm 2/3-5 Mpx w x h 8.45 x 7.07 mm 1 to 1.5 mm TCLWD350 RT-HR-4M-110 RT-HR-6M-110 RT-HR-6M-110 RT-HR-6M-110 TCCX350 RT-HR-4F-110 RT-HR-6F-110 RT-HR-6F-110 RT-HR-6F to 2 mm TCLWD250 TCLWD350 TCLWD350 RT-HR-4M-110 TC4M 004-x TCCX250 TCCX350 TCCX350 RT-HR-4F to 3 mm TC TC TCLWD250 TCLWD350 TCLWD350 RT-HR-2M-110 TCLWD250 TCCX250 TCCX350 TCCX350 RT-HR-2F-110 TCCX250 TCLWD250 TC4M 007-x TCCX250 3 to 4 mm TCLWD150 TCLWD150 TC TC TCLWD250 TC4M 004-x TC4M 004-x TCCX150 TCCX150 TCCX250 RT-MP-4F-65 RT-MP-4F-65 TC to 6 mm TC TC TC TC TC TC4M 007-x TC4M 007-x TCLWD100 TC TCLWD150 TCLWD150 TCLWD150 TC4M 009-x TCCX100 TCLWD100 TCCX150 TCCX150 TCCX100 6 to 8 mm TC TC TC TC TC RT-MP-2F-65 TC4M 009-x TCLWD075 TCLWD075 TC TCLWD100 RT-MP-2F-65 TCCX075 TCCX075 TCLWD100 TCCX100 TCLWD066 TCCX066 TCCX100 TCLWD075 TCCX075 8 to 11 mm TC TC TC TC TC RT-MP-1.5F-65 RT-MP-1.5F-65 TCLWD050 TCLWD066 TCLWD066 TCLWD075 TCLWD100 TCCX050 TCCX066 TCCX066 TCCX075 TCCX100 TCLWD066 TCCX066 KAI mm diag x 8.88 mm 1 - KAI mm diag 12.8 x 9.6 mm 11 to 15 mm TC TC TC TC TC TC4MHR 016-x TC4MHR 016-x TC TCLWD050 TCLWD050 TCLWD050 TCLWD075 RT-MP-1F-65 RT-MP-1F-65 TCCX050 TCCX050 TCCX050 TCCX075 TCLWD066 TCCX to 20 mm TC TC TC TC TC TC2MHR 016-x TC2MHR 016-x TC TCLWD050 TC4MHR 024-x TC4MHR 024-x TCCX050 RT-TCL0750-FU RT-TCL0750-FU RT-TCL0450-FU 20 to 30 mm TC TC TC TC TC TC2MHR 024-x TC2MHR 024-x TC TC TC RT-TCL0300-FU TC4MHR 036-x TC4MHR 036-x TC RT-TCL0600-FU RT-TCL0600-FU RT-TCL0450-FU RT-TCL0450-FU 30 to 40 mm TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC TC4MHR 048-x, TCCR4M 048-x TC4MHR 048-x, TCCR4M 048-x TC TC TC TC2MHR 036-x TC2MHR 036-x TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC4MHR 056-x, TCCR4M 056-x 40 to 50 mm TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC TC , TCCR TC4MHR 064-x, TCCR4M 064-x TC4MHR 056-x, TCCR4M 056-x TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC2MHR 048-x, TCCR2M 048-x TC4MHR 064-x, TCCR4M 064-x TC TC TC RT-TCL0300-FU TC2MHR 048-x, TCCR2M 048-x TC , TCCR TC , TCCR RT-TCL0300-FU 50 to 70 mm TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC2MHR 056-x, TCCR2M 056-x TC2MHR 056-x, TCCR2M 056-x TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC4MHR 080-x, TCCR4M 080-x TC4MHR 080-x, TCCR4M 080-x TC TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC TC TC2MHR 064-x, TCCR2M 064-x TC2MHR 064-x, TCCR2M 064-x TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC4MHR 096-x, TCCR4M 096-x TC4MHR 096-x, TCCR4M 096-x TC , TCCR TC to 100 mm TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC2MHR 080-x, TCCR2M 080-x TC2MHR 080-x, TCCR2M 080-x TC TC TC TC , TCCR TC TC4MHR 120-x TC4MHR 120-x TC TC , TCCR TC TC , TCCR TC , TCCR TC2MHR 096-x, TCCR2M 096-x TC2MHR 096-x, TCCR2M 096-x TC TC TC , TCCR TC TC4MHR 144-x TC TC TC to 150 mm TC TC TC TC , TCCR TC TC2MHR 120-x TC4MHR 144-x TC TC TC TC TC TC4MHR 192-x TC2MHR 120-x TC TC TC TC TC2MHR 144-x TC4MHR 192-x TC TC TC TC4MHR 240-x TC2MHR 144-x TC TC TC2MHR 192-x 150 to 200 mm TC TC TC TC TC4MHR 240-x TC TC TC TC TC2MHR 192-x TC TC to 300 mm TC TC TC

306 SENSOR SIZE SENSOR SIZE CHART TELECENTRIC KAI-4022/ mm diag 15.2 x 15.2 mm TC4M 004-x 4/3 - KAI mm diag 18.1 x 13.6 mm Line - 2k 2k x 10 µm mm TC4M 007-x TC4M 004-x TC 16M 009-x Line - 4k 4k x 7 µm mm TC4M 009-x TC4M 007-x TC 16M 009-x Line - 8k 8k x 5 µm mm Full frame - 35mm w x h 36 x 24 mm TC4M 009-x TC 16M 012-x TC 16M 012-x TC 16M 009-x TC 16M 009-x TC 16M 018-x TC4MHR 016-x TC 16M 018-x TC 16M 012-x TC 16M 012-x TC4MHR 016-x TC 16M 018-x TC4MHR 024-x TC4MHR 024-x TC 16M 036-x TC 16M 036-x TC 16M 018-x TC 16M 048-x TC4MHR 036-x TC4MHR 036-x TC 16M 056-x TC 16M 048-x TC 16M 036-x TC 16M 036-x TC 16M 064-x TC4MHR 048-x, TCCR4M 048-x TC4MHR 048-x, TCCR4M 048-x TC4K060-x TC 16M 056-x TC 16M 048-x TC4MHR 056-x, TCCR4M 056-x TC 16M 080-x Line - 8k 8k x 7 µm 57.3 mm Line -16k 16k x 3.5 µm 57.3 mm Line - 2k 12k x 5 µm 61.4 mm Line - 12k 12k x 5.2 µm 62.4 mm TC4MHR 064-x, TCCR4M 064-x TC4MHR 056-x, TCCR4M 056-x TC 16M 096-x TC4K060-x TC 16M 048-x TC 16M 056-x TC12K 064-x TC12K 064-x TC12K 064-x TC12K 064-x TC4MHR 080-x, TCCR4M 080-x TC4MHR 064-x, TCCR4M 064-x TC4K090-x TC 16M 064-x TC 16M 056-x TC 16M 064-x TC 16M 080-x TC4MHR 096-x, TCCR4M 096-x TC4MHR 080-x, TCCR4M 080-x TC 16M 120-x TC 16M 096-x TC 16M 064-x TC 16M 080-x TC12K 080-x TC12K 080-x TC12K 080-x TC12K 080-x TC4MHR 096-x, TCCR4M 096-x TC16M 144-x TC4K090-x TC 16M 080-x TC 16M 096-x TC4K120-x TC 16M 120-x TC4MHR 120-x TC4MHR 120-x TC16M 192-x TC16M 144-x TC 16M 096-x TC 16M 120-x TC12K 120-x TC12K 120-x TC12K 120-x TC12K 120-x TC4MHR 144-x TC4MHR 144-x TC4K180-x TC4K120-x TC 16M 120-x TC16M 144-x TC12K 144-x TC12K 144-x TC12K 144-x TC12K 144-x TC16M 240-x TC4MHR 192-x TC4MHR 192-x TC16M 192-x TC16M 144-x TC16M 192-x TC12K 192-x TC12K 192-x TC12K 192-x TC12K 192-x TC4K180-x TC16M 240-x TC4MHR 240-x TC4MHR 240-x TC16M 192-x TC16M 240-x TC12K 240-x TC12K 240-x TC12K 240-x TC12K 240-x TC16M 240-x 305

307 FOV 1/3 w x h 4.8 x 3.6 mm 1.5 to 2 mm MC300X MC300X MC3-03X 1/2.5 w x h 5.70 x 4.28 mm MC3-03X 2 to 3 mm MC200X MC200X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC300X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC300X MC300X MC3-03X 3 to 4 mm MC150X MC150X MC200X MC200X MC3-03X MC3-03x MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X 4 to 6 mm MC100X MC100X MC150X MC150X MC200X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC150X 6 to 8 mm MC075X MC075X MC100X MC100X MC3-03X MC4K200X-x MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC4K175X-x 8 to 11 mm MC050X MC3-03X MC075X MC075X MC100X MC4K150X-x MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC4K125X-x 11 to 15 mm MC033X MC050X MC050X MC050X MC075X MC4K100X-x MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03x MC3-03X 15 to 20 mm MC3-03X MC033X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC050X MC4K075X-x MC3-03X 1/2 w x h 6.4 x 4.8 mm MC033X 1/1.8 w x h 7.13 x 5.37 mm 20 to 30 mm MC3-03x MC3-03X MC3-03x MC033X MC033X MC4K050X-x MC3-03X 2/3-5 Mpx w x h 8.45 x 7.07 mm MC3-03X 30 to 40 mm MC3-03x MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X 1 - KAI mm diag 12.8 x 9.6 mm 40 to 50 mm MC3-03x MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC4K025X-x 50 to 70 mm 60 mm MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC3-03X MC4K025X-x 90 mm 140 mm 180 mm 290 mm 400 mm 570 mm 70 to 100 mm 80 mm 70 mm 60 mm MC3-03X MC3-03X RT-FL-YFL mm 110 mm 100 mm RT-FL-YFL5028A mm 160 mm 140 mm RT-FL-YFL mm 210 mm 190 mm 390 mm 330 mm 300 mm 550 mm 460 mm 420 mm 780 mm 660 mm 600 mm 100 to 150 mm 110 mm 90 mm 80 mm 80 mm 60 mm RT-FL-YFL mm 150 mm 130 mm 120 mm 100 mm RT-FL-YFL5028A mm 220 mm 200 mm 180 mm 150 mm RT-FL-YFL mm 300 mm 270 mm 240 mm 210 mm 550 mm 460 mm 420 mm 380 mm 320 mm 760 mm 650 mm 580 mm 530 mm 450 mm 150 to 200 mm 160 mm 140 mm 120 mm 110 mm 90 mm 100 mm 260 mm 220 mm 200 mm 180 mm 150 mm 160 mm 390 mm 330 mm 290 mm 260 mm 230 mm 200 mm 520 mm 440 mm 390 mm 350 mm 300 mm 320 mm 810 mm 680 mm 610 mm 550 mm 470 mm 450 mm 960 mm 860 mm 770 mm 660 mm 640 mm 940 mm 200 to 300 mm 210 mm 180 mm 160 mm 150 mm 120 mm 130 mm 340 mm 290 mm 260 mm 230 mm 200 mm 210 mm 510 mm 430 mm 390 mm 350 mm 300 mm 270 mm 680 mm 580 mm 520 mm 460 mm 390 mm 420 mm 900 mm 810 mm 730 mm 620 mm 580 mm 860 mm 830 mm 300 to 400 mm 320 mm 270 mm 240 mm 220 mm 180 mm 200 mm 510 mm 430 mm 380 mm 340 mm 290 mm 310 mm 760 mm 640 mm 570 mm 520 mm 440 mm 390 mm 860 mm 770 mm 690 mm 580 mm 610 mm 910 mm 860 mm 400 to 500 mm 420 mm 360 mm 320 mm 290 mm 240 mm 260 mm 670 mm 570 mm 510 mm 460 mm 390 mm 400 mm 850 mm 760 mm 690 mm 580 mm 520 mm 910 mm 770 mm 810 mm 500 to 1000 mm 530 mm 440 mm 400 mm 360 mm 300 mm 320 mm 840 mm 710 mm 630 mm 570 mm 480 mm 500 mm 950 mm 850 mm 720 mm 640 mm 960 mm 306

308 SENSOR SIZE SENSOR SIZE CHART ENTOCENTRIC KAI4022/ mm diag 15.2 x 15.2 mm MC4K200X-x MC4K175X-x MC4K200X-x MC4K200X-x MC4K150X-x 4/3 - KAI mm diag 18.1 x 13.6 mm MC4K175X-x Line - 2k 2k x 10 µm mm MC4K125X-x MC4K150X-x MC4K175X-x MC4K200X-x MC4K100X-x Line - 4k 4k x 7 µm mm MC4K150X-x MC4K075X-x MC4K075X-x MC4K075X-x MC4K125X-x MC12K200-x MC12K150-x MC12K200-x MC12K200-x RT-OPKE16-300M95 RT-OPKE16-300M95 RT-OPKE16-300M95 MC4K050X-x MC4K100X-x MC12K150-x Full frame - 35mm w x h 36 x 24 mm MC4K050X-x MC4K050X-x MC4K050X-x MC4K075X-x MC4K075X-x MC12K100-x MC12K150-x MC12K150-x MC12K200-x MC12K200-x MC4K075X-x MC4K075X-x MC4K050X-x MC12K100-x MC12K100-x MC12K100-x MC12K067-x MC12K067-x MC12K150-x MC12K150-x RT-OPKE16-200M95 MC4K025X-x MC4K025X-x MC4K025X-x MC4K050X-x MC12K067-x MC12K067-x MC12K100-x MC12K100-x MC12K100-x MC12K100-x RT-OPKE16-150M95 MC12K050-x Line - 8k 8k x 7 µm 57.3 mm Line -16k 16k x 3.5 µm 57.3 mm MC4K125X-x MC4K150X-x Line - 8k MC4K100X-x MC4K100X-x MC4K125X-x MC4K175X-x 8k x 5 µm MC12K200-x RT-OPKE16-300M95 RT-OPKE16-300M mm Line - 2k 12k x 5 µm 61.4 mm Line - 12k 12k x 5.2 µm 62.4 mm Line - 16k 16k x 5.2 µm 81.9 mm MC4K025X-x MC4K025X-x MC4K025X-x MC4K025X-x MC12K050-x MC12K050-x MC12K067-x MC12K067-x MC12K067-x MC12K067-x RT-OPKE16-100M95 RT-A-1620MX5M@100 RT-A-2520MX5M@150 RT-A-3520MX5M@200 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL5028A-035 MC4K025X-x RT-FL-YFL5028A-02 MC12K025-x MC12K050-x MC12K050-x MC12K050-x MC12K050-x RT-OPKE16-070M95 RT-FL-YFL5028A-02 RT-FL-YFL5028A-02 RT-FL-YFL5028A-035 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-A-1620MX5M@120 RT-A-1620MX5M@110 RT-A-2520MX5M@190 RT-A-2520MX5M@170 RT-A-3520MX5M@270 RT-A-3520MX5M@230 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL5028A-02 MC12K025-x MC12K025-x MC12K025-x MC12K025-x MC12K025-x MC12K025-x RT-OPKE16-050M95 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-A-1620MX5M@180 RT-A-1620MX5M@150 RT-A-2520MX5M@270 RT-A-2520MX5M@230 RT-A-3520MX5M@380 RT-A-3520MX5M@330 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 MC12K012-x MC12K012-x MC12K025-x MC12K025-x MC12K025-x MC12K025-x RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028A-02 RT-A-2428Mx@160 RT-A-1620MX5M@230 RT-A-1620MX5M@200 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-A-2520MX5M@360 RT-A-3520MX5M@500 RT-A-2520MX5M@300 RT-A-3520MX5M@430 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 MC12K012-x MC12K012-x RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 MC12K008-x RT-A-1224MX5M@300 RT-A-1620MX5M@290 RT-A-2428Mx@230 RT-A-1620MX5M@340 RT-A-2520MX5M@440 RT-A-3525Mx@330 RT-A-2520MX5M@520 RT-A-3520MX5M@620 RT-A-5018Mx@470 RT-A-3520MX5M@730 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 MC12K008-x MC12K008-x MC12K012-x MC12K012-x MC12K012-x MC12K012-x RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-A-2428Mx@300 RT-A-1224MX5M@330 RT-A-1224MX5M@300 RT-A-2828Mx@350 RT-A-1620MX5M@450 RT-A-1620MX5M@370 RT-A-3525Mx@450 RT-A-2520MX5M@690 RT-A-2520MX5M@580 RT-A-5018Mx@610 RT-A-3520MX5M@950 RT-A-3520MX5M@810 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 RT-FL-YFL3528 MC12K008-x MC12K008-x MC12K012-x MC12K012-x MC12K012-x MC12K012-x RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-FL-YFL5028 RT-A-2428Mx@360 MC12K008-x MC12K008-x MC12K008-x MC12K008-x RT-A-1224MX5M@400 RT-A-1224MX5M@350 RT-A-2828Mx@450 RT-A-1620MX5M@560 RT-A-1620MX5M@460 RT-A-3525Mx@550 RT-A-2520MX5M@850 RT-A-2520MX5M@720 RT-A-5018Mx@750 RT-A-3520MX5M@1200 RT-A-3520MX5M@

309 LONGEST SIDE COLLIMATED BACKLIGHT BAR/LINE LIGHT DOME OF ILLUMINATED OBJECT Circular Beam Linear Beam 1 to 1.5 mm LTCLHP023x-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 1.5 to 2 mm LTCLHP023x-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 2 to 3 mm LTCLHP023x-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 3 to 4 mm LTCLHP023x-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 4 to 6 mm LTCLHP023x-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 6 to 8 mm LTCLHP023x-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 8 to 11 mm LTCLHP023x-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 11 to 15 mm LTCLHP016-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 15 to 20 mm LTCLHP024-x RT-BHDS-25X36-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTBP x LTBP x 20 to 30 mm LTCLHP036-x RT-BHDS-31X58-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTCLCR036-x LTBC x LTBP x LTBP x 30 to 40 mm LTCLHP036-x RT-BHDS-31X58-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMA1-x LTCLCR036-x LTBC x LTBP x LTBP x 40 to 50 mm LTCLHP048-x RT-BHDS-31X58-1-x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMB2-x LTCLCR048-x LTBC x LTBP x LTBP x 50 to 70 mm LTCLHP056-x LTCL4K060-x LTBC x RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMB2-x LTCLCR056-x RT-BHD x-24V-FL LTBP x LTDMCX-x LTCLHP064-x LTCLCR064-x RT-BHDS x-24V-FL LTBP x 70 to 100 mm LTCLHP080-x LTCL4K090-x LTBC x RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTDMCX-x LTCLCR080-x RT-BHD x-24V-FL RT-LBRX x-24V-FL LTCLHP096-x LTBP x LTBP x LTCLCR096-x LTLNC100-W 100 to 150 mm LTCLHP120-x LTCL4K120-x LTBC x RT-LBRX x-24V-FL RT-IDS x-24V-FL LTCLHP144-x LTCL4K180-x LTBC x RT-LBRX x-24V-FL RT-IDS x-24V-FL LTBP x LTBP x LTLNC150-W 150 to 200 mm LTCLHP192-x LTCL4K180-x LTBC x RT-LBRX x-24V-FL RT-IDS x-24V-FL LTBC x LTBP x RT-IDS x-24V-FL LTBP x 200 to 300 mm LTCLHP240-x LTBC x LTBP x RT-IDS x-24V-FL LTBP x 308

310 SELECTION CHART ILLUMINATORS RINGLIGHT COMBINED TUNNEL COAXIAL Low Angle Normal Angle Diffused Direct Diffused Direct RT-DLR x-24V-FL LTRN023xx LTVTBENCH RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL LTRN023xx LTVTBENCH RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL LTRN023xx LTVTBENCH RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL LTRN023xx LTVTBENCH RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL LTRN023xx LTVTBENCH RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL LTRN023xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTVTBENCH RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTRN016xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTVTBENCH RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x LTDMLAB2-WW RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTRN016xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTVTBENCH RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x LTDMLAB2-WW RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTRN024xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTVTBENCH RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTRN050x45 LTDMLAB2-WW LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTRN036xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTVTBENCH RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTRN050x45 LTDMLAB2-WW LTRN075x45 LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTRN036xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTVTBENCH RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTRN075x45 LTRN048xx LTDMLAB2-WW LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTRN048xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTDMLAB2-WW RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL LTRN165x45 LTRN056xx LTRN165x20 RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTLAB2-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LLA x-24V-FL LTRN064xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTDMLAB2-WW RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTRN080xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTDMLACx-WW LTRN165x45 LTRN165x20 LTRN245x35 LTRN245x45 LTLACX-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LLA x-24V-FL LTRN096xx RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTDMLACx-WW RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-CAS x-x-24V-FL RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LSW x-24V-FL LTRN120xx LTRN165x20 LTRN245x25 LTLACX-x RT-DLR x-24V-FL RT-LLA x-24V-FL LTRN120xx RT-IDT x-24V-FL RT-LLA x-24V-FL LTRN144xx RT-LLA x-24V-FL 309

311 FILTER THREAD COMPATIBILITY TABLE COMPUTAR Part number Filter thread H0514-MP2 M43 x P0.75 M0814-MP2 M30.5 x P0.5 M1214-MP2 M30.5 x P0.5 M1614-MP2 M30.5 x P0.5 M2514-MP2 M30.5 x P0.5 M3514-MP M30.5 x P0.5 M5018-MP2 M30.5 x P0.5 M7528-MP M30.5 x P0.5 M0824-MPW2 C25.4 M1224-MPW2 M27 x P0.5 M1620-MPW2 M27 x P0.5 M2518-MPW2 M27 x P0.5 M3520-MPW2 M27 x P0.5 M5028-MPW2 M27 x P0.5 M2518-MPW M30.5 x P0.5 M3Z1228C-MP M35.5 x P0.5 MLH-10X C25.4 MLM-3XMP C25.4 TEC-V7X C25.4 TEC-M55MPW C25.4 TEC-M55 M43 x P0.75 M1614-SW M30.5 x P0.5 M2514-SW M30.5 x P0.5 M3514-SW M30.5 x P0.5 M5018-SW M30.5 x P0.5 FUJINON Part number Filter thread HF12.5SA-1 C25.4 HF16SA-1 C25.4 HF25SA-1 C25.4 HF35SA-1 C25.4 HF50SA-1 C25.4 HF75SA-1 C25.4 CF12.5SA-1 C25.4 CF16SA-1 C25.4 CF25SA-1 C25.4 CF35SA-1 C25.4 CF50SA-1 C25.4 CF75SA-1 C25.4 DF6HA-1B M27 x P0.5 HF9HA-1B M27 x P0.5 HF12.5HA-1B C25.4 HF161HA-1B C25.4 HF25HA-1B C25.4 HF35HA-1B C25.4 HF50HA-1B C25.4 HF75HA-1B M30.5 x P0.5 TH8DA-8B M27 x P0.5 TH25DA-8B C25.4 TF4DA-8B M27 x P0.5 TF15DA-8B C25.4 HF35SR4A-SA1L C25.4 HF50SR4A-SA1L C25.4 GOYO Part number Filter thread GM23514MCN C25.4 GM23516MCN M43 x P0.75 GM24514MCN C25.4 GM26014MCN M27 x P0.5 GMN36014MCN-1 C25.4 GM38013MCN-1 C25.4 GMN38014MCN-1 M27 x P0.5 GM21214MCN M27 x P0.5 GMN31214MCN-1 M27 x P0.5 GM31614MCN M27 x P0.5 GOYO Part number Filter thread GMN31614MCN-1 M27 x P0.5 GM32514MCN M27 x P0.5 GMN32516MCN-1 M27 x P0.5 GM23512MCN C25.4 GM33519MCN M27 x P0.5 GMN33516MCN-1 M30.5 x P0.5 GM35018MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMN35020MCN-1 M30.5 x P0.5 GMT35018MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GM37527MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMN37525MCN-1 C25.4 GM310035MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMN310028MCN-1 C25.4 GMTHR23514MCN C25.4 GMTHR24514MCN C25.4 GMHR26012MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMHR26014MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMTHR21614MCN C25.4 GMTHR36014MCN C25.4 GMHR38014MCN-1 M27 x P0.5 GMTHR38014MCN M27 x P0.5 GMXHR38014MCN M35.5 x P0.5 GMHR31214MCN-1 M27 x P0.5 GMTHR31214MCN M27 x P0.5 GMXHR31218MCN-1 M35.5 x P0.5 GMHR31614MCN-1 M27 x P0.5 GMTHR31614MCN M27 x P0.5 GMXHR31614MCN-1 M35.5 x P0.5 GMHR32514MCN-1 M27 x P0.5 GMTHR32514MCN C25.4 GMXHR32514MCN M35.5 x P0.5 GMHR33520MCN M27 x P0.5 GMTHR33520MCN C25.4 GMXHR33514MCN-1 M35.5 x P0.5 GMHR35028MCN M27 x P0.5 GMTHR35028MCN C25.4 GMTHR48014MCN C25.4 GMTHR412514MCN M35.5 x P0.5 GMTHR41614MCN M35.5 x P0.5 GMTHR42514MCN M35.5 x P0.5 GMTHR43514MCN M35.5 x P0.5 GMTHR45014MCN C25.4 GMHR47518MCN-1 C25.4 GMMPZ4411MCN M43 x P0.75 GMMPZ1040MCN C25.4 GMMPZ20100MCN C25.4 GMMPZ1664MCN C25.4 GM12HR62520MCN C25.4 GM12HR63520MCN C25.4 GM12HR65020MCN C25.4 GMO12HR55018MCN C25.4 GM12HR41216MCN M52 x P0.75 GM12HR41616MCN C25.4 GM12HR42016MCN C25.4 GM12HR42516MCN C25.4 GM12HR43514MCN C25.4 GM12HR38016MCN C25.4 GM12HR39014MCN-1 C25.4 GM12HR31216MCN C25.4 GM12HR312514MCN-1 C25.4 GM12HR31616MCN C25.4 GM12HR31814MCN-1 C25.4 GM12HR32514MCN C25.4 GM12HR33514MCN C25.4 GM12HR35018MCN C25.4 GM12HR37520MCN C25.4 GM8MPDN41450MCN C25.4 GOYO Part number Filter thread GM6HR38014MCN M27 x P0.5 GM6HR31214MCN M27 x P0.5 GM6HR31614MCN M27 x P0.5 GM6HR32514MCN M27 x P0.5 GMB5HR30528MCN C25.4 GMB5HR38014MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMA5HR38028MCN C25.4 GMA5HR31218MCN C25.4 GMR5HR31614MCN M27 x P0.5 GM5HR31614MCN C25.4 GMB5HR31614MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMR5HR32514MCN M27 x P0.5 GM5HR32514MCN C25.4 GMB5HR32514MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMR5HR33516MCN M27 x P0.5 GM5HR33514MCN C25.4 GMR5HR35028MCN M27 x P0.5 GMB5HR35028MCN M30.5 x P0.5 GMTHR41614MCN-SWIR M35.5 x P0.5 GMTHR42514MCN-SWIR M35.5 x P0.5 GMTHR43514MCN-SWIR M35.5 x P0.5 GMG42514MCN-SWIR C25.4 GMG45018MCN-SWIR C25.4 GMG47518MCN-SWIR C25.4 KOWA Part number Filter thread LM6JC C25.4 LM8JC M27 x P0.5 LM12JC M27 x P0.5 LM16JC M27 x P0.5 LM25JC M27 x P0.5 LM35JC M30.5 x P0.5 LM50JC M30.5 x P0.5 LM75JC M30.5 x P0.5 LM100JC M30.5 x P0.5 LM5JCM C25.4 LM8JC1MS M27 x P0.5 LM12JC1MS M27 x P0.5 LM16JC1MS M27 x P0.5 LM25JC1MS M27 x P0.5 LM35JC1MS M27 x P0.5 LM50JC1MS M27 x P0.5 LMZ69M C25.4 LMZ45T3 M52 x P0.75 LM50TC C25.4 LM5JC10M C25.4 LM8JC10M C25.4 LM12JC10M C25.4 LM16JC10M C25.4 LM25JC10M C25.4 LM35JC10M C25.4 LM50JC10M M30.5 x P0.5 LM12JC5M2 M30.5 x P0.5 LM16JC5M2 M30.5 x P0.5 LM25JC5M2 M30.5 x P0.5 LM35JC5M2 M30.5 x P0.5 LM16JC5MM-IR M30.5 x P0.5 LM25JC5MM-IR M30.5 x P0.5 LM35JC5MM-IR M35.5 x P0.5 LM25JCR M30.5 x P0.5 LM12JCM-V M27 x P0.5 LM8JCM-V M27 x P0.5 LM16JCM-V M27 x P0.5 LM25JCM-V M27 x P0.5 LM35JCM-V M27 x P0.5 LM50JCM-V M27 x P

312 KOWA Part number Filter thread LM6HC C25.4 LM8HC C25.4 LM12HC M35.5 x P0.5 LM16HC M35.5 x P0.5 LM25HC M35.5 x P0.5 LM35HC M35.5 x P0.5 LM50HC C25.4 LM75HC C25.4 LM8HC-SW C25.4 LM12HC-SW M35.5 x P0.5 LM16HC-SW M35.5 x P0.5 LM25HC-SW M35.5 x P0.5 LM35HC-SW M35.5 x P0.5 LM50HC-SW C25.4 LM12SC C25.4 LM16SC C25.4 LM25SC C25.4 LM35SC C25.4 LM50SC C25.4 LM8HC-V C25.4 LM12HC-V M35.5 x P0.5 LM16CH-V M35.5 x P0.5 LM25HC-V M35.5 x P0.5 LM35HC-V M35.5 x P0.5 LM50HC-V C25.4 LM8XC C25.4 LM12XC C25.4 LM16XC C25.4 LM25XC C25.4 LM35XC C25.4 LM50XC C25.4 LM28CLS C25.4 LM35CLS C25.4 LM50CLS M52 x P0.75 LM50-IR-F M52 x P0.75 LM50-IR-P M52 x P0.75 LM35LF-48 M52 x P0.75 LM50LF-48 M52 x P0.75 LM5NCR M30.5 x P0.5 LM6NCR M30.5 x P0.5 LMVZ655 M43 x P0.75 LMVZ655A M43 x P0.75 LMVZ990-IR M43 x P0.75 LMVZ990A-IR M43 x P0.75 LM12NCR M30.5 x P0.5 LMVZ4411 M43 x P0.75 OPTART Part number Filter thread VHF8MK C25.4 VHF12.5MK M35.5 x P0.5 VHF16MK M35.5 x P0.5 VHF25MK M35.5 x P0.5 VHF35MK M35.5 x P0.5 VHF50MK C25.4 VHF75MK C25.4 MK8M-5MP C25.4 MK12M-5MP C25.4 MK16M-5MP C25.4 MK25M-5MP C25.4 MK35M-5MP C25.4 MK0614 M30.5 x P0.5 MK0814 M30.5 x P0.5 MK1214 M30.5 x P0.5 MK1614 M30.5 x P0.5 MK1614K M30.5 x P0.5 MK2514 C25.4 OPTART Part number Filter thread MK3520 C25.4 MK5028 C25.4 HF3.5M-2 M43 x P0.75 LM6JC C25.4 LM8JC M27 x P0.5 LM12JC M27 x P0.5 LM16JC M27 x P0.5 LM25JC M27 x P0.5 LM35JC M30.5 x P0.5 LM50JC M30.5 x P0.5 LM75JC C25.4 LM100JC C25.4 VMK1214-C C25.4 VMK1614-C C25.4 VMK2514-C C25.4 VMK3514-C C25.4 VMK5014-C C25.4 VMK7518-C C25.4 MK0814-C C25.4 MK1214-C M30.5 x P0.5 MK1614-C M30.5 x P0.5 MK2514-C M30.5 x P0.5 MK3514-C C25.4 MK5014-C C25.4 MK8M-SWIR C25.4 MK12M-SWIR C25.4 MK16M-SWIR C25.4 MK25M-SWIR C25.4 MK35M-SWIR C25.4 QIOPTIQ Part number Filter thread Mevis C 12 mm M35.5 x P0.5 Mevis C 16 mm M35.5 x P0.5 Mevis C 25 mm M35.5 x P0.5 Mevis C 35 mm M35.5 x P0.5 Mevis C 50 mm M35.5 x P0.5 Rogonar-S 25 M30.5 x P0.5 Rogonar-S 35 M30.5 x P0.5 RICOH Part number Filter thread FL-HC0416X-VG C25.4 FL-HC0612A-VG C25.4 FL-HC1212B-VG M27 x P0.5 FL-CC0418DX-VG C25.4 FL-CC0815B-VG C25.4 FL-CC1614A-VG M27 x P0.5 FL-BC1214D-VG C25.4 FL-BC1218A-VG C25.4 FL-BC2514D-VG M27 x P0.5 FL-BC2518-VG C25.4 FL-BC5014A-VG C25.4 FL-HC0614-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-HC1214-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC1614-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC2514-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC3516-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC5028-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC7528-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-CC0614A-2M C25.4 FL-CC0814A-2M C25.4 FL-CC1214A-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC1614A-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC2514A-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-CC5024A-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-CC0814-5M C25.4 RICOH Part number Filter thread FL-CC1614-5M C25.4 FL-CC2514-5M C25.4 FL-BC2518-9M C25.4 FL-BC3518-9M C25.4 FL-CC5024-9M C25.4 FL-BC7528-9M C25.4 FL-HC0614-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-HC1214-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC1614-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC2514-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC3516-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC5028-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC7528-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-CC0614A-2M C25.4 FL-CC0814A-2M C25.4 FL-CC1214A-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC1614A-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC2514A-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-CC3516-2M M27 x P0.5 FL-CC5024A-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-CC7528-2M M30.5 x P0.5 FL-CC2518-9M C25.4 FL-CC3518-9M C25.4 FL-CC5024-9M C25.4 FL-CC7528-9M C25.4 FL-CC5028A-5M02 M52 x P0.75 FL-CC5028A-5M035 M52 x P0.75 FL-BC2528-VGUV C25.4 FL-BC7838-VGUV C25.4 FL-HC6Z0810-VG C25.4 FL-CC6Z1218-VG C25.4 FL-CC6Z1218A-VG C25.4 TAMRON Part number Filter thread M111FM08 C25.4 M111FM16 C25.4 M111FM25 C25.4 M111FM08 C25.4 M23FM06 C25.4 M23FM08 M52 x P0.75 M23FM12 C25.4 M23FM16 C25.4 M23FM25 C25.4 M23FM35 C25.4 M23FM50 C FM16SP M30.5 x P0.5 23FM25SP M30.5 x P0.5 23FM50SP M30.5 x P0.5 M118FM06 C25.4 M118FM08 C25.4 M118FM12 C25.4 M118FM16 C25.4 M118FM25 C25.4 M118FM50 C HA M35.5 x P HA/HB C HA/HB C HD/HF C HA/HC C HB C HA/HC C25.4 1A1HB C

313 Opto Engineering Notes Tools and resources Extended documentation is available on our website, localized in nine languages. For every part number you will find full specifications, product compatibilities, 2D and 3D models in the most popular CAD formats. Interactive tools such as the TC selection form and the telecentric/ entocentric sensor charts provide an essential aid in navigating our product range. Moreover, we regularly publish papers and video guides about Opto Engineering products and technologies as well as broader machine vision optics tutorials.